Home

ROCLINK for Windows User Manual - Welcome to Emerson Process

Contents

1.
2. 4 16 Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual For a Pulse Input implemented in a PI module the input signal must be scanned often enough such that rollover in the module s 16 bit counter which occurs at 65535 is not missed For example A 10 kHz input signal must be scanned at least every 6 5 seconds to register the value before rollover occurs Once the Scan Period is reached the Accum d Pulses Pulses Today Today s Total Yesterday s Total and Current Rate values update 4 Enter the Accum d Pulses as the value of the raw counts accumulated pulses stored in an accumulated value counter that resides in the firmware For each Scan Period the ROC determines the number of raw counts that have occurred since the last Scan Period and adds them to the accumulated value counter The accumulated value rolls over to zero after reaching 8 388 607 for a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit and 16 000 000 for a FloBoss 500 Series unit 5 Enter Today s Total to reflect the total EUs accumulated since the most recent Contract Hour Today s Total is reset to zero at Contract Hour Yesterday s Total reflects the total EUs accumulated since the most recent 24 hour period prior to the Contract Hour Yesterday s Total is the previous day s total at Contract Hour Uncorrected Accum reflects the total EUs accumulated during the most recent 24 hour period prior to the Contract Hour This field s value is the p
3. Point Type Definition Interpret the information in the I O Definition field for example AIN A 3 EU in the following manner The first part is a three character mnemonic in this example AIN means Analog Input that indicates the Point Type The second part such as A 3 indicates the Point Number The third part is a mnemonic indicating the selected Parameter such as EU for the Filtered Engineering Units Parameter To use the TLP Box 1 Select the Point Type to use 2 Select the exact Logical Number For example An Analog Input Point Type that you might select is AIN A 2 3 Select the specific Parameter to use For example An Analog Input is typically Filtered EUs 1 8 Configuration Overview If you are performing an on line configuration for a ROC 300 Series or FloBoss 407 you must use the on line Full Configuration procedure to set up your hardware as described in Section 1 8 1 Configuration of a FloBoss 103 or FloBoss 500 Series unit can be performed off line or on line Refer to Section The advantage of off line configuration is the ability to perform most of the configuration without connecting to the FloBoss Off line configuration is performed either by taking an existing configuration file opening it and making the desired changes FloBoss 103 and 503 504 or by creating a new configuration file FloBoss 503 504 only Rev 05 03 Getting Started 1 17 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 8 1
4. and register 57437 Parameter 11 of Soft Point 10 11 Select the TLP ROC Parameter to specify the parameter of the Point Types you desire to set or acquire data Be aware of the different data types Character Integer Long Float and the size of the data types Use the TLP button to select parameters The ROC Parameter field denotes the type of data associated with an address Starting Register through Ending Register When the Host requests a valid range of register numbers the Function Code tells the Slave what to do and between which registers Starting Register through Ending Register The ROC Parameter defines what data is collected or which parameter is set 6 36 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 6 10 Download User Programs This option loads ROC User Programs from a disk file into ROC or FloBoss user memory When you select User Programs you can also view the Unused Memory Blocks 1 Select Utilities gt Download User Programs 2 Determine the Unused Memory Blocks The memory location must be available for the specific User Program that you are loading Refer to the User Program documentation for details concerning which memory location is required for that User Program 3 Select the User Program Files to Download using the Choose Files button This display lists the names of all the files that have the HOO extension and are located in the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for
5. eens C 5 Figure C 7 Copying Custom Display Data C 5 Figure C 8 Pasting Custom Display Data C 6 Figure C 9 Display from Disk C 7 Ele ENI EE 7 10 File Menu Drect Conn riunione 1 8 8 15 DOWILOJ nal 9 4 OPM ds 9 4 EREECHEN adosada 9 6 SS E ea one ET 5 1 Save ee UTA E 9 4 Files EE 1 13 Rev 05 03 Firmware Update o aio 3 15 o A ees eaaetecanece 8 12 Eenheete 1 14 3 2 3 4 Advanced Features ui ue 3 6 Eege 5 12 FlashPAC WP SPACING ton anno 3 18 A A arias i 6 25 6 36 Plo at Co Tite ele 6 36 FloBoss Communications Port Sep 8 5 Sie EE 7 1 7 2 ee EE a E 7 4 Accumulation Minute Value oooccncccnnccnniccnnocnno 7 4 Accumulation Time Bass 7 4 A VAN ITN enn Poeueniavwiec estan Monwiancustsvedes Veaneciouuteces 5 5 Sr EE 5 21 Dependant Formula 5 7 7 4 Dependant Lincar E 5 7 7 4 Mine ACUM EE 7 4 Weighted Formulaic oooooooooooonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 5 7 7 4 W Cle bea ET E 5 7 7 4 Flowing NAMES O o tata 7 1 7 2 Force A AA O 3 9 PREC AIC EN e WEE 5 12 FPV Method 5 10 EE A II eaten A 5 23 A A II A A ATA 5 23 Frequency Discrepancy eiege teege De ie ege geet 5 21 From TEE 7 11 Display Eo C 6 Eege EE 7 10 O O eee ee eae B 2 A O A B 3 Application Examples oooooooooooooccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnos B 36 A AE ae ere bh DE B 7 ASCU Text Ed Oir B 11 A A B 6 Command Examples csi dadas B 25 Command Libra ea dadas B 18 Commands Men B 15 Compare Plas CE EEN B 1 Comparison
6. 1 Select highlight the ROC Station Name or Group label 2 Right mouse click on the ROC Station Name or Group label 3 Select Rename 4 Type the new name of the Group label or ROC FloBoss Station Name over the previous label or Station Name 5 Press lt Enter gt e NOTE You can also rename a group or connection by highlighting the ROC or Group and clicking a second time to enable the field for editing Rev 05 03 ROC Directory 2 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 2 6 ROC Directory Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SECTION 3 CONFIGURING SYSTEM PARAMETERS This section describes how to set system preferences within the ROC or FloBoss such as the Clock Security System Information and Flags 3 1 Setting the ROC Clock Immediately after connecting to a ROC or FloBoss for the first time set the ROC Clock to ensure proper logging of history The internal real time clock provides time stamping and control of the historical databases Event Log Alarm Log Audit Log and Contract Hour NOTE Make sure that the clock is correctly set before placing the ROC or FloBoss into service and beginning to log values events and alarms The time stamp in the ROC reflects the time at the end of the period not at the beginning Data collected from 0800 to 0900 is thus time stamped 0900 2 Select ROC gt Clock or click the Clock icon in the toolbar ROC Clock El ES ROC s Date and Time Thurs
7. 10 SAW FSTLFST a 1 A2 END 1 STEP O VAL loads Register R1 into the Results Register 2 STEP 1 The value in the Results Register is raised to the power of ARGUMENT which is 10 STEP 2 The value in the Results Register is saved SAV to Register R2 for viewing STEP 3 Execution of the FST has completed END After a 100 millisecond delay execution restarts with STEP 0 NOTE For the power command no operation occurs if the incoming Results Register value equals zero 0 or if ARGUMENTI is less than or equal to zero 0 This example demonstrates the use of the exponent EXP command ZE LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENTZ eEenEeT SEO EI GEGTTIEGT GEUR 1 A2 1 STEP O VAL loads the Register R1 into the Results Register 2 STEP 1 EXP updates the Results Register with the value of e 2 718 raised to the power of the incoming Results Register value STEP 2 SAV stores the Results Register to Register R2 for viewing STEP 3 Execution of the FST has completed END After a 100 millisecond delay execution restarts with STEP 0 B 12 3 Absolute Value Integer Logarithm and Square Root FST This example demonstrates the use of the absolute value ABS command but also applies to the integer INT base 10 logarithm LOG natural logarithm LN and square root SQR commands NOTE No operation occurs with the LOG LN and SQR commands if the Results Register is less than o
8. 2 1 2 Deleting a Group To delete a Group under the ROC Root directory 1 Select a Group 2 Right mouse click 3 Select Delete Group 4 Click Yes in the Confirm Delete Message dialog 2 1 3 Adding a ROC Connection To add a new ROC under the ROC Root directory 1 Select highlight the ROC Root directory icon Right mouse click Select Add a ROC Type the Station Name of the ROC or FloBoss in the New ROCxx field Press lt Enter gt e E Configure the ROC or FloBoss communication parameters Y so NOTE You can nest a ROC connection under a Group by selecting the Group before adding the ROC Connection 2 4 ROC Directory Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 2 1 4 Deleting a ROC Connection To delete a ROC under the ROC Root directory 1 Select a ROC by highlighting the Station Name next to its icon 2 Right mouse click on the Station Name 3 Select Delete ROC 4 Click Yes in the Confirm Delete Message dialog 2 1 5 Deleting All ROC Connections To delete all ROC and FloBoss communication parameter configurations under the ROC Root directory so NOTE This deletes all ROC or FloBoss units that you currently have configured Select highlight the ROC Root directory icon S POC Root 1 2 Right mouse click 3 Select Delete All ROCs 4 Click Yes in the Confirm Delete Message dialog 2 1 6 Renaming a Group or ROC Connection To Rename a Group or ROC or FloBoss configuration parameter file
9. Data 9 Undefined EJ Data 20 Undefined Fc Data 410 Undefined 1 batanar Undefined Das i Undefined batatz Undefined Data 2344 2 Update Iw ox x Cancel t Apply Figure 6 2 Opcode Table Settings 2 Select the Table No for the Opcode screen Table Number is a number between and 4 Access other Opcode tables by using the drop down list box 3 Enter the Version No for the data configured in the Opcode screen If the configuration is changed then the Version Number should be updated This location can also be used as a sequence number by the host computer to make sure that read write communications are operating properly The Version Number is a floating point number 4 Enter the Data Points 1 to 44 data fields to select the Point Type Point Logical Number and Parameter of the data for this position in the Transmit or Receive Buffer The TLP button which is initially Undefined is used as an aid for the configuration of the Data Points fields Opcode 10 is used by the host to specify a specific Data Points field and request the information contained in that Data Points field 5 Select the Value using the TLP button to select the desired input or output assigned to the Opcode Data Points 6 4 MVS Sensor The Multi Variable Sensor MVS contains electronics that interface between the ROC or FloBoss Remote MVS Interface and the MVS body This interface controls communications with th
10. Inconsistent pulse count may need to re synch No pulses on Channel A when Channel B had pulses No pulses on Channel B when Channel A had pulses Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 21 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 Select Meter gt Set up gt Advanced tab 2 Select the API 5 5 option 3 Click the Alarms tab Refer to Figure 1992 Turbine Setup HEI General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Alarms Sampler Instrument Calib E Flow Alarms Sensor Alarms Low Alam 000 MCF Day Alam Dead Time E0 Seconds High Alarm Dm o MCF Day RBX Alarming REX Alarming C On Alarm Set COn Alarm Set C Dn Alarm Clear C On Alarm Clear OnAlarm Set and Clear On Alarm Set and Clear C Disabled C Disabled 2 Update ox x Cancel Y Apply Figure 5 18 Flow and Sensor Alarms 4 Enter the value at which you want a Low Alarm to generate 5 Enter the value at which you want a High Alarm to generate 6 Select the type of RBX Alarming you want for this Flow Alarm Disabled none On Alarm Set On Alarm Clear or On Alarm Set amp Clear 7 Enter the Alarm Dead Time value in seconds that must pass after a sensor alarm is cleared and before it can be re triggered to generate another alarm turbine 8 Select the type of RBX Alarming you want for this Sensor Alarm Disabled none On Alarm Set On Alarm Clear or On Alarm Set amp Clear 5 3 Calibration and
11. Meter SetUp 21 x General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced EPY Method r Units Atmospheric Pressure Gravitational Acceleration Detaled ve US C Metic C Calculate Enter Calculate C Enter C Gross E Gross2 14 45 PSIA 32 14357 Ft Sec2 Base Pressure 14 54 PSIA Base Temperature 70 Deg Elevation 500 Feet Latitude 35 Deg Stainless Steel Stainless Steel C Monel C Monel Orifice Material Pipe Material Carbon GG Carbon Ref Temp Ref Temp Viscosity 0 0000069 Lbm 68 DegF 68 emm i e Sp Heat Ratio Gravity Correction fi Pressure Tap Gauge Upstream Ge Flange Absolute Downstream Pipe Copy e Paste 2 Update lv x x Cancel Apply Figure 5 6 Orifice 1992 AGA Advanced ROC300 Series FlashPAC or FloBoss 407 Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 9 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1992 Turbine Setup HE General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms Atmospheric Pressure Gravitational Acceleration C Calculate Enter Calculate Ener C Grossi C Gross2 fi 4 45 PSIA 32 11478 Ft Sec2 Base Pressure fi 4 73 PSIA App Base Temperature 60 Deg O iaa Elevation 500 Feet C Level B ee C LevelC Latitude 35 De a C LevelD C Level E Static Press Force Recalculation Ge Gauge C Set Clear C Absolute 2 Update v o x Cancel Ecol
12. 13 14 Select the Primary PV input point defined as the Process Variable for the Primary loop of the PID algorithm If Control Type is set to Analog select the Primary Output Analog Output point to be assigned as the control output for the Primary loop of the PID algorithm If Control Type is set to Discrete select the DO Open Pt desired Discrete Output point to open the valve or other device If Control Type is set to Discrete select the DO Close Pt desired Discrete Output point to close the valve or other device Refer to Section Tuning PID Parameters on page 6 14 6 6 2 Primary PID Loop in Override Control To use Primary PID Loop in Override Control 1 Select Configure gt Control gt PID Refer to Figure 6 8 and Figure PID Loop PID Loop a ES PID nx PID hr sg r one Type Override D Tag FLOWCNTL FLOWCNTL Loop Status Disabled Scanning Mode Enabled f Manual Calc Time 1 50 Secs Ge Disabled C Auto Primary PM EN A 1 EU Ze Primary Output Undefined S Primary Switch DV EN 41 EU E Switch to Primary if Tag PID HI Loop Status Disabled ele Scanning Mode C Enabled o a Calc Time fi Secs Disabled Auto Loop Period D Secs Primary Setpoint jo Primary PY Undefined PS Process Variable bo Override PY Undefined a DOOpenPt Undefined DOClosePt Undefined Override Setpoint o Process Variable fo Overr
13. 2 A Paste 2 Update ox x Cancel Apply Figure 8 10 Analog Input RBX Alarming 8 14 Configuring Communications Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 3 Select the type of RBX Alarming desired for each RBX alarm monitored Before you do this you may want to make sure that each point to be monitored for RBX Alarming is not currently in alarm state otherwise the ROC or FloBoss will immediately attempt to contact the host Disabled Select Disabled under RBX Alarming to turn this option OFF On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report By Exception message and sends it to the receiving host device On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report By Exception message and sends it to the receiving host device On Alarm Set and Clear In either condition a Spontaneous Report By Exception message generates and sends it to the receiving host device After configuring RBX functions use Write to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM in the ROC Flags display to save the I O configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start 8 3 Connecting to a ROC or FloBoss Once communication parameters are configured you can connect to the ROC or FloBoss You can connect in several ways Direct Connect Connect to the ROC or FloBoss using the Local Port LOD if the
14. Advanced Features ROC300 Scenes ROC PAC cites tant ee E 3 7 Figure 3 7 ROC Flags Advanced Features FloBoss EE 3 7 Figure 3 8 ROC Information FloBoss 500 Series 3 8 Figure 3 9 Points FloBoss SO beres 3 9 Figure 4 1 Analog IOputs oooonnccnncncnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnno 4 5 Figure 4 10 TDO Barameterg 4 15 Figure 4 11 Pulse Inputs FloBoss 500 Series 4 16 Figure 4 12 Pulse Inputs FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Seres Mt E ls 4 16 Figure 4 13 Pulse Inputs Advanced 4 18 Figure 4 14 Monitoring Options 4 19 Figure 4 2 Analog Inputs Advanced 4 6 Figure 4 3 Analog Outputs oooooooonnncccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 4 7 Figure 4 4 Analog Outputs Advanced 4 8 Figure 4 5 Discrete Inputs ooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmmmm o 4 9 Figure 4 6 Discrete Inputs Advanced 4 10 Figure 4 7 Timed Duration Input Parameters 4 11 Figure 4 8 Discrete Output 4 12 Figure 4 9 Discrete Outputs Advanced 4 14 Figure 5 1 Meter Configuration Tree 2 5 1 Figure 5 10 Multi Variable Sensor Downstream 5 15 Figure 5 11 Meter Setup General 5 16 6 Figure 5 12 Meter Setup Advanced Downstream 5 16 Figure 5 13 Meter Setup Advanced Upstream 5 17 Figure 5 14 Multi Variable Sensor Upstream with Reverse DP iaa nd 5 17 Figure 5 15 Meter Set up Sampler FloBoss 500 A AAE EE E A A A A 5 18 Figure 5 16 Instrument Calibration Orifice FloBoss SL E 5 19 Figure 5 17 AGA Ala
15. Al Spare E5 Brd Temp ROC312 only For modular I O the point number is indicated next to the I O module installed in the slots and may be point number A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 or A12 Rev 05 03 Configuring Basic I O 4 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Discrete Analog Input Analog Output Discrete Input Output Pulse Input ROC364 Transmitter B9 B10 A1 to A12 E3 Aux DO 1 A13 to A16 Chen FlashPAC E2 Power In E4 Aux DO 2 voltage FlashPAC E3 Aux Pwr B11 to B16 Out 2 voltage ROCPAC E4 Aux Pwr Out 1 voltage ROCPAC E5 Brd Temp B1 to B8 For modular I O the order is the same as the I O modules installed in the slots proceeding left to right in each rack and top to bottom for multiple racks Example A7 A12 B3 B5 Point Numbers designated above with an A or B are located on the 32 point I O Card if installed Point Numbers designated with an E are diagnostic inputs FloBoss 103 A1 Diff Press B2 AO Default B3 DI B4 DO Default N A A2 Static Press A3 RTD B1 Aux Al E1 Logic Voltage E2 Bat Voltage E3 Spare E4 Spare E5 Brd Temp FloBoss 407 A1 Fixed Al 1 A7 selected by A2 selected by Ge P4 Jumper P4 El I E2 Power In E3 Al Spare 1 E4 Al Spare 2 E5 Brd Temp MVS flow points For modular I O the order is the same as the I O modules installed in the slot
16. Figure 5 7 1992 Turbine ISO Advanced FloBoss 500 Series 2 For 1992 version select FPV Method of Detailed Gross I and Gross II methods of calculating the compressibility factor under the 1992 AGA scheme For 1985 version select either the NX19 or AGAS method of calculating the compressibility factor under the AGA7 scheme If the Calc Type parameter is set to 1992 flow calculation the FPV Method can be set to Detailed Gross I and Gross II methods of calculating the compressibility factor If the Calc Type parameter is set to ISO 9951 flow calculation this parameter displays ISO 12213 4 parameters The Detailed method provides the highest accuracy in a broader range of measurement conditions however one of the Gross methods can be used when Temperature is between 0 and 54 C 32 and 130 F Pressure is between 0 and 1200 PSIA Gas composition is within the normal range as defined in the 1992 AGAS report Briefly the three methods are Detailed The Detailed method requires the natural gas composition in mole percent to be entered Refer to the information on the Gas Quality in Section on page 5 8 Gross I Gross Method I uses the density of the natural gas its heating value and the quantity of non hydrocarbon components as follows 1 Specific Gravity 2 Real gas gross heating value per unit volume 3 The mole of CO Gross Il Gross Method II uses the density of the natural gas as well as t
17. ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 8 2 4 1 Configuring Basic RBX Alarming Parameters When using RBX Alarming you must ensure that the alarms are Enabled and configured for each point that you want to monitor through RBX Alarming Configure the alarm parameters so that an alarm occurs only when desired For example assume you want to monitor the meter differential pressure for RBX Alarming The following is an example of how to configure basic RBX alarming parameters 1 Select Configure gt I O gt AI Points and Enable the Alarming parameter Analog Input General Advanced Al Calibration Alarms Analog Inputs Point Number Tag Dit Prez Walue Units IN H20 l Scanning Alarming Scan Period 1 Secs ESE Ce Enable Low Reading EU U Disable C Disable U High Reading EU Active Alarms Point Fail ES Paste 2 Update ox A Cancel Apply Figure 8 9 Enabling Alarming 2 Click the Alarms tab and ensure that the limits on the various alarms are set where you want them Configure the Low Alarm High Alarm LoLo Alarm HiHi Alarm and Rate Alarm limits as well as the Alarm Deadband accordingly such that an alarm occurs only when desired Refer to Figure Analog Input General Advanced Al Calibration Alarms Low Alarm High Alarm RBX Alarming LoLo Alarm E 0 C Disabled C On Alarm Set HiHi Alarm H 20 COn larm Clear On Alarm Set and Clear Rate Alarm 5 Alarm Deadband
18. Refer to TDO Parameters on page Select Toggle if you want the Discrete Output to enter the Toggle mode Toggle mode enables a square wave output for which 1 Both the Time On and Time Off are defined by the Time On parameter 2 Time On and Time Off are equal Select TDO Toggle if you want the Discrete Output to enter the TDO Toggle mode In the TDO Toggle mode the DO continuously repeats in a cycle defined by the Cycle Time parameter with the on time duration being controlled by the EU Value parameter When the TDO mode is enabled the TDO Parameters tab becomes available Select TDO Parameters tab to set the Cycle Time and EU Value parameters Refer to TDO Parameters in Section on page 4 15 5 Enter the Time On value The Time On default value is 1 second Time On indicates the following In Momentary mode this is the amount of time in seconds that the momentary contact is energized Inthe Toggle mode this value is the time in seconds between switching On or Off In the TDO and TDO Toggle modes this value is just an indicator of the on time of the output EU Value pulse width 6 After configuring a point click Apply Use Write to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM in the ROC Flags display to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a Cold Start Rev 05 03 Configuring Basic I O 4 13 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 5 1 1 DO Advanced 1 Select Configure gt I O gt DO Po
19. bd Bl Ol E Expand options listed in the ROC Directory or Configuration Tree Menu Hide options listed in the ROC Directory or Configuration Tree Menu m IC a Copy contents of window to Clipboard IO Cu pa Ti Paste contents of the Clipboard to the active window e Ic pdate Update contents of the active window Approve and close the active window A Confirm Save dialog box appears if there are unsaved changes A zt Cancel Cancel all changes and close the active window e ee r TI a SE Apply changes to the active window i iT Create New parameter Save contents of the active window on LU D BE Close the active window A Confirm Save dialog box appears if there are unsaved C ten Delete Delete current selection I esch 2 Getting Started Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 7 3 ToolBar Select Customize from the Tools menu to add delete or rearrange the buttons that display on the ToolBar Drag and drop the desired buttons from the Customize screen to ROCLINK software screen to add or remove buttons k New file Create a New Configuration File Available configuration parameters can be specified using menu selections Configure the file as 1f you were connected to the device The main difference is that functions requiring a live connection are unavailable in this mode Open a disk file Open an existing configuration file Configuration files ar
20. gt 0 SVD out 0 RR out RR in Otherwise SVD out 1 Logical AND ARG1 with SVD in 1 Database or Constant Value RR out RR in SVD out SVD in OR ARG1 SVD out SVD in XOR ARG1 Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 21 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 11 3 Comparison Commands FST Use comparison command to compare values Name Description Arguments Results Test If RR in equals ARG1 1 Database or Constant Value If RR in ARG1 Goto ARG2 Note that this command performs in a bit wise LABEL Otherwise continue to next command fashion so two floating Point Numbers may not RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Test If RR in Not Equal to ARG1 Database or Constant Value If RR in ARG1 Goto ARG2 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Test If RR in less than ARG1 Database or Constant Value If RR in lt ARG1 Go to ARG2 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Test If RR in less than or equal to Database or Constant Value If RR in lt ARG1 Go to ARG2 ARG1 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Test If RR in greater than ARG1 Database or Constant Value If RR in gt ARG1 Go to ARG2 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Test if RR in greater than or equal Database or Constant Value If RR in gt ARG1 go to ARG2 to A
21. 0 x 4 0 bit 3 1 x 8 8 bit 4 O x 16 0 bit 5 lx 32 32 bit 6 O x 64 0 bit 7 O x 128 0 Total 42 The following table summarizes the bit wise AND The following example ANDs the two integers 37 operation and 42 giving a result of 32 AND 0 1 Sr OD LOOOL gt AND 42 00101010 Ol as ia Eh Pr 32 OULO0000 The following table summarizes the bit wise Inclusive The following example ORs the two integers 37 OR operation and 42 giving a result of 47 OR O 1 3T O01001 0 ss OR 42 UULOTIOTO Or e _ SSS SS SS d t KC Ad OULOTITI The following table summarizes the bit wise Exclusive The following example Exclusive ORs the two OR operation integers 37 and 42 giving a result of 15 XOR 0 1 37 0000101 XOR 42 00101010 OO O Li Jk Lar WOOO Ty The following example demonstrates the use of the OR command to set the Auto Manual Mode bit of a PID point to Auto but the principles apply to the other logical commands STEP LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 Ess PID FLOWCNTL CONTAL WFST CMPELG AR 1 UC WFST CMPELG AR PID FLOWCNTL CONTAL 1 STEP 0 VAL loads the Results Register SVA with the value of the CONTRL parameter from PID Point Number with the Tag named FLOWCNTL 2 STEP 1 SAV copies the CONTRL parameter value now contained in the Results Register into the Compare Flag parameter of FST 1 The Results Register and Compare Flag contents are now the same Because there 1s no single command
22. B 6 LADA N B 18 Commands Menu Rev 05 03 PCS EE B 15 Communications Computer Paramotor is 8 2 COMES UA acia 8 1 HEEN eebe 2 2 8 1 A T DERNE 8 5 Problems anio cd 8 18 ROC and FloBoss Set up Parameters 8 5 A SR SEE SERENE ES EEN REDDES SSL ERE RESEN 8 5 Compare Plica B 2 B 3 A A PENSEL Se B 1 B 21 Compile A A vated reheat eet B 10 Computer Communications Parameter 8 2 e ENT E 1 2 Confis Command WE 8 10 Configuration WD PC AUG ad EE 1 18 EEN A II Jaan ceceee sane 7 1 Memory eegene 3 2 Ment Tri AS 1 10 Na Ss A A E O 1 13 JA a A 1 13 Be EE 1 17 A ri nace naan a ne ec ET ae 9 5 ENEE 9 6 SA een 9 1 Configure Menu COM O A A TA A 4 B 2 Control PID 6 11 6 12 6 14 Eegen 7 1 7 5 Eeer beer A 1 FED EE 3 15 LCD User List SEUD aorta Es 3 14 A O eee 6 21 MINS AS ds eee 6 4 Ree E 6 3 Radio Power Control 6 19 A A e EAEAN 6 1 KE Ee E 6 1 User DT dani 6 37 LBE WEE 25 eee drer rense ande Ske 3 14 Configuring Eeer 4 1 COMMUNIC ALIONNS uta 8 1 FISTO egan Eee Eee 7 6 Meter SC CU ass st ds 5 1 PUD CO e E 1 14 ROC MOr Oien a 3 8 System Fara moter EE 3 1 CONE EE 1 9 1 14 8 4 8 15 8 16 FREE TEE ege 1 8 8 15 Connecting Command ee e TE TET 8 11 EE Eegen 8 4 Local Communications OI 1 8 l 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Remote Communications occooccnnccnnncnnoccnuncnnnccnnninns 1 9 d E o GE 8 10 To the FloBoss or RO 1 8 8 15 Connection Errors Troublesho0 ati 8 18 C On NOUS oera E
23. B2 FST REGISTER PARAMETER EE B 2 Bo AA E E B 4 BA FON TON A EEN E B 6 B 5 BASIC RULES FOR CREATINGbals sneen esse ennen nens ere senere serene rss serene rrrsesr seet B 9 B 6 FSTS AND WRITING TO CONFIGURATION MEMORY oocccccccncnnnnocnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos B 10 Bel EE B 10 Bio VIEW MENO D Laia it aii aria pt oro B B MONITOR MENO ES Ls B 16 BAAO MONTORD OANT ee B BL COMMAND EIBRAR Ye FS EE F BI CONWMANDEXAVELES E KE B Bald LOGICAL COMMANDS PST EE B B 14 COMPARISON COMMANDS FST E B CN TIMESRELATED COMMANDS FOU E B 30 B 16 CONTROL RELATED COMMANDS PAI B B L7 DATABASE COMMANDS FS E B B S MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS FS E B BAG APPLICATION EXAMPLES EST EE B 36 Appendix C Custom Displays sicscsssccsccccssssessvcccccessestcccccessvessessccnsecnsevesecesesssecosessaeeess C 1 Rev 05 03 Table of Contents V ROCLINK for Windows User Manual vi Table of Contents Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SECTION 1 GETTING STARTED This section provides a summary of ROCLINK for Windows Configuration Software installation hardware overview basic software functions user interface and logging on to ROCLINK software 1 1 User Manual Overview This manual describes how to use ROCLINK software to configure and monitor FloBoss 103 Flow Managers FloBoss 500 Series Flow Managers FloBoss 407 Flow Managers ROC300 Series Remote Operations Controllers and other devices The softwar
24. Comm Ports FloBoss 500 Series Select the Communications Port on the ROC with which the ROC is using to communicate This can be Local Port LOD Port 1 Comm 1 Port 2 Comm 2 Port 3 Enter the 10 character Comm Tag name for identification of the communications port Enter the transmit and receive data Baud Rate in bits per second Select Even or Odd if Parity checks are to be performed by the communications controller Select the number of Data Bits contained in a character Select the number of Stop Bits contained in a character To use RBX Alarming alarm call in select RBX Mode Enabled and use the RBX Features tab Section 8 2 3 to configure the Comm Port to support RBX activity Configuring Communications Rev 05 03 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Select the Comm Port Security parameter Disabled All login requested accepted Access Level is ignored Enabled Login requested accepted if the User ID and Password are setup in Utilities gt Security Upon successful login full read and write access 1s allowed by the ROC or FloBoss Access Level is ignored Access Level Enabled Security level for each user is stored in the ROC or FloBoss This mode verifies the User ID and Password are valid and rejects a login request when the Access Level requested from ROCLINK is greater than the Access Level stored in the Utilities gt Security screen
25. Communication Ports Example 2 Y so NOTE The ROC Comm Ports screen varies depending on the type of FloBoss or ROC and whether a ROCPAC or FlashPAC is used The configuration of all communications ports is saved to programmable ROM when Write to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM is activated from the ROC Flags display Rev 05 03 Configuring Communications 8 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 8 2 1 Configuring Communications Ports on the ROC or FloBoss Each communications port has a unique screen with a set of parameters The ROC Comm Ports screen is used to set up communications ports available for incoming and outgoing communications with the ROC or FloBoss and not the personal computer PC PC communication ports are set up using the ROC Directory function in Section 8 1 Communication Parameters on page 8 1 8 8 1 es Sa e SS Select ROC gt Comm Ports to set up communications ports available for the ROC or FloBoss Comm Port General RE m Port la os Comm Tag Con Baud Rate Faity r Data Bits Stop E HRS Mode f None C7 Gi GG Enabled C 500 e olla Ce Disabled C 1200 C Odd C 2400 r Comm Fort Securty 4800 C Enabled e Access Level Ce 9600 Enabled Ce Disabled habe 19 24 Key On Delay Valid Receive Counter 0 01 a 0 Key Off Delay Idle Characters Comm Board 0 01 ID Seconds DES 24 Installed i E Lal Faste 2 Update Iw ol Xx Cancel Apply Figure 8 5
26. I O gt AI Points Refer to Figure Analog Input General Advanced Al Calibration Alarms Analog Inputs Point Number Tag Dit Pres Value Units IN H20 Scanning Alarming Scan Period 1 Secs CG Enable Ce Enable Low Reading EL U Disable CO Disable 0 High Reading EL Active Alarms Point Fail E EA Paste 5 Update Iw ox K Cancel H Apply Figure 4 1 Analog Inputs 2 Select the Analog Input and Point Number 3 Enter the Units value and a Tag identification name 4 If Scanning is set to Disable enter a Value to override the input When Scanning is set to Enable Value displays the last Analog Input scan in engineering unit Rev 05 03 Configuring Basic I O 4 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 Enter the Scan Period as the amount of time between updates of the Filter value Refer to AI Advanced on page 4 6 The default value is 1 second All Analog Inputs are updated based on their individual Scan Periods Enter the Low Reading EU engineering unit corresponding to zero percent input For example If a temperature transmitter is connected to the Analog Input with a range of 40 F to 160 F the Low Reading EU would be set to 40 Enter the High Reading EU corresponding to 100 percent input For example If a temperature transmitter is connected to the Analog Input with a range of 40 F to 160 F the High Reading EU would be set to 160 After configuring a poin
27. Low Reading EU 0 High Reading EU 1000 6 5 3 TDO Accuracy Resolution The accuracy of the output depends upon the sample rate of the ROC or FloBoss typically 50 ms and the width of the maximum pulse For the preceding example the accuracy in percent is sample rate 50 ms _ x 100 x 100 0 42 e maximum pulse width a l2sec SEH 6 8 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 6 5 4 TDO Time On The Time On field is located in the main Discrete Outputs screen The Time On field is calculated from the entered EU Value and the previous definitions of 0 Count 100 Count Low Reading EU and High Reading EU entered in the TDO Parameters screen The calculation formulas are EU Span High Reading EU Value Low Reading EU Count Span 100 Count 0 Count Entered EU Value x Count Span EU Span On Time 0 Count 6 5 5 TDO Toggle Cycle Time Cycle Time is defined in the TDO Parameters screen for TDO Toggle configurations The Cycle Time entry is used to define the OFF time in the TDO Toggle mode The OFF time is calculated by the formula Off Time Cycle Time On Time Example A TDO is used to emulate a field instrument measuring flow The TDO outputs a pulse width of 3 seconds for no flow and a pulse width of 12 seconds for 100 MCF per day flow The output is repeated every 15 seconds If the Cycle Time is less than or equal to the On Time the OFF time is set
28. Register R5 value by the current minute counter R6 and add the minute average to the current day accumulation R2 An extra division by 1440 converts the calculated minute average from EUs per Day to EUs per Minute If the current rate R1 has units of EUs per Hour then divide by 60 8 STEPS 23 25 Zero the current minute summation Register R5 and the current minute counter R6 for the new minute 9 STEPS 26 27 Check for the end of the contract day by comparing the current minute past midnight to the contract minute R8 10 STEPS 28 31 End of contract day detected Copy current day accumulation R2 to yesterday accumulation R3 and zero the current day accumulation R2 for the new day The current day accumulation can be historically archived as either the current value CUR or totalized value TTL Each provides up to 35 days of hourly and daily history B 19 6 Example 6 FST Tank Pumpdown Control The FST allows you to assemble sequences of functions to define process I O relationships that produce the desired control actions This is best illustrated using a simple process control example Using only five different commands an END command is always required and nine functions an FST can be created to automate the emptying of the tank shown in Figure B 15 One Analog Input is used to measure the fluid head or level in inches and one Discrete Output is used to control a pump and a fill valve The three fun
29. Set Zero NOTE The Difference Live Act Span is the percentage of difference of the Live Reading divided by the Span Click the Set Zero button Calibrate the span value 100 of range for Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units This should correspond with the 100 Count and is the high value to the input the top end of the expected operating range Refer to Figure For Diff Pressure or Low DP input if the sensor is configured for Downstream operation be sure to apply the calibrator pressure to the low labeled L side of the sensor Enter the value as positive even though the Live Reading is a negative value The software automatically compensates Static Pressure for Downstream 1s calibrated the same as for Upstream For Static Pressure on an absolute pressure device remember to add in the actual atmospheric pressure such as 300 14 73 Set 5pan Point Line Press Dead Weight T ester om Live Reading 0 0000000 Z Difference DEER a Live Act Span K Cancel Figure 5 23 Set Span NOTE Difference Live Act Span is the percentage of difference of the Live Reading divided by the Span 14 Click Set Span Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 25 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 9 26 If desired calibrate Midpoint 1 such as 25
30. The function configuration tables are used to associate Modbus register numbers with FloBoss ROC point data When a Modbus request 1s received the Modbus user program searches the function configuration table for the Modbus function requested starting with the first table entry down to the last If a register number match is found 1t builds a response based on the ROC point type and parameter configured in the table If no register number match is located an error message is returned The user program locates a register as long as it matches the Starting Register number the Ending Register number or any number in between for that particular entry in the table 6 30 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual When configuring the table register numbers should be unique Registers may be duplicated as long as they are located in a separate Modbus function configuration table If a register number is duplicated within the same Modbus function table the first occurrence is used In addition it is best to number the table from the smallest register number to the largest register number especially when using two table entries to configure a continuous group of registers Up to fifteen different lines can be configured for Modbus Functions 4 and 16 Up to thirty different lines can be configured for Modbus Function 3 split into tables 3A and 3B By making the registers continuous meaning the Starting Register address of a new
31. access another menu simply by using the lt Left Arrow gt and lt Right Arrow gt key The text scrolling keys are the lt Page Up gt and lt Page Down gt keys To use the keyboard in configuration screens and dialog boxes press the lt Tab gt key to move in a predetermined sequence from one parameter field or button to the next The selected field or button becomes highlighted Fields unavailable for changes are automatically skipped When you lt Tab gt to the last field or button in the screen or dialog box pressing the lt Tab gt key again jumps back to the first field or button To go back to a previous field or button press lt Shift Tab gt In an option field the currently selected option 1s highlighted To select one of the other options use the lt Up Arrow gt and lt Down Arrow gt keys to highlight the desired option and then press lt Enter gt In a field that requires a text or numerical entry type in the required characters or numbers from the keyboard Use the lt Backspace gt or lt Delete gt keys to erase unwanted characters Use the lt Left Arrow gt and lt Right Arrow gt to move the cursor one character at a time and the lt Home gt and lt End gt keys to place the cursor at the beginning and end of the field respectively Other keys or key combinations include lt F1 gt Launches ROCLINK for Windows software on line help lt Esc gt Cancels the current activity closes the screen and ret
32. accessories are installed Part Number Part number of the accessory or main firmware Version Version control number of the accessory or main firmware 3 4 Security ROCLINK software has two types of security ROCLINK Security Enables who can access ROCLINK software and what menu items the user can access Utilities gt Security ROC Security Use ROC Security ROC gt ROC Security to control who has access to the communications port Liquid Crystal Display LCD or Local Display Panel LDP for a connected device If you enable LCD User List Setup Security you must also setup what parameters display on the LCD Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 11 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Y so NOTE Refer to Comm Port Security in Section 8 Configuring Communications 3 4 1 ROCLINK Security Menu and Log On Use ROCLINK Security to control who can log on to ROCLINK software and the Access Level to control who is allowed access to menus and screens ROCLINK Security screen allows you to specify of up to 21 different users Y NOTE After you initially access ROCLINK software and establish security parameters delete the default Operator ID LOI and default Operator Password 1000 to prevent unauthorized users from accessing and changing parameters 1 Select Utilities gt Security Refer to Figure ROCLINK Security Ed Operator ID Operator Password AAA 1000 1 ALO 1000 5 Sh New S Delete Sa
33. and calibration values loads into programmable ROM as the new restart configuration Refer to the Cold Start parameter for more information When the loading is complete the Write Status indicator shows Complete and the checkbox parameter is automatically grayed out The write process can take from a second to a minute or more for a large configuration FA CAUTION When a Write to EEPROM is performed all user Flags are maintained at their current status during this process and all incoming communications are temporarily suspended In addition all FSTs in the FloBoss 407 or ROC300 series unit restart 14 Select the User Program options to enable or disable different user programs Op Port COM1 COM2 Calc and LCD User Program 15 Perform a Warm Start or cycle power off on to complete the activation 3 2 4 Advanced Features ROC Flags When using a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 the Advanced Features tab is available in the ROC Flags screen 1 Select ROC gt Flags and click the Advanced Features tab 3 6 Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual ROC Flags ROC Flags FAE Start Options Advanced Features Start Options Advanced Features 170 Scanning ATS Settings 170 Scanning ATS Settings Op Port j Enabled EE Enabled pEor COMI COM 1 o Disabled Disabled i Disabled Disabled T COM COM 2 o Read 1 0 44 445 Function Subaru Outputs Read 10 DG A4 DI A5 e Transmitt
34. control to override flow control when the pressure exceeds a Setpoint value For example The Single primary flow control loop could be active until the pressure input reaches the Primary Setpoint of 700 psig At this point switchover to the Override pressure control loop would occur Control would return to the Single primary flow control loop when the pressure falls to the Override Setpoint of 630 psig For FloBoss 103 and 500 Series units the PID function acquires the current configured input and calculates the change in output required to maintain the Setpoint for both the Single primary and the Override secondary loops The calculation result that is applied to the output depends upon whether the High or Low Override Type Select is chosen Section 6 6 4 The PID Parameters screen lists the user configurable parameters associated with PID control loops Note that the type of PID control Single primary or Override is determined by the Control Type parameter Override can be disabled leaving only the Single primary PID function active Up to three PID configurations can be saved and active in the FloBoss 500 Series unit An I O card must be installed in the FloBoss 500 Series unit to produce a control output One PID configuration can be saved and active in the FloBoss 500 Series unit The FloBoss 103 must have the optional I O points installed on the termination board The current state of the PID algorithm displays in the Loop Status field a
35. jo Misc 2 kr jo Secs Timer 3 o Misc 3 o po poo Timer 4 Misc 4 Result Reg 0 Mesa Compare Flag Mesg 1 fo Code Size 0 Bytes Code Pointer Byte 0 Copy e Paste 2 Update v o x Cancel t Apply Figure B 2 FST Parameter Advanced The Timer 1 to 4 values are determined by the FST These four timers when set greater than 0 decrement by 1 every 100 milliseconds For the FloBoss 103 the timers are decremented once every second When the timer reaches 0 the FST branches to the label specified in the Timer function The sequence of functions is executed at the frequency defined in the Timer parameter fields 3 Set the Misc 1 to 4 unsigned integers 8 bit bytes with valid decimal values of 0 to 255 that are used for global storage by the FST 4 Set the Exec Delay between the execution of successive FST command steps The default is 0 seconds the minimum delay you can specify is 0 1 seconds 1 0 seconds in the FloBoss 103 5 Set the Result Reg as the Results Register The Results Register is a floating point value that is passed between functions As the sequence of functions executes two memory locations store intermediate results from one function to the next The Results Register RR stores a floating point or analog value called the Signal Value Analog SVA Depending on the function the Results Register and the Compare Flag CF may be
36. or use the default values of 96 methane 3 ethane and 1 nitrogen The Total Mole should equal 100 NOTE When using a 1992 Detail or 1985 AGAS form of calculation the Methane component automatically adjusts up or down to compensate for the difference if the total does not equal 100 3 Select Log Methane Adjust Enabled if the percentages are automatically adjusted to total 100 and you would like to log this adjustment all units except ROC units with a ROCPAC 4 Select between Dry Wet water droplets present or As Delivered for the Heating Value Basis If you select Dry or Wet you should also select Calculate for the Heating Value parameter Likewise if you select As Delivered you should also select Enter for the Heating Value parameter and provide the value all units except ROC units with a ROCPAC NOTE For a ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC version 2 12 or earlier a FloBoss 407 version 1 08 or earlier or a FloBoss 503 504 version 2 30 or earlier the heating value calculation is always performed on a Dry basis As a result the heating value basis parameter is only an indicator that can be used for accounting purposes More recent versions of these products will calculate the amount of water present and adjust the calculated heating value and specific gravity accordingly per the GPA 2172 96 standard when the Wet Gas option is selected 5 8 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual
37. save the meter setup Apply and return to the Advanced screen For a FloBoss 103 or 500 Series unit refer to the ROC Information screen to select either US or Metric 4 Select either Calculate or Enter Atmospheric Pressure for the value of the atmospheric pressure absolute at the metering location If Calculate is selected the value is calculated from other parameters If Enter is selected type a value for the pressure The units of measurement are in PSIA or kPa for Metric If entered the value must be greater than zero For ROCs with ROCPACs this parameter does not appear because it is always calculated based on elevation 5 Select either Calculate or Enter Gravitational Acceleration for the value of the Gravitational Acceleration at the metering location If Calculate is selected the value is calculated from other parameters If Enter is selected type a value for the acceleration The units of measurement are in ft sec or M sec for Metric If entered the value must be greater than Zero 6 Enter the flow measurement Base Pressure specified in the gas contract The pressure units are in PSIA or kPa for Metric 7 Enter the flow measurement Base Temperature specified in the gas contract The temperature units are in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius for Metric 8 Enter the Elevation or altitude of the metering location The units are in feet or meters when Metric is selected 9 Enter the geographic Latitude of t
38. 100 calibrated A D reading corresponding to 100 percent input This value is used to convert the input to engineering units In the Calibrate function this value 1s altered to set the 100 percent input exactly at the High Reading EU value Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 Raw A D Input displays the current reading directly from the Analog to Digital A D converter 6 Actual Scan displays the actual amount of time in seconds that passes between scans This number should be the same as shown for the Scan Period parameter 1f the system 1s not overloaded 7 Enable Average Raw Values to average and calculate the raw readings during the Scan Period and use the outcome as the Raw A D Input during EU calculations For example When Enabled an Analog Input point configured with a Scan Period of 20 obtains a new value from the A D every 50 milliseconds During the Scan Period 20 values are obtained from the A D and summed together At EU calculation the values summed are divided by the Actual Scan Period display and are used as the Raw A D Input Disable this function to acquire instantaneous values 8 When Clipping is Enabled the software forces the Filtered EUs to stay within the range defined by the cut off limits Set the cut off limits by using the LoLo Alarm and HiHi Alarm parameters Y NOTE Refer to Section Configuring the Meter Setup concerning AI Calibration 4 3 AO Analog Outpu
39. 103 and FloBoss 500 Series units use the Sampler tab to set up a Discrete Output DO of the FloBoss to send a pulse output to another device such as an odorizer and control a gas sampler for a meter run 1 Select Meter gt Setup gt Sampler tab Refer to Figure Meter Setllp General Inputs Das Quality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms Sampler Control Sampler Volume Accum f O00 FE Sampler Duration f Seconds Copy e Paste Update Iw ok K Cancel Apply Figure 5 15 Meter Set up Sampler FloBoss 500 Series 2 Select Enabled under Sampler Control When Enabled the sampler overrides the built in DO located at Point Number A4 3 Type the Sampler Volume Accum number of cubic feet of gas to be metered between pulses For example If an odorizer needs to track every 100 cubic feet of gas being metered enter 100 The units are Ft for US or M for Metric The Sampler Volume Accum value is based upon the instantaneous flowrate 4 Type Sampler Duration for how long in seconds the pulse to the device needs to be This is how long it stays ON The Discrete Output is turned on for the amount of time set in the Sampler Duration every time the Sampler Volume Accum value is exceeded 5 18 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 5 2 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Instrument Calibration The FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series Instrument Calibration options are instrument specific paramet
40. 3 Click Open 5 3 2 Calibration Values Select Utilities gt Calibration Values to view all the calibration values for a specific analog input point such as the Diff Pres differential pressure Point Use the drop down list box to select the AI Point you desire to view Tag Up to 10 characters that identify the point being viewed se NOTE Not all of the following parameters apply to each point Raw Value 1 to 5 The five values read directly from the Analog to Digital A D converter Raw Value 1 is the Zero value Raw Value 5 is the Span value and the rest are Midpoint values EU Value 1 to 5 The five calibration settings in Engineering Units values converted from the Raw Values based on the 0 and 100 percent of EU span defined for the point EU Value 1 is the Zero value EU Value 5 is the Span value and the rest are Midpoint values Press Effect Zero Shift adjustment value applies only to points configured as the Differential Pressure input to a Meter Run Set EU Value The Tester Value specified for the last calibration value that was set Manual EU The Live Reading for the last calibration value that was set Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 27 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Timer This field shows the last inactivity count down in seconds typically starting from 3600 seconds that occurred during the last calibration session Had the countdown reached 0 time out would hav
41. 3 12 Update Firmware ooccccnncccncnnnnnncnnnnononnncnnnnnnnnonnnos 3 15 Update HANER ee E 3 17 Uperade fo NEE E EE 3 18 User POSTS nz 6 37 V EN NEE B 7 B 8 A rere te ere rere te ren oe a B 19 B 23 B 33 V and Receive EE EE 8 9 Value to Aeon EA 7 4 A 5 24 KE EE 3 11 IN NG cacas 3 10 e EE 6 4 View Diplodocs 1 2 C 1 View Menu O A 7 10 AUTE Tirar aE 7 10 9 3 Calibration REPOT EE 5 27 Depienne ile C 1 EEE IVE Repo used 7 7 EH Ene cases 7 10 SES et B 13 O A aoe onset cet inae oma alauetteans 7 10 WO MONO A a 4 19 CIE 2 2 VISOS 5 11 Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Kee 6 5 W Wat S EE 3 5 Water Manometer Calibrati0D ooccnoccnnccnnoccnnnccns 5 19 WDB Write to History Database B 19 B 24 VY CU deeg 5 8 Window Menu ROC DIECON rad 2 2 ed e TE Ra B 13 Wite tO EEPROM EE B 10 Write to Internal Config Memor B 10 SN KEE B 9 EE B 19 B 22 B 30 B 31 Rev 05 03 Index WTM Write Time to History Database B 19 B 24 X AO EE B 19 B 21 Y EE ee ee A E O 3 1 Z ATOS EE 5 26 LO E AAE A 6 19 l 17 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual lf you have comments or questions regarding this manual please direct them to your local sales representative or contact Emerson Process Management Flow Computer Division Marshalltown IA 50158 U S A Houston TX 77065 U S A Pickering North Yorkshire UK Y018 7JA Website www EmersonProcess com flow l 18 Index Rev 05 03
42. 503 the first eight history points are reserved for use as Meter History begin selecting history points with History Pt 9 Click TLP Value to Archive label to specify a Point Type and Parameter to be archived gt Select the Point Type to archive To prevent this history point from logging values select Undefined as the Point Type Select the Logical Number For example you could select Analog Input AIN A 2 Select the specific Parameter to log Click OK oN YS pi Choose the Select Archive Type to specify the exact archive type of the history point The archive type affects how the logged value is calculated Disabled Point not configured Average Values are accumulated as a standard linear average unless the point is configured through Meter history Rev 05 03 Configuring and Viewing History 7 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Accumulate For FloBoss 103 and 500 Series values are summed over a specified time period to compute the value based on what is selected in the Select Accumulation Time Basis Options include second minute hour and day For example 1f you are archiving accumulated flow for a parameter with units of ft hr then an Accum Time Basis of Hour should be selected For ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 values are always accumulated on a daily basis Current Value Current sampled value at the end of the logging interval is used for the value Totalize The difference b
43. 6 16 floating point number as four bytes with a single register request These conversions can be used with Modbus Function Code 6 in addition to Modbus Functions 3 4 and 16 Only the byte order is changed Function Code 73 loads register xxxxx in byte 2 byte 3 byte O byte 1 order Function Code 74 does the same as Function Code 73 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen 7510255 No Conversion 8 Select the type of Indexing to define the block of Register values for the Point Types or the Parameters without having to define each separately The Starting Register and Ending Register values must be different with the Starting Register value being the smaller of the two 9 Select Point to define the Register values as Point Types If multiple Registers are used Starting Register and Ending Register values are different each successive Register increments to the next logical point number of the same Point Type For example Point Indexing the configuration of Starting Register 100 Ending Register 106 Type 3 Param 17 Conv 0 Specifies seven values 100 101 102 103 104 105 and 106 for Parameter 17 of Analog Inputs Type 3 starting at the first Analog Input So register 100 Parameter 17 of AI Point Number 1 register 101 Parameter 17 of AI Point Number 2 and register 106 Parameter 17 of AI Point Number 7 Another example of Point Indexing the configuration of Starting R
44. 67 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen Register xxxxx byte 1 byte O Register xxxxx 1 byte 3 byte 2 43 44 45 46 47 48 O al IEEE Floating Point Number 3 4 16 IEEE Floating Point Number 3 4 16 67 IEEE Floating Point Number 3 4 16 IEEE Floating Point Number 3 4 16 6 34 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Convert E Slave SCH kl IEEE Floating Point Number 3 4 16 Code 69 places byte 2 and byte 3 in register IEEE Floating Point Number XXXXX byte 0 and byte 1 are placed in register XXXXX 1 This places a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be transmitted Code 70 does the same as Code 69 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen Register xxxxx byte 2 byte 3 Register xxxxx 1 byte 0 byte 1 IEEE Floating Point Number Code 71 reverses byte 2 and byte 3 order in register xxxxx reverses byte O and byte 1 order in register xxxxx 1 This places a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be transmitted Code 72 does the same as Code 71 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen Register xxxxx byte 3 byte 2 72 IEEE Floating Point Number 3 4 16 Register xxxxx 1 byte 1 byte 0 ME SE IEEE Floating Point Number 3 4 6 16 Convert Codes 73 and 74 send the IEEE formatted IEEE Floating Point Number 3 4
45. Alarm Enabled Disabled Status OK Modify Limits COn Alarm Set and Clear i e Paste 2 Update Iw o x Cancel Apply C On Alarm Clear Figure 6 3 Multi Variable Sensor 2 Select the MVS Sensor to configure Each MVS has a unique Sensor Number to differentiate it from the other MVS units 3 Enter the ten character Tag that resides in the MVS Interface This name Tag can be changed by entering a new name in the Tag field and clicking Apply 4 Enter the Address of the MVS Interface This field is used with the device communications protocol The default Address is 240 If the MVS is used in the multi drop mode each MVS must have a unique Address The Voltage input to the sensor reading is taken at a point after the internal protection circuitry The Voltage reads lower than what is actually present at the power terminals of the MVS Interface The Voltage level must be above 7 0 volts for proper operation 5 Enter the scaled Differential Pressure Diff Pressure reading from the sensor The units display as either Inches of Water or kPa depending upon the sensor configuration 6 Enter the scaled Differential Pressure Reverse DP reading from the sensor multiplied by 1 for flow in the reverse direction The units display as either Inches of Water or kPa depending upon the sensor configuration 7 Enter the scaled Absolute Pressure static pressure reading from the sensor The units are in ei
46. BPS Bits Per Second BTU British Thermal Unit a measure of heat energy C COL Ethernet Packet Collision COM Communications port on the Personal Computer PC COMM Communications port on the ROC or FloBoss Configuration Refers either to the process of setting up the software for a given system or the result of performing this process The configuration activity includes editing the database building schematic displays and reports and defining user calculations Typically the software setup of a device that can often be defined and changed Can also mean the hardware assembly scheme CPU Central Processing Unit CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check Crosstalk The amount of signal that crosses over between the receive and transmit pairs and signal attenuation which is the amount of signal loss encountered on the Ethernet segment CSA Canadian Standards Association CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CTS Clear to Send modem communications signal D D A Digital to Analog DB Database dB Decibel A unit for expressing the ratio of the magnitudes of two electric signals on a logarithmic scale DCD Data Carrier Detect modem communications signal Also Discrete Control Device A discrete control device energizes a set of discrete outputs for a given setpoint and matches the desired result against a set of discrete inputs DCE Data Communica
47. Commande B 22 B 29 Completas ide diia B 10 Control Related Commandes B 23 CTC ACID airis B 10 A O ES B 38 Daily Accumulatnon B 39 Dita ls 7 6 Database Commandes B 23 B 33 Dealer aaa iba B 12 Display E EE 3 5 PGi Men DEE B 12 Bref EE B 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual ECH DEE B 9 O B 29 A A O eres B 12 Example a B 8 Exco OM ETOL EE B 13 Function E B 8 Function Structure B 6 A O Seas ie eulee dele aeieieces B 6 RTO te WE B 12 HA A O ede do ate iets SEN B 8 Le GE B 12 O O IA B 13 LABEL il ce ae B 6 PA nes he lerne es tere errr B 12 Logical Commandes B 21 B 27 LOIS N B 9 Mathematical Commandes B 20 Mathematical Examples ccccccccccnononooccnnnnnnnnnos B 25 Miscellaneous Commandes B 24 B 35 NEO HO Er E erne B 17 Montor EE B 16 KOHN B 13 Parameter TE EE B 14 POI ue EE B 27 Power Comimand ostene sanne B 26 A A tel aco B 12 Te DEE B 10 e E B 2 Results Register Risso dai aro B 1 A hd B 9 Signal Value Analog NA B 1 Signal Value Discrete SWD cccccccccnnncnnnnnnnnnnno B 1 A ee B 12 e EE B 3 A A A eee B 6 O A Sr O SEES FO EL EDEN aber B 38 EE B 13 Store EEN ii B 10 E B 14 Tank Pumpdown Control B 41 e TEDE HEFE RSRERDTER 7 6 A 7 6 Time Related Commandes B 22 B 30 A A A B 12 A A KERN RER TREE B 17 Kee lee EN B 9 B 13 A A caus sete aacia eee B 7 WoW IMIS EE B 13 EN PACE das B 5 B 13 A EE B 9 ks of Repl AO EE 1 14 B 1 B 4 SET E B 4 Function AS ee 6 22 ESTExamples eins isa dci
48. Configuration In this example the Primary Process Variable Primary PV which is the feedback signal is obtained from a valve position transmitter that is connected to an Analog Input The associated Analog Input point is configured to convert the 4 to 20 milliAmp signal to percent 1 Select Configuration gt I O gt AI Points Refer to Figure Analog Input EE General Advanced Alarms Analog Inputs 5 Point Number E a Tag Primary DV Value fi Units H20 Scanning p Alarming Scan Period fi Secs Enable Enable Low Reading EU o C Disable C Disable High Reading EU 100 7 Active Alarms Copy 183 Pase Dien VOR x cancel mt Figure A 1 Analog Input Configuration 2 Set the Scan Period to the same or smaller value in seconds as the Calc Time in the PID Loop screen to provide an updated process variable each time a calculation is executed If the flow computer has a Loop Period parameter available in the PID Loop screen set the Scan Period based on Loop Period instead of on the Calc Time Rev 05 03 PID with TDO Control A 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 3 Enable Scanning for the input to receive and process the field Process Variable A 3 Open Forward Discrete Output Configuration The open forward Discrete Output is configured using the Timed Duration Output IDO mode of operation If the correction is positive it is routed to the open forward DO If the
49. ENEE 6 2 Manual ENUY netamente ras 6 3 Keen E 6 1 MONTON antonia aa 6 2 UGG CIB t nteromnica sisas alicia 6 2 A A E 6 2 Fate AAP ci o 6 2 Scan EE ee 6 2 GEET 6 3 AER EE E TE 6 3 Today s VOM ia da 6 3 Total Re ue seins deci 6 3 PP ES EG DEDE RES ca SERENE SE REF RNEERE HF 6 2 LBE EH EE E 6 3 yesterday S VOM n 6 3 IKO E 2 2 8 3 8 5 d IB Stes EAE SEE SERGE RESTER ENES E EE REDE TUD ERE SEERE NE 4 9 Uv Pabe Widens 4 11 LOO To ee E 4 11 Actual Pule Wide 4 11 FUN dia 4 12 Input Se 4 11 Max Time Between Pulses ooocccccccnccoc 4 11 Paramelels sn oi 4 11 Scan PeO E 4 11 SY BLE BEE 4 11 IES eieiei eege 4 12 ZOE RE 4 11 A ape a N B 31 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual E TEE 4 15 A 3 AN ene a 4 15 A 3 Accuracy and Resolution isendi 6 8 EE egen 6 7 Cycle Tie E 4 15 Defining the Engineering Units sdssecerrrrr 6 8 Leo RE EE 4 15 A 4 Eltern eer PU id 4 15 A 3 pow Codie E 4 15 A 3 Parime eTa e 4 15 A 3 EE A FEED SEEREN Er BREDER A 2 fi Bk nar sa EE 4 13 6 9 A 2 Timed Duration Output B 19 B 23 A SE SEERE ERE Es EVE EDER ieee REENDBEN 6 7 Losale Cycle TIME ecos 6 9 BE EE 4 15 A 4 TEMPE ios 5 6 7 1 7 2 Tempurature Alarms A rese OEN 6 7 Ke EE 3 15 Time Gs 277 2 c ee eRe De ee A one PE OPE RENT BS EE Set OO 3 10 OR IDO e E 4 13 Units for Radio Power Control 6 19 A N 6 7 OPUESTO enn B 33 O A REESE RENS Re ee tan BLEER ne Mian GREEN KEND NDER 4 11 SEE TD WEE 4 13 4 15
50. File 2 Select the display File name Display files have the DSP extension and are located in the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data unless you stored the file elsewhere Click Open 4 Click Update to display the data fields with the current values Refer to Figure C 9 C 6 Custom Displays Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual RocLink For Windows Al dsp Q File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Cee tee Ge ESA A SOV EDP be Analog Inputs Analog Inputs Update POINT TAG hadd POINT TAG Ggchgtfs 98 Auto Scan Der EEEN Figure C 9 Display from Disk Rev 05 03 Custom Displays C 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual C 8 Custom Displays Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual GLOSSARY OF TERMS A A D Analog to Digital ADC Analog to Digital Converter AGA American Gas Association AWG American Wire Gauge AI Analog Input Also referred to as AIN AO Analog Output Also referred to as AOU Analog Analog data is represented by a continuous variable such as an electrical current signal AP Absolute Pressure API American Petroleum Institute ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange Attribute A parameter that provides information about an aspect of a database point For example the alarm attribute is an attribute that uniquely identifies the configured value of an alarm B
51. Full Configuration The full configuration procedure involves using the menu functions in roughly this order some may not be required for your application or may not be available for your ROC FloBoss e ROC menu gt Security logon English or Metric Unit selection e ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 Meter menu gt Setup gt Advanced tab e FloBoss 103 and 500 Series ROC menu gt Information ROC menu gt Clock ROC menu gt Flags gt Cold Start Meter menu gt Set up Configure menu gt I O menu gt AI AO DI PL and DO Configure menu gt Control gt PID Configure menu gt History Configure menu gt LCD User List Setup ROC Directory gt Comm Ports computer communication configurations ROC menu gt Comm Ports ROC and FloBoss communication configurations Configure menu gt Radio Power Control Utilities menu gt FST Utilities menu gt Security menu ROC menu gt Flags for saving to internal configuration memory View menu gt Display gt New or other Meter menu gt Calibration ee ete Oo 0090 2 5 9 HH 1 8 2 Quick Setup Configuration Quick Setup is available when you connect to a FloBoss 103 or FloBoss 500 Series unit Select File gt Quick Setup This method makes many assumptions about the configuration 1 8 3 Duplicating a Configuration Once you have completed the configuration and saved it to a disk file for one ROC or FloBoss you can duplicate the configuration for a similar
52. HHMMSS and date stamp Register MMDDYY and floating point values for each of the defined history 0 to 839 points for that History Archive Register 6 8 2 1 Modbus Events Alarms Functionality The record formats for the Event log and Alarm log are the same size and have similar contents The first word in a record is a bit map in which bit 9 indicates if the log record is an Event 1 or an Alarm 0 The meanings of the other bits are specific to either the event or the alarm log records The Event and Alarm log record consists of the bytes shown in Table 6 6 A breakdown of the bit map in the first byte is given in the table immediately after the record table Reading Events Alarms Register 6 28 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The Modbus request to read the Event Alarm log uses the standard read Function Code 03 and the Event Alarm Register parameter 0 in the Modbus Special Function Table point type 39 In this request the number of registers is included to maintain format compatibility but is ignored by the receiving FloBoss 500 Series unit For the date stamp in the events and alarms returned the year Y Y is really the number of years since 1980 for example the current year is 1997 so the year Y Y for the date stamp would be 17 Acknowledging Events Alarms The Modbus request to acknowledge the event alarm log uses Function Code 05 and the Event Alarm Register parameter 0
53. Miscellaneous Commands FST Use the miscellaneous commands to move around FSTs end FSTs record messages and send messages to the LCD E LC e Go to specified LABEL 1 LABEL Goto ARG1 RR out RR in Ge out SVD in Break delay execution of each 1 Database or Constant Value FST break time ARG1 command after this one for the number RR out RR in of 100 millisecond intervals defined by SVD out SVD in ARGUMENT1 End of FST return to first command Execute FST starting with first command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in B 24 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Name Deserption Arguments LCD Message send message 1 Message FST Message String ARG1 ARGUMENT1 and value 2 Database or Constant Value FST Message Value ARG2 ARGUMENT 2 to local display panel RR out RR in One 30 character message can be sent VD VD by each FST as shown next SE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX xxxxxxxx Arg2 val YY YY YY YY ZZZZZ ZZ SCAN NEXT PREV MENU XXXX message yyyy FST Tag name zzzz ARGUMENT 2 value Log Alarm record message 1 Message Log Alarm ARG1 ARG2 ARGUMENT1 and value 2 Database or Constant Value RR out RR in ARGUMENT 2 in the alarm log Only SVD out SVD in the first 10 characters of the 30 character message are used Log Event record message 1 Message Log Event ARG1 ARG2 ARGUMENT1 and value 2 Database or Constant Value RR out RR in ARGUMENT 2 in the event lo
54. RAM can have a maximum of 11 points configured for 35 days of 24 values and RAMI and RAM2 can have 30 points each configured for 35 days If more than 11 points maximum of 30 are configured in base RAM the number of days of data stored in base RAM is reduced for each point in base RAM In a ROC300 unit with a FlashPAC 87 points are available each with 35 days of 24 values In a FloBoss 407 50 points are available each with 35 days of 24 values In a FloBoss 103 or 500 Series unit there is a maximum of 15 points each with 35 days of 24 values ARGUMENT can be a constant or a database parameter If ARGUMENT is a floating point database parameter the historical database commands check for rollover by comparing the pointer against the number of archived periods per history database point Following the write or read the floating point database parameter is incremented by 1 and then compared against the number of archived periods If the floating point database parameter 1s equal to or greater than the number of archived periods the floating point database parameter 1s set to 0 and the data writes over the stored data The following example shows the RR and R1 values before execution of the WDB command and after the execution Refer to Section B 19 1 for a more complete example of using the database commands Before execution RR 50 00 R1 25 ARGUMENTI ARGUMENTZ UC FSTILFST 1 D After execution History databas
55. SCD tii idiais 1 18 5 1 R RI POU STE RIO E B 39 Radio OMe EE 2 2 Modem Commumcatons 8 5 Radio Power Control 6 17 6 19 PECUVE EE 6 19 DO Assignment yao dh 2 eeh ee 6 21 BDOTI EE 6 21 Hold Tie E 6 19 Low Battery Shutoff EE 6 19 A a a a 6 20 A a A a 6 19 IRCH 6 20 OR Hee 6 19 Outp t DEA cea ee cance tac 6 20 Power Kier EE 6 20 EEN g i Ki EE 6 19 EI 6 19 SE eege 6 19 RAM BN he CAN CG EE 3 11 IL cee alee inane arene hen eee caveat 3 10 ere 3 10 Ee Oe 6 16 6 17 A 7 Ala d EE 4 4 Max le EE 4 16 Raw AE saree itor ac tren Rrel arene tir emertmnnret ne 4 8 E II aA TA 5 27 RB A II A eared Pere 4 5 6 20 Alarm Ndek A badsesiae eaten tbosueattecaden 8 13 PX VARIG aca beer 4 5 4 8 5 20 6 6 Configuring RBX Alarming Parameters 8 14 8 15 En EE 8 12 Flow and Sensor Alarm 5 22 A A he laa 8 8 SEES RE 8 13 RDB Read Historical Database l B 19 Read A A EIT MERRIE eee B 10 Rev 05 03 Index O i a A 3 7 Rebooting Default Factory Stuns sis 3 4 Receive Cit CODY e add tan 8 13 ReLerence 1 EN EE 5 12 eeler B 3 Modbus Number 6 27 6 31 B 2 RIOR TO EE B 3 Remote Hardware Connecton 1 9 Rename Group OF e ee 2 5 Report By Exception SE 4 5 8 12 Reports A ats atte ces 7 10 Audit BOO e a oie teehee 7 10 9 3 Hee TEE 5 24 5 27 Ee WE 7 8 EEM RE 7 6 7 7 9 2 Event LOC E 7 10 FESTO e ect E ideas dean SEES SED 7 10 Requirements SB S E 1 2 RO a er e 6 16 A 7 Default Factory Settings ooooooooooooooocccnnnononn
56. Seconds US Count 3 00 Seconds 100 Count 12 00 Seconds Low Reading EU High Reading EU EU Value Units E ES Paste Update v o A Cancel Apply Figure 4 10 TDO Parameters 2 Enter the Cycle Time when using TDO Toggle mode Cycle Time defines the total time of one cycle the sum of the On time and Off time in seconds After a cycle has been completed a new cycle is initiated The default is 15 seconds 3 Enter the 0 Count in seconds that represents a zero percent output pulse width The default 1s 3 seconds This 1s the minimum amount of time that the TDO can be energized to move the motor Set the 0 Count to a value that allows movement but also provides good resolution of control 4 Enter the 100 Count in seconds that represents a 100 percent output pulse width The default is 12 seconds 100 Count is the maximum amount of time that the TDO can be energized to move the motor Normally this is the amount of time it takes for the actuator to move the valve from fully open to fully closed 5 Enter the Low Reading EU engineering units value corresponding to the 0 Count 6 Enter the High Reading EU value corresponding to the 100 Count 7 Enter the EU Value when using TDO or TDO Toggle mode When a value is saved the Discrete Output is activated according to the magnitude of the value The amount of on time that a given value represents 1s determined by the scaling from 0 Count 100 Count Lo
57. Security screen must match the user s connection Operator ID and Password set up in the ROC gt ROC Security screen The Access Level security set up in ROCLINK Security screen determines the user s security authority level when they are connected to a ROC or FloBoss Refer to Section B Configuring System Parameters 8 3 4 1 Communication Problems Occasionally you may need to alter your ROC Directory options when you are having problems communicating with your ROC or FloBoss 1 2 Select ROC Directory from the View or Window menu Select the desired Station Name of the FloBoss or ROC device It may be located within a Group Right mouse click and select Open 4 Make sure you have specified the correct ROC Address and ROC Group of the FloBoss or ROC with which you trying to communicate If you are communicating through the LOI port of the device set the ROC Address to 240 and Group Address to 240 which is the universal address Click the Advanced tab Try increasing the Time Out and Tx Delay Generally the Time Out should be longer than the Key On Delay in the ROC or FloBoss Click Apply and then OK 8 Click the General tab and click Connect 8 18 If you are still having trouble communicating try increasing the Number of Retries field in the Advanced tab screen Configuring Communications Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SECTION 9 SAVING RETRIEVING CONFIGURATIONS This section de
58. Setup Type screen appears choose Install a Newer Version or Update and click Next 1 4 6 Un Installing ROCLINK for Windows Software To remove ROCLINK software from a personal computer perform the following steps 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Settings gt Control Panel 3 Double click the Add Remove Programs icon 4 Select ROCLINK for Windows NONE Programs 1 6 Getting Started Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 Click the Add Remove button 6 Click OK 7 Click Finish 1 5 Starting ROCLINK Software This section details how to launch ROCLINK for Windows software NOTE To use ROCLINK for Windows software to configure a hardware device you must have the ROC or FloBoss wiring properly connected to power and I O Refer to the appropriate hardware instruction manual Initially the ROC or FloBoss should also be physically connected to a personal computer PC using the Local Operator Interface LOI port running ROCLINK for Windows software To run ROCLINK software perform one of the following Double click the Desktop shortcut created in Section 1 4 3 on page 1 6 Double click ROCLINK exe located in C Program Files ROCLINK EJ E For Windows1Bin the default directory or wherever you installed 5 hortet ha ROCLINK software Hochmk exe Select Start gt Programs gt ROCLINK for Windows gt ROCLINK For Windows The software loads and initializes This may take a couple seconds o
59. This ensures the user is limited to the Access Level configured in ROCLINK Enter the Access Level number from 0 to 5 where Level 0 is the lowest level Access Level security determines which functions the user has access to after they are connected to a ROC or FloBoss Enter the Key On Delay to define the number of seconds to delay after turning the RTS signal on and before beginning transmission For ROCs with a ROCPAC or FloBoss 103 this parameter also functions as a turnaround delay For some older radios the Key On Delay may need to be set as high as 0 2 seconds For newer radios designed for data transmission no more than 0 02 seconds should be required Enter the Key Off Delay to define the period to delay before turning the RTS signal off once a valid message has been sent The default of 0 01 seconds should be sufficient for most radios This feature is not available for a ROC300 Series with a ROCPAC or FloBoss 103 Enter the Valid Receive Ctr to log the number of valid Opcodes received by the ROC or FloBoss on this communication port This counter can be preset to a value or cleared Enter the maximum number of Idle Characters in a received message that will be permitted before the FloBoss interprets the pause in transmission as end of transmission This field accepts integers between 0 and 65535 Applies only to the FloBoss 500 Series Select to enable RTS CTS handshaking Applies to FloBoss 103 407 and 500 Series Select the St
60. Utilities Tools Window Help Deh 28 S Ve Wha hE PEGEDE HB aw E mt 1 0 E AN Analog Input AN 81 Fixed Al 1 vi 2 Fixed Al 2 fd 3 T JN 4 Power In AN 5 Al SPARE 1 AN 6 Al SPARE 2 JN 7 Brd Temp h Analog Output JW Discrete Input H Discrete Output 4t Pulse Input mt Soft Point me MVS Sensor amp Control CES BY D Meter me System 4 History User Program Tag values read and displayed Figure 1 4 Typical Configuration Tree Menu Use the and l symbols to display or hide various options Notice that valid points display Double click a point to display the associated parameter configuration screen You can also use the menu options and buttons to display the associated parameter configuration screen 1 7 7 Using Copy and Paste Use Copy and Paste to copy data from one configuration screen to another of the same type Configure the meter run point screen or other configuration you desire to duplicate Click Apply Click Copy Select the next Point Number or go to the appropriate screen Click Copy Click Update oO Op e oD E 1 16 Getting Started Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 7 8 TLP Box Selections Throughout ROCLINK software the TLP Box is available for assigning specific inputs and WW outputs to parameters ROCLINK software uses Point Type T Logical Number L and Parameter P to define point locations Mvs H2DP_YAL Geet Figure 1 5 TLP Box
61. a data link to ROCLINK software other ROC or FloBoss units and host systems Depending on the type of ROC or FloBoss you are using refer to Table the following types of communications are possible ETA 232 RS 232 serial communications EIA 422 RS 422 serial communications ROC FloBoss Type FloBoss 103 ROC306 and ROC312 ROC364 FloBoss 407 Radio modem communications Leased line modem communications Dial up modem communications TCP IP communications ETA 485 RS 485 multi point serial communications Table 8 1 Communication Ports Communications Port EIA 232 RS 232 for use with ROCLINK software ElA 232 RS 232 for use ROCLINK software ElA 232 RS 232 for use with ROCLINK software ElA 232 RS 232 for use with ROCLINK software ElA 485 RS 485 EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 422 485 RS 422 485 TCP IP Radio Modem Dial up Modem or Leased line Modem ElA 232 RS 232 EIA 422 485 RS 422 485 TCP IP Radio Modem Dial up Modem or Leased line Modem Built in serial port ElA 232 RS 232 Local Operator Interface LOI Port 1 COM1 Port 2 COM2 Port 3 ElA 232 RS 232 or Dial up Modem N A ElA 232 RS 232 ElA 422 485 RS 422 485 Radio Modem Dial up Modem or Leased line Modem ElA 232 RS 232 ElA 422 485 RS 422 485 TCP IP Radio Modem Dial up Modem or Leased line Modem ElA 232 RS 232 EIA 485 RS 485 TCP IP or Dial up Modem FloB
62. acquire the group of history points defined in the Starting History Point and Ending History Point fields without having to define each history point separately 6 Specify the Starting History Point to acquire a group of history points without having to define each history point separately enter values in the Starting History Point and Ending History Point fields The Starting History Point and Ending History Point values must be different with the Starting History Point value being the smaller of the two The group of history points is specified by the Modbus register value set in the Register Number field The Starting History Point value is the first history point to be retrieved Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 27 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 7 Specify the Ending History Point to acquire a group of history points without having to define each history point separately enter values in the Starting History Point and Ending History Point fields The Starting History Point and Ending History Point values must be different with the Starting History Point value being the smaller of the two The group of history points is specified by the Modbus register value set in the Register Number field The Ending History Point is the last history point to be retrieved Select the Archive Type to archive either Hourly or Daily values Select the Conversion field to specify the type of conversion required if any on the data before it is sent to the H
63. any changes do not corrupt data for the host A host device uses Opcodes to request information from the ROC or FloBoss If the request requires a response a value or information may then be sent back to a host device When the host device desires to know a specified value or parameter stored in the ROC an Opcode value is sent to the ROC specifying the value or parameter required by the host The Opcode value may be a command that causes the ROC to perform a desired action such as changing the Tag for an Analog Input Point Number A3 or using Opcode 8 to request the ROC to set the Time parameter in the Clock In this case the ROC performs the action but does not return a value to the host The Opcode value may also be a command that causes the ROC to perform an action or a set of actions such as collecting the current Pulse Input values and then sending the data back to the host device 1 Select Configure gt Opcode Table Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Opcode Table Settings i Table No K y Version No 0 Data Points Data 1 DINA 4MODE Lac Data 12 undefined Data 2 Undefined El Data 13 undefined Data 3 Undefined paga Undefined Data id Undefined params Undefined Data 5 Undefined EN Data 416 undefined Data1t6 Undefined pata ti Undefined Data 7 Undefined il Data 18 Undefined Data 8 undefined Data 19 undefined
64. back one hour to cause a duplicate time stamped hourly log to be entered 3 2 Configuring ROC System Flags From this routine a configuration can be saved to EEPROM or Internal Configuration This step helps to establish several parameters that affect the overall operation of the ROC ol Memory and the ROC can be reinitialized 1f necessary so NOTE Be very careful when using the ROC Flags Certain Flags can cause data to be lost parameter values to be changed or configuration memory to be cleared Be sure you understand the function of the Flags before changing them 3 2 1 Performing a Cold Start It is advised that you perform a Cold Start directly after setting the ROC Clock and BEFORE setting any other parameters to ensure that the ROC or FloBoss unit s memory is cleared before configuration begins In a Cold Start the ROC or FloBoss is initialized from the restart configuration saved in programmable ROM internal configuration memory or Flash memory If the configuration memory does not have a valid configuration written in it the factory defaults in ROM are used Use the Cold Start when a ROC or FloBoss is performing erratically the memory appears to be corrupted or when you desire to reset the unit to the last saved configuration Y so NOTE Cold Start reloads all restart configuration data and may also clear logs displays and FSTs In addition it may cause output changes load new accumulator values and disable
65. be loaded into the unit to allow Host functionality Refer to the Modbus User Program Manual Form A4606 for further details NOTE This section only describes the Modbus function available for the FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series units The Modbus protocol can also be used by a FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series device but it must be manually loaded as a User Program When the Modbus program is loaded as a User Program it is configured from the User Data function in the Configure menu and not from the Modbus function in the Configure menu Refer to the Modbus Protocol Emulation Program User Manual Form A4606 Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 21 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Modbus functions are configured by Point Type and Parameter The FloBoss uses physical addressing of the I O while Modbus applications use logical I O addressing to retain compatibility with Modbus so NOTE A FloBoss 500 Series unit can act only as a Slave device communicating through the host port at COM1 User Defined Points UDP are used to make this data available to ROCLINK software COM port reserves UDP 53 UDP 54 and UDP 55 for configuration data The Modbus Protocol Emulation User Program Function Codes are 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 and 16 which use the same command and response format as the functions listed in the Gould Modbus Protocol Reference Guide January 1985 form PI MBUS 300 Rev B Modicon Modbus Protocol Depending upon the Parameter conf
66. button is active press lt Enter gt or a function key Refer to Section 1 7 2 Rev 05 03 Getting Started 1 9 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Dialog boxes are areas that pop up inside the current screen to allow further selections or values to be entered They can also provide messages or information that is more detailed The menu structure displayed in Figure 1 2 lists choices from which you can select the desired function Once a function is selected the screen or dialog box for that function displays This screen or dialog box provides the requested information and lets you enter the applicable configuration data Refer to Figure File Menu New Open Download Close Save Configuration Print Configuration Quick Setup Print Print Setup List of recent files Exit Meter Menu Set Up Calibration Plate Change History Edit Menu View Menu Undo Directory Cut EFM Report Copy Calibration Report Paste History Alarms Events Audit Log Display I O Monitor Toolbar Tools Menu Customize Toolbar Utilities Menu Update Firmware Update Hardware Upgrade to FlashPAC Convert Files Download User Programs Security Calibration Values MVS Calibration FST Editor Debug Communications ROC Menu Direct Connect Disconnect Connect Collect Data Clock ROC Security Comm Ports Memory Information Flags Window Menu Cascade Tile List of open files Configure Menu UC Control History Soft Poin
67. change in input the Primary Process Variable based on control action in which the output is proportional to the time integral of the input An initial Reset setting of 3 is recommended to avoid loop instability This value is in terms of repeats per minute Initially set to these values and change later if tuning 1s required 7 Set the Rate Derivative Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in input the Primary Process Variable based on control action in which the output is proportional to the rate of change of the input An initial Rate setting of O is recommended to avoid loop instability 8 Set the Scale Factor as a number representing the ratio of the output span to input Primary Process Variable span The sign of the number specifies the action of the loop negative for reverse action the default or positive for direct action Reverse action causes the PID loop point to produce a decrease in output to close a valve for example when the Process Variable exceeds the Setpoint Used to set direction and match the input output scaling 9 Set the Integral Deadband as a window around the Primary Setpoint When the Primary Process Variable is within this window the integral action Reset is disabled If Discrete Output Control Type is enabled no output pulses will be produced For example if you enter 5 there will be a region of 5 units above and 5 units below the Setpoint in which the Process Variable can mo
68. correction is negative it is sent to the close reverse DO Refer to Figure and Figure for the configuration examples A 2 Select Configuration gt I O gt DO Points Discrete Output General Advanced TOO Parameters Discrete Outputs Point Number Statuz Momentan kr Co Wert SEI DOUT Type Scanning r i Latched Toggle fe Enabled Disabled Time Duration TDO Toggle Time On B Seconds Active Alarms Mi Copy Le Paste Update Iw ol Pai Cancel t Apply Figure A 2 Open Discrete Output Select Time Duration to enable the TDO function For Timed Duration Output the quantitative value calculated by the PID loop is converted into a time that the Discrete Output is active versus the time it is inactive When the Timed Duration mode is enabled the TDO Parameters tab becomes available The TDO Parameters tab provides a dialog box of additional parameters to specify scaling and engineering unit conversion Enable Scanning for the output to process the field output The Status field is both an indicator and a control As an indicator it shows the state of the Discrete Output Off normally indicates that the output is Off that a switch is open On normally indicates that the output is On or that a switch is closed While Scanning is Enabled the Status field indicates the output state When Scanning is Disabled the Status field becomes a control for determining the state of the output from the ROC or FloBo
69. edel eege 7 1 7 2 Averasino Techniques si 5 6 5 7 B Back o A S B 5 Base Multiplier Pero dsd adds 5 4 Multiplier EE 5 4 PESSE 5 11 RAM E 3 10 EEN eege bees 5 11 Basic I O Cone en 4 1 Battery Power neren 6 17 Bad Rat aloe 8 3 8 8 Bi directional low 5 12 5 15 Eegeregie eene ege 5 4 EIN alcala 5 4 BRK SE B 19 B 24 B 36 BOIS eege erte ebe 1 12 2 2 Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Bye O EN 6 24 IV Ue S ed B 4 C A ne Poa Ee Re rT RES SEEK REN EDR 7 1 7 2 Calc SI odoin tetas 5 3 TYP eebe Ate e 5 2 5 3 User PrO T Maa 3 6 Calculation IVICINOGS dida 5 2 Calibrated PATROL CUM E 5 19 CAV AA A E ROR 5 19 H2O TEMP o A eege 5 19 FO KE EE 5 19 EE 5 22 H E 5 22 Calibrate DUO EE 5 25 ee 5 28 e 5 24 5 27 KEE 5 27 EE 1 12 CAI ad rare 5 12 Change Data Verification oooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos C 5 Changing Display Data C 6 Channel A O SEERE RSS tape usteakents 5 21 A ios 5 21 EE C 1 E E E B 8 CAPARO 4 7 E be ON 1 14 3 1 Be 1 12 OM as B 5 B 15 Code Sek ue E B 4 SIZ AE E ED E E E E T B 4 Cold Sar EE 3 2 3 3 3 5 Collect ROC Data rntiacids solici 9 2 A eebe eegene dees 9 3 COM1 User PROS E EE 3 6 COM2 User PROS AAA E 3 6 A O 8 8 COM REDER ERE E BES VET TEE 8 8 Comm POPS sin 1 14 8 3 8 8 8 9 Configuration eege 1 9 Mode M a dio 8 11 A O A sD s 8 12 A ER NEDE EL R RE SSR SENE EDER ENS eae caine 8 9 Comma Delimited Spreadsheet occccccccccccnnnnnnmmo 9 5 Command CMD a
70. gt 0 0 temp1 ARG1 where temp1 is a temp storage value If temp1 gt 0 0 RR out RR in temp1 If tempi lt 0 0 RR out RR in In all cases SVD out SVD in RR out D SVD out SVD in RA out e RR in SVD out SVD in RR out int RA in SVD out SVD n Logarithm base d df RR in None If RR in gt 0 0 RR out LOG RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Natural Logarithm of RR in None If RR in gt 0 0 RR out LN RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Square Root of RR in None If RR in gt 0 0 RR out SQRT RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in SVD out SVD in B 20 FST Editor Rev 05 03 Raise RR in to a power 1 Database or Constant Value D OZ t 01313 8 Cp O J ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Description Arguments 3rd Order Polynomial RR out reg1 RR in 3 reg2 RR in 2 reg3 RR in 1 reg4 where reg1 through reg4 are the current constant values of Register1 through Register4 of the respective FST SVD out SVD in B 11 2 Logical Commands FST You can store a discrete value called the Signal Value Discrete SVD in the Compare Flag CF parameter The SVD is stored as an 8 bit byte The SVD is true whenever non zero and the SVD is false when zero Logical NOT of SVD in None If SVD in
71. in Flash ROM of a ROC or FloBoss by loading it from a file You can also save internal data to be copied and used with a new ROC or FloBoss This option does not update ROCLINK software Y so NOTE The Update Firmware procedure clears the configuration of the FloBoss and reloads data when the Restore functions are selected The Event Log Alarm Log Audit Log and History logs are cleared If you want to preserve the contents of the Event and Alarm Logs be sure to save them to a file Collect ROC Data before starting Note that the Event Alarm Audit and History Logs cannot be reloaded 1 Create a backup of the log data using Collect Data All This backup should be to disk file Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 10 11 12 13 14 3 16 Perform a Write to EEPROM or Write to Internal Config Memory on the ROC Flags screen The updated firmware files are typically supplied on a disk Itis recommended that you create a backup copy of the firmware update disk Read the README text file included with the firmware update Select Utilities gt Update Firmware Click OK to start the Update Firmware process Click Yes in the Alarm and Event Log Warning dialog Click Yes or No to create a new backup of the FloBoss configuration or to use existing files Typically you select Yes If the firmware download was not completed successfully the first time or you desire to use an exi
72. in the Modbus Special Function Table point type 39 In this request the number of registers 1s always one 1 Table 6 6 Modbus Events and Alarms Log Contents Contents of Event Log Record Contents of Alarm Log Record Operator change bit map 16 bit integer Refer to Alarm change bit map 16 bit integer Refer to Table Table 3 4 Modbus register number of variable Modbus register number of variable 16 bit integer 16 bit integer Time Stamp HHMMSS 32 bit floating point Time Stamp HHMMSS 32 bit floating point Date Stamp MMDDYY 32 bit floating point Date Stamp MMDDYY 32 bit floating point 13 16 Previous value of variable 32 bit floating point rine alarmed value of variable 32 bit floating Current New value of variable 32 bit floating Unused at the current time zero filled when 17 20 point transmitted to the master Table 6 7 Operator Alarm Change Bit Map Contents Fixed value change to an EU value on an I O point in Manual Mode Zero scale change to the 0 Adjusted on an AO or Al Full scale change to the 100 Adjusted on an AO or Al Operator entry work value change to any parameter other than those Not Used described Boolean fixed bit change to Status in DO or DI Fixed variable flag change to Manual Mode for an I O point Table entry change change to Modbus Function Tables System command change events logged by system Power up Not Used Operator change event identifier bit
73. is normally used only by other ROC Flags 16 Select the A4 A5 Function to determine whether the two built in DI PI channels in the ROC306 or ROC312 are configured 17 Select the Auxiliary Outputs to turn Auxiliary Output 1 or Auxiliary Output 2 On or Off On a ROC306 or ROC312 with a ROCPAC these Flags need to be deselected to allow the auxiliary output to be used as a control output Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 18 Select the Transmitter Power flag to turn the T transmitter power on selected or off deselected For a FloBoss 407 that has a Rev C or D Termination Board this Flag should not be selected 3 3 Configuring ROC Information This step establishes the Station Name Address Group and other global variables that differentiate each individual ROC or FloBoss Other system variables set in the ROC Information screen must be established for a particular application Refer to Figure 3 8 Select ROC gt Information 2 Enter the Station Name to be logged with the historical database for easy site identification ROC Information General Paints Other Information Revision Info station Name Remote Oprtne Crtrlr Roc Type 500 Address i G E Group 2 gt fig HEE Contract Hour o f Force End of Day X Cancel zm Figure 3 8 ROC Information FloBoss 500 Series Enter a unique Address with which to differentiate each indiv
74. is updated approximately every minute Click the Update button to view the new value This is not supported in the FloBoss 103 LCD Installed For a ROC300 Series device this tells whether the optional Local Display Panel LDP is detected as being installed For other devices this parameter does not apply RAM Installed Indicates the number of 128 KB RAM segments that are installed in this ROC or FloBoss Eight 128 KB segments or blocks make up the entire 1 MB address space of the microprocessor and the seven bottom segment locations are listed If memory is installed for a location it is indicated by the word PRESENT For a FloBoss 407 ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC or a FloBoss 500 Series unit RAM segments 00000 20000 40000 and 60000 should always be present This is not supported in the FloBoss 103 units 3 3 3 Revision Info ROC Information When using a FloBoss 103 or 500 Series the Revision Info tab is available in the ROC Information screen The Revision Info screen always displays the FloBoss Firmware information first Any other accessories that may be connected to the FloBoss display in the remaining five areas This information is read only FB500 FB103 Firmware Name of firmware or accessory installed in the FloBoss This un named field displays the name of an accessory if one is installed For example This field may say I O Expansion Board or Turbine Interface When the field displays Not Used no additional
75. loaded stored tested modified or left unchanged 6 Set the Compare Flag CF as an 8 bit integer representing the numbers 0 through 255 The Compare Flag stores a discrete value called the Signal Value Discrete SVD Depending on Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual the function the Results Register and the Compare Flag may be loaded stored tested modified or left unchanged 7 Set the Mesg 1 and Mesg 2 30 character field for storing a message The message can display on the Local Display Panel 8 Set the Code Size as the number of bytes used by the FST equivalent to the end pointer position minus the start pointer position The maximum value for a FloBoss 500 Series is 4000 maximum for a FloBoss 103 1s 3000 Bytes indicates the size of the next function to be executed Code Pointer Byte is the location in ROC memory of the next function to be executed There are O to 7999 storage locations for functions in the ROC One storage location 1s used for each byte that makes up the function e B 3 FST Editor NOTE Use Monitor functions within the FST Editor to monitor these options Using the FST Editor FSTs are created compiled and downloaded to the ROC or FloBoss The FST Editor consists primarily of a Workspace and menus similar in structure to spreadsheet programs used with personal computers The FST Editor also allows monitoring and tracing of an FST while it is running Sel
76. of Day or Contract Hour and then it zeros and starts over only if being totalized in History Rev 05 03 Configuring Basic I O 4 17 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 6 1 1 PI Advanced Advanced Pulse Inputs lets you configure features such as EU Options Rate Period and Conversion for the Pulse Input 1 Select Configure gt I O gt PI Points gt Advanced tab Pulse Inputs General Advanced Alarms EU Options Ge Rate Max Rollover Today s Total Max Rollover C Running TotalEntered Rollover Rollover Value EUs lt 000000 Rate Period Conversion CC EU mm Ge Ells pulse Pulses El C EU dau Copy Le Paste 2 Update Iw ok K Cancel P Apply Figure 4 13 Pulse Inputs Advanced 2 Select the type of EU Option Rate Max Rollover PI Value in EUs corresponds to the pulses per scan with the Rate Period and the Conversion factor applied PI Value in EUs is cleared at Contract Hour Today s Total specifies the total EUs accumulated today At Contract Hour this value is transferred to Yesterday s Total and Today s Total is cleared Today s Total Max Rollover PI Value in EUs corresponds to the accumulated pulses today times the Conversion factor Today s Total specifies the total EUs accumulated today At Contract Hour this value is transferred to Yesterday s Total and Today s Total is cleared Running Total Entered Rollover The PI Value in EUs corresponds to the accumul
77. order polynomial P3 Enter the values 1 0 1 and 0 in Registers R1 R2 R3 and R4 respectively The result is the number 10 3 STEP 2 SAV stores the result to Register 5 for viewing 4 STEP 3 Execution of the FST has completed END After a 100 millisecond delay execution restarts with STEP 0 B 13 Logical Commands FST Logical commands operate upon the Signal Value Discrete SVD stored in the Compare Flag Parameter CMPFLG Prior to execution of a logical command the SVD must be loaded with an 8 bit value by using the SAV command The bit wise logical commands AND OR NOT and XOR apply Boolean operations on two 8 bit integers bit by bit The two 8 bit integers are the SVD CMPFLG and the value defined by ARGUMENT of the logical command Note that this value is entered as an integer between 0 and 255 which is then converted by the software into a binary number 8 bits long as described next Each bit is weighted as a power of two and the bit position determines which power of two The bit either O or 1 is multiplied by the respective bit weight The resulting binary number is read from right to left with the right most bit representing bit O and the left most bit representing bit 7 Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 27 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual For example The integer 42 is equivalent to the binary number 00101010 as shown next where bit 0 is the right most bit bit 0 0 x l 0 bit 1 1 x 2 2 bit 2
78. software I O point displays For example IOB9 Tank Level EU is the Discrete Input located at Point Number B9 with a Tag name of Tank Level NOTE The Tag must be unique for the ROC or FloBoss to use it for the shorthand notation feature If there are duplicate Tag names the FST Editor selects the first one in the list B 4 4 Function Examples In the example shown in Figure B 5 the IO point type is combined with a LABEL CKHIAL and CMD VAL to create a function The function writes the current process value VAL of the Tank Level in EUs to the Results Register RR STEP 1 compares the RR value from STEP 0 with the HIAL high alarm value configured for the Tank Level point If the RR value is greater than or equal to gt HIAL the program branches to the PUMPON LABEL The LABEL CKHIAL check high alarm allows another function to branch to this function For example the ARGUMENT2 PUMPON indicates that the FST branches to the Step labeled PUMPON STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 III gt IOB9 TANK LEVEL HIAL DI PUMPON LABEL Figure B 5 Branch Function Example In Figure B 5 when the value RR from the first command equals or exceeds gt the high alarm value HIAL condition is met the FST branches to the PUMPON function to turn the pump on Figure B 6 shows a function that activates a process output Point IOAS is a Discrete Output with a Tag Name PUMP1 The STATUS parameter for a Discrete Ou
79. stamp of the history archive time stamp HHMMSS and date stamp MMDDY Y and floating point values for each of the defined history points for that History Archive Register The date stamp for history uses the current year and does not figure the number of years since 1980 NOTE When in Modbus with EFM extensions mode the time stamp is in the HAMM format In addition the date time stamp is returned before the time stamp 6 8 3 1 Modbus Detailed Point Parameter Information The Modbus Special Function Table point type 39 returns the Event Log Alarm Log and the Historical Archives The Event Alarm Register parameter 0 Hourly periodic History Index Register parameter 1 and the Daily History Index Register parameter 2 can be configured to the desired Register Number The History Archive Register is a single register which can contain one or more history points for retrieval The Starting History Pt field contains the Starting History Point for the History Archive Register while the Ending History Pt 1s the last history point to be included in the History Archive Register All history points in between the Starting History Pt and the Ending History Pt are included in the History Archive Register The Type of History Archive can only be one of two choices Hourly or Daily The Conversion Code can be used to convert the history values However the Conversion Code does not affect the time and date stamp 6 9 Modbus Registers
80. terensnseetardanial 1 6 SOM e EE 6 1 6 36 Software Installation oocooocooccoccocnnccnccncnnoncnoos 1 4 1 6 Ki ar RATO usd 5 12 SP Ramp Ral eebe 6 16 6 17 A 7 Spector cl 5 9 Spread Meca 9 5 SQR Square ROO adenin B 19 B 20 B 26 Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SRBX Alarming See RD O AN 5 20 ST SE Meios B 19 B 22 B 30 SACK D DP a 5 6 SMESSO EE 5 12 A O daracranate B 10 Time for Radio Power Control 6 19 Transmission for Modbus ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 11 Starting A ST ERE SE oy cana TS RDS BEDES DEERE ENEDES B 12 Lt E B 4 History Point for Modbus cccccccceeeeeeeeeees 6 27 Host Request for Modbus ooooooooncccncccnncncnnnnnos 8 11 Register for Modbus cccccccoccnnonoooccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 6 32 ROCLINK Software 1 6 1 7 State ee To 5 6 5 12 5 19 7 1 A E HE Tat REE E Siero ver rye ates 7 2 E 5 12 Sanon NAME eegent ee ee 2 3 3 8 GE eebe ege B 3 SGA NEE 1 15 Status on Power Reset EE PEO e eee 4 14 EE B 5 B 6 EEN B 12 Stop Eege 8 8 FS E B 13 A A O pea ladenoseeeeoarean ite C 1 Store and Forward Path mescentononionooicgoiccnn amaban ainia 8 13 Store and Forward POI airada 8 9 SVA Signal Value Analog B 1 B 3 B 18 SVD Signal Value Discrete B 1 B 3 B 18 B 21 Switch TO OVET d Esna Eaa 6 13 SWICK TO ROMA aaa nido 6 13 Synchronization RE EE 5 21 System Parameters A PRS RRE ESS SSL BED TESTER SES LEG OBE SENE Een
81. the extension FCF Flash Rev 05 03 Getting Started 1 19 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 20 Getting Started Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SECTION 2 ROC DIRECTORY This section details the ROC Directory which is the first screen that displays after logging on to ROCLINK for Windows The ROC Root directory provides a way to create and maintain communications setup files for a PC running ROCLINK software to communicate to individual ROC and FloBoss units ROCLINK For Windows ROC Directory a Utilities Tools Window Help a xj OSO BO TT RAJA NA Fe eORF LOI Radio E aia Fi UL Font or Se al AOC COMM dE Te ROC COMM ees 2 Modem ROC Group p r North Shore Group TCP IP 3 at Station Mame NN Te Mew ROCI Modem or 7 Ka Hew ROCA Dial up sn New Group Click right mouse button to add New HU New Group COM OO Zz Figure 2 1 ROC Directory Communications Directory Tree Example Use the and symbols to display or hide various options NOTE Double click the desired communications link Station Name to connect to that ROC or FloBoss You may also select the menu bar or Toolbar button Direct Connect or Connect commands Refer to Section 8 Configuring Communications concerning how to configure communication ports on the ROC or FloBoss units Rev 05 03 ROC Directory 2 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 2 1 ROC Root The ROC Ro
82. the Analog Output is in Database Value Manual no output is sent Database or RR out RR in Constant Value SVD out SVD in Discrete Output sets the Discrete Output point DO Point DO Output ARG1 ARG2 status to the argument value If the Discrete Output Database Value is in Manual no output is sent Database or RR out RR in Constant Value SVD out SVD in Timed Duration Output activates a DO point DO Point DO Output ARG1 configured as a TDO or TDO Toggle This Database Value command requires that you write a value to the EU RR out RR in Value parameter prior to TDO command SVD out SVD in NOTE The ROC or FloBoss I O task has no mechanism to monitor output EUs and determine parameter changes when they are altered by an FST In order to trigger outputs you must use the corresponding output command see table above These commands trigger the mechanism that changes the output value B 11 6 Database Commands FST Use database commands to read load and store values from ROCLINK software historical databases Description Arguments Load RR set the RR out to the argument value 1 Database or RR out ARG1 Constant Value SVD out SVD in Store RR set the argument to the RR in 1 Database Value ARG1 RR in RR out RR in SVD out SVD in NOTE Do not use the SAV command with the CLK point to set the real time clock Read Historical Database set the RR out to the 1 Dat
83. the right of the current values and click Paste Refer to Figure C 8 Rev 05 03 Custom Displays C 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Z RocLink For Windows Al dsp 4 File Edt View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help LD pl ele SUE Analog Inputs Analog Inputs ES Update POINT TAG 3 0 0 POINT TAG 3 0 0 HI EU 3 0 7 ET EU 3 0 7 Py Auto Scan LOW EU 3 0 6 LOW EU 3 0 6 UNITS 3 0 1 UNITS 35 0 1 EE Edit Hee Figure C 8 Pasting Custom Display Data You can now change the live data values to display other Point Types Make minor alterations to the data you copied to create the custom display You can type over existing characters or you can delete them by using the Backspace or Delete key 5 Highlight the live data values and click TLP Box to make changes to the Point Type Logical Number and Parameter The example uses Analog Input Point Number 2 Click OK Complete changes to the rest of the fields as necessary In the right hand column of this example Analog Input AIN 1 has been copied to the other Analog Input location AIN 2 and the data values have been altered to reflect second AIN 2 data 8 Click Save and click Close C 1 5 From File Display Select Display from the View menu and then choose From File The From File option reads a display from a previously saved DSP file translates the data fields and updates the data 1 Select From
84. to choose it and place it in the active cell in the Workspace or drag and drop the item onto the active cell Click the to close the listing B 8 5 Commands FST The FST Commands menu shown in Figure B 12 and Figure B 13 provides a list of the commands for the CMD cells used in creating functions The list shows the command mnemonic and action for each command Refer to Section B 11 Command Library on page B 18 for a detailed description of each command You can select commands in the following ways Select View gt Commands Click the Command button Press the Commands shortcut lt Alt Ctrl C gt Double click lick the CMD tab in the Listing dialog Click the F9 or F10 button Press lt F9 gt or lt F10 gt gt gt Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual CMD DESC RR AR ARG1 add RR AR ARG1 subtract AR AR ARG1 multiply AR AR ARG divide RA RR raised to power 4RG1 AR Absolute value of RA AR e raised to power ARG1 RR Integer value of RA AR Log base 10 of RA AR AR RG1 add BA e AR Ab subtract AR AR ARGI multiply d De AR ARG divide H AR raised to power ARG1 RR Natural Log of RA AR Square root of AR RR 3rd order polynomial R1 R2 R3 R4 SYD NOT SYD SYD SYD AND ARG1 Figure B 12 Command Pop up SVD SVD OR ARG SYD SYD XOR amp RG1 make ANCA lk nl gt TAGS PARAMETERS Fig
85. to one Care must be taken in configuration including other places such as FSTs to make sure that the Cycle Time remains greater than the calculated On Time for proper operation Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 9 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 6 6 PID Closed loop Proportional Integral and Derivative PID control is used to provide smooth and stable operation of the feedback control loops employing a regulating device such as a control valve The typical use for PID parameters is to control a process variable to a Setpoint NOTE To enable PIDs select ROC gt Information gt Points Enter the number of PIDs you desire in the Point PIDs Active field and click Apply In a given PID Loop point either Single or Override control can be accomplished The PID control loop can use either an Analog Output or a pair of Discrete Outputs to control the regulating device For ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units the PID Override control algorithm has two interdependent PID loops each of which can have its own Analog Output but not at the same time The Override algorithm operates when the Process Variable input exceeds a predetermined switchover Setpoint the Override secondary loop takes over control of the regulating device When the Process Variable input no longer exceeds the switchover Setpoint the Single primary loop regains control One application of Override PID control in a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit is allowing pressure
86. turn the LCD Display Always ON and leave it displayed or select Disabled to allow the LCD Display to time out and turn itself off If Enabled the LCD remains on until the next user logs on who has the LCD Disabled Enable if the user can access to the LCD custom User List 1 2 and 3 of a connected FloBoss 407 for viewing editing or both Y so NOTE If you enable User List security you must also setup which parameters display on the LCD using Configure gt LCD User List Setup Enable 1f the user can access the Standard Lists of a connected FloBoss 407 for viewing editing or both 3 5 LCD User List Setup LCD User List Setup lets you assign up to 16 parameters for viewing on the FloBoss front panel display which shows each parameter for two or three seconds before continuing on to the next one in the sequence The LCD User List is supported by the FloBoss 407 and 500 Series and by the ROC300 Series 1 Select Configure gt LCD User List Setup KE po D gt Cu e Fris Des ES Dis KD m e E iiia w OF x Cancel f Gees Figure 3 14 LCD User List Setup 3 14 Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 2 Use the drop down list box to select the LCD User List Number List No you desire to configure Refer to Figure 3 Define up to 16 Data Point definitions to display in the User List on the LCD at approximately three second intervals 4 Enter the 10 character Description o
87. user program tasks and User Data Types Generally a Cold Start should not be used on a ROC or FloBoss that is actively gathering data and performing control Save or document all required data and parameter values that could be affected before performing the Cold Start The following may occur when performing a Cold Start When using a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC or a FloBoss 407 logs ROC displays stored in ROC memory and FSTs may be cleared Any FSTs that exist must be manually started after the Cold Start by setting the FST Status parameter to On in the FST Parameters point If FSTs were cleared then they must be loaded from disk using the FST Editor utility Clearing FSTs sets them to zero size which can cause processor loading problems if the FST is turned on 3 2 Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual When using a ROC300 Series unit with a FlashPAC logs ROC displays and FSTs may be cleared If a Write to EEPROM which includes the FST run status had been performed before the Cold Start the FSTs will be in the same state after the Cold Start as when the Write to EEPROM was done such as running if the FST was running FST registers are always cleared upon restart therefore use Softpoints to load initial values for the FST When using a FloBoss 500 Series unit logs and FSTs may be cleared If a Write to Internal Config Memory which includes the FST and FST point had been performed b
88. 2 Launch and log into ROCLINK for Windows 3 Do one of the following Click the Direct Connect button Select Direct Connect from the ROC menu Right mouse click on the Station Name in the ROC Root Directory and select Connect 4 If this is the first time that you have connected to the ROC or FloBoss continue to Section 3 Setting the Clock After selecting Direct Connect from the ROC menu ROCLINK software attempts to establish communications through COM1 of the PC at one of the following baud rates 9600 4800 2400 600 and 300 If this is unsuccessful the program then attempts to establish communications through COM2 COM3 and COM4 successively until it receives a valid reply If the link is established with the ROC or FloBoss ROCLINK software menu bar is then updated in keeping with the available functions Y NOTE Refer to Section Successful Login on page 8 17 and Section 8 3 4 Troubleshooting Connection Errors on page 8 18 8 3 2 Connect Disconnect When off line the ROC menu displays Connect When on line the ROC menu displays DisConnect Select ROC gt DisConnect to close all on line communications Select ROC gt Connect from the ROC menu to connect to the communications file Station Name currently selected in the ROC Root directory If a ROC communications file is not currently selected you receive the error No ROC is Currently Selected Select a ROC in the ROC Directory and click Conn
89. 2 Select Utilities gt FST Editor 3 Select the FST 1 FST 2 FST 3 or FST 4 from the Select option in the FST File menu This is the FST that you create A FloBoss 103 only has one FST and a FloBoss 500 Series has two FSTs 4 Fill in each STEP with the appropriate values The LABEL fields are optional and are generally only used when the STEP branches to another STEP using the GO command 5 Select a command CMD using F9 6 Select ARGUMENTI using F9 The Tag automatically displays 7 Select the Parameter using F10 8 Select ARGUMENT2 using F9 The Tag automatically displays 9 Select the Parameter using F10 10 Enter the END command at the end of your FST 11 Select Build gt Compile The contents of the Workspace are encoded into the proper format for use by the ROC or FloBoss and downloaded to ROC memory B 10 FST Editor Rev 05 03 12 13 14 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The compiled file displays in the Output compiled FST field The Output compiled FST field displays errors in the FST so that the error can be corrected before the FST is downloaded Click Yes to download the FST Enter the Version number and Description of the FST and click OK After the FST 1s compiled select Output from the FST View menu to view the FST If compilation completes without detecting any errors the FST is downloaded to the ROC or FloBoss B 7 1 1 Creating an FST Using a Disk File Use the following steps to create an FST us
90. 28 raised to power of RR Jump to STEP pointed to by ARGUMENT1 LABEL RR Integer value of RR If RR gt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL Log 10 character message and a current value lt lt gt gt ABS ALM AND AO BRK CT DWK END EVT SVD SVD OR ARGUMENT 1 RR 3rd order polynomial R1 R2 R3 R4 Read History Value into RR Write RR to variable specified in ARGUMENT1 RR Square root of RR 5 5 5 5 Set Timer ARGUMENT1 to ARGUMENT2 100 msec intervals Force Discrete Output Recalculation 17 5 SVD SVD XOR ARGUMENTI Note 1 Number of bytes for ARGUMENT1 3 message length GO INT LN LOG MND MSG NOT P3 RDB SAV SQR ST TDO TSK VAL WDB WT WTM XOR Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 19 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 11 1 Mathematical Commands FST The mathematical commands provide simple arithmetic or mathematical operations Such operations include addition subtraction multiplication division raise to power absolute value e raised to a power truncate to integer base 10 logarithm natural logarithm square root and 3rd bes polynomial Mame Description ___ Arguments eg my pe svoi o svon a CH Ger Divide RR in by value 1 Database or Constant Value If parm1 0 0 RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in ARG1 If RR in 0 0 RR out RR in If RR in lt 0 0 temp1 int ARG1 If RR in
91. 3 1 System Requirements cccccccccccncnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 1 2 T A IS B 5 B 16 Tab Delimited Spreadeheet 9 5 Table 3 1 Maximum Number of Applications 3 9 Table 4 1 Input and Output Point Numbers 4 Table 6 1 Typical Power Control and Host COMMS WFAN ON andante 6 20 Table 6 2 FloBoss Supported Modbus Function Codes EE 6 22 Table 6 3 ASCII Message Frame 6 24 Table 6 4 RTU Message Frame 6 24 Rev 05 03 Table 6 5 Modbus History Event and Alarm Functionality FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series 6 28 Table 6 6 Modbus Events and Alarms Log Contents 6 29 Table 6 7 Operator Alarm Change Bit Map Contents 6 29 Table 6 8 Modbus Register Definition Defaults 6 31 Table 6 9 Modbus Function Convert Codes 6 33 Table 7 1 Required History Configuration per Meter A cw see SL BEES ERR NES ERE acetal atta 7 2 Table 7 2 Optional History Configuration per Meter HE ee 7 7 Table 7 3 History and Log Data Archival Types 7 10 Table 8 1 Communication Porte 8 5 Table B 1 Workspace and Output Keystrokes B 5 Table B 2 Pre defined Point Type Mnemonics B 7 Table B 3 Monitor and Trace Mode Keystrokes B 16 Table B 4 Command Library Conventions B 18 Table B 5 FST Command Summary 2 B 19 E Te E 6 4 E ues 4 1 5 27 6 1 6 11 6 12 6 19 B 3 PBS EE B 14 Tank ER EE 6 2 Contract Hour Lev ee 6 3 Cure a a ano 6 2 IER RE Dai ssania o 6 3 EE
92. 5 Select either Calculate or Enter for the capacity Heating Value of a specified quantity of gas If you choose Calculate then the Heating Value is calculated from the gas composition data If you choose Enter the value entered will be used in the heating value calculation Use the units button to toggle between volume or mass measurement of English units represented as BTU Cf or BTU Lb and the metric unit values as MJ m or MJ Kg 6 Select either Calculate or Enter for the Spec Gravity for the ratio of the molar mass of the gas to the molar mass of air If you select Calculate the specific gravity 1s calculated from the gas composition data at standard conditions of 14 73 PSIA and 60 F If you select Enter the value entered for standard conditions 1s used in the flow calculation When using a FloBoss 500 Series the Specific Gravity value cannot be less than 0 07 if Enter is selected 7 Gas Quality The FloBoss calculates gas flow through an orifice meter AGA3 calculation when used in a FloBoss 503 or 553 and through a turbine meter AGA7 calculation when used in a FloBoss 504 The composition of the gas can be constant entered or live provided by a host values Three parameters are constant or live Gas Quality Heating Value and Specific Gravity 5 2 3 Advanced Meter Set Up Advanced tab Meter Set up contains a number of additional parameters that affect the flow calculation 1 Select Meter gt Setup gt Advanced tab
93. 5 2 1 1 Averaging Techniques Averaging techniques appear here and during History Setup When using a FloBoss 103 or a FloBoss 500 Series averaging techniques are set up for the meter run When using a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC averaging techniques are set up on a point by point basis using the History Setup screen NOTE Averaging Techniques are detailed in API Chapter 21 Section 1 Appendix B Flow Dependant Linear This 1s the simplest and most commonly used method This method discards samples for periods when there is no measurable flow and performs a straightforward linear average of the remaining samples to compute the minute and hour values The value specified in the Low Flow Cutoff of the Meter setup determines the values When no flow occurs all values are sampled Flow Dependant Formulaic This method discards samples for periods when there is no flow However in calculating the average this method typically takes the square root of each sample before averaging the samples together and then squares the result This formulaic method produces a slightly lower value than the linear method Flow Weighted Linear This method does not discard any samples instead it weights each sample by multiplying it by a flow value square root of the differential pressure measured during the sample period Next a linear average is calculated by dividing the sum of the flow weighted sample by the sum of the
94. 5 22 RE ele Ce lan ls 4 4 Flow and Sensor 5 21 A A 5 2 5 20 NIN SE E E ated 6 5 MVS Deddband si ciao 6 7 MVS Differential Pressure W u ussseneereeererreese 6 7 MIS Pr SM ra eco e AES igen 6 7 MIS Eu ibid 6 7 A A E EN 5 20 REBEX EE 4 5 8 12 TC 703 E 7 10 EE 5 5 5 21 ALM A eaei B 19 B 25 A O O E EAT B 5 E Bh i JS EE B 5 PLAC LD EEN B 5 Da ioe Er e KER na nnn ee A E F RRE REE B 5 Ambient Ho Did daturesemniieasnibatdeb bounties 5 19 Analog Inputs SEE E SARA 4 5 Analog Outputs ata et ME VEREDE 4 7 AN Eee ieee casted B 19 B 21 O E B 19 B 23 B 31 B 32 Ant LD FASO id dla 4 8 Adjusted D A TOUT cocinan ic 4 8 Adye eda werd A 4 8 l 2 Analog E E 4 7 High Reading EU ita 4 8 FOR ad EU eienn 4 8 POMI E 1 13 Raw EE Ee 4 8 REESE ir iia 4 8 dE 4 7 Unida 4 7 A A A 4 7 Value on Power E 4 8 APLS Sye eel niet 5 12 5 21 Y et ntery Steere ee trite reet rea eres 1 12 PREC IVE Ee 7 4 E LY Des ee 7 4 INI OCIS spicata aes ed A 6 28 ARGUMENT Dien ad B 5 ARGUMENTZ tas B 5 EES toa B 7 AMLO Eent 1 14 P EE B 5 B 16 A A Era 5 8 ASCO WEE 6 23 9 5 Atmospheric Pre sSUTO molienda 5 11 Audit EE 9 3 A 7 10 Automatic Daylight Savings Time Set 3 10 Sn FEEL FEDERER 4 3 SA ES 1 4 A AI eege C 1 Auxiliary Outputs occcccccccccnnccnononocnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnos 3 7 LA A rE 7 5 Differential Pressure oocooccocccoccnccnccnccnonnnnnns 7 1 7 2 Statie Pressure Eet genee ege ese 7 1 7 2 TEMPLATES
95. 5 5 COSI EE B 7 LOMO ee 6 19 EOS SE ces eee hac a eee sat eee B 7 Adding A a B 7 O A A eeh 2 3 COT DEE B 7 LOA T 2 4 Addition errada B 19 B 20 Address A AN B 19 B 22 A O 6 5 lt Less than or Equal to B 19 B 22 Eechen 2 3 3 8 8 1 td E E 1 15 ee E IR 2 3 8 2 E E ON 1 15 Advanced Ee 1 15 PN EE 4 6 SSE GUANO oa Noe B 19 B 22 EE 4 8 SET ESS o EE B 19 B 22 Computer COMMUNICATIONS ooooononoonnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 8 4 gt Greater than or Equal to B 19 B 22 Dias 4 10 EE 4 14 Numerical TEE 5 9 EE 4 18 0 Conte A 3 EE 5i A Rn PPR me AOE OR 5 25 Calculation Methode 5 2 AA O A 4 15 Meter Alarms mr 5 20 0 Pulse Width Parameters ooooooocononononononononononononononononancnnnnananonaconoso 5 3 A E E REESE DEDE E N 4 11 SE 5 POD FeO OU EEN A 3 AGA3 Rev 05 03 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual ett EE 5 5 Eeer 5 11 A AEE Ee 5 2 5 10 5 11 TE de TESS E E E 5 2 AI e EI E 4 7 EES 4 6 Adjusted A D LOO enii 4 6 Advanced E 4 6 Andos TAPUS E 4 5 Average Raw EE EE 4 7 Capra OMen e 5 22 EAN a 4 7 EE 4 5 EE 4 6 ich Readins RE 4 6 Low Reading E RE 4 6 POMmENUO DE dois 4 5 PO A Ee 1 13 4 5 Raw A D TAS Es orale ERE orne 4 7 Sean E EE 4 6 E 4 5 Ee 4 5 A A ENDERNE E 4 5 Alarm Log REDON A A aster esas easel atigs cians 7 10 PRIVAT ONG accra a esas 4 4 9 2 B 41 PLN a a aa a a a 4 4 Dead Time oocnnoccnnccnniccnnncnnoconanonnncnnaronaronunconaronanos
96. 6 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual For example If you set Retry Count 1 to 2 Delay 1 to 10 Retry Count 2 to 1 and Delay 2 to 20 then after the first unsuccessful attempt to communicate with the host the RBX Features would try two more times after waiting 10 seconds each time and once more after waiting 20 seconds Set the Delay to define the time in seconds between attempts to transmit an RBX message Note that a Delay parameter is associated with each Retry Count parameter Enable Extra Key On ROC300 Series with ROCPAC to add an additional amount of time to delay transmitting an RBX message after turning the RTS signal on The amount of time is fixed This parameter is used for radio communications Enter the No Of Retries ROC300 Series with ROCPAC A message is repeated if a valid response is not obtained on the first attempt Note that a O or 255 entry causes continuous retries that can only be stopped when the host clears the RBX alarm The time between each retry 1s set by the Retry Time parameter Enter the Retry Time ROC300 Series with ROCPAC to define the extra key on delay in seconds used for each attempt to transmit an RBX message Enter the Extra Key On Delay ROC300 Series with FlashPAC and FloBoss 407 Version 1 05 or greater to define an additional amount of time to delay transmitting an RBX message after turning the RTS signal on Enable the parameter and then specify the number of secon
97. 7 128 36 9 1 OJOJOO O O O OJO O O Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 31 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual ROC FloBoss Parameter 7103 7107 47 128 0 Param 0 7108 7127 47 128 36 Param 7262 7288 46 128 15 Param 16 8000 8053 46 128 0 Param 8054 8063 45 128 0 Param Function Code Indexing Conversion Row Starting Register Ending Register 2 Select the Function Number to distinguish between the different tables such as Function Number 1 displayed in Figure 6 17 Select the Serial Number to view and alter all available Modbus Register Definitions 4 Enter a Function Name up to 20 characters to distinguish between the different Modbus Register tables 5 Enter a Starting Register to represent the first data register in the address span In certain Modbus Host devices the register 40101 is actually transmitted as 100 The value 100 should be placed in the Start address field because the FloBoss uses the actual number sent by the Host A Starting Register of O is a valid address Any number from 0 to 65535 is valid Register numbers can be duplicated as long as they are in separate Modbus Function configuration tables The tables should be numbered from smallest to largest For example the Host device requests the Starting Register 500 through Ending Register 700 The Starting Register 1s 400 and the Ending Register 1s 700 All register numbers requested by the Host 500 through 700 are valid and would be resp
98. 9 Radion A S 6 18 Opcode DOC LU E 6 3 dE 6 3 Be E 9 4 A O O 1 13 Operator cocos 3 12 Operator Interface Port See A ane ele bae ahaneeet eieeaeecs eho 1 8 Operator Pas WO da TES 3 12 OR EN PU eee es B 19 B 21 A ee e 5 2 5 4 EDERT 5 4 Matta OS 5 12 A SELE DESK SEE Es EDER ruler mae EERE BESS een 1 12 Ce 3 10 Output AO EE 4 7 Rate NEE 6 20 RE 4 12 A S SES RE SEE REED ESSEN SEERE ED eaecon est B 13 PID E 6 11 6 13 Overtide LOOP site a 6 12 6 14 EH EE 6 16 Hite dl AL E 6 17 LOOP Er O O 6 16 S eege Ee 6 14 ee Ee 6 17 Scale E EE 6 17 SP RAMPER E 6 17 O A A wudatenonsiest 6 14 A N S ERE SEE ENES ERE RE FEDE SEEREN 6 16 Tuning PID Parameter 6 14 A 6 Type se E 6 15 Overview of User Interface 1 9 P P3 3rd Order Pohvnomal B 19 B 21 B 27 Paro WOW EE Ra B 16 EE Ki EE B 5 B 16 E 6 36 EA ege dE 1 17 EE eege deg C 2 E EE 5 3 en en EE 3 1 THIS rer 7 5 Ee 8 8 Part INUMDET sessecs amsensnarnacerniassseeemimemeccanhessecouasss 3 11 Pass Through Communications ccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnss 3 5 EE 1 7 A ES NESA SIDENS ERE 3 12 o 1 12 1 13 1 16 Display RE C 5 l 11 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual A S 7 6 e Ter EE 7 6 kt EE 7 6 SEE A O E 7 6 Phase Discrepaney Erro is 5 21 Prisa lao eos 4 16 Accumulated Pulses 1 1 1 W W Xu udsseneereeereeveer ne enrenee 4 17 Advanced EE 4 18 IR a KE LEE 4 17 4 19 Current Rieza ebe 4 17 EV ODGO EE 4 18 FU Ae EE 4 16 BR 4 18 ZADA m 6 EE 4 18 EUV iea 4 18 US
99. A A Cascais a eee seek 4 19 PO EE 1 13 Primary EE ii 7 2 SS nee Pe oo et ee DENS FEE enn ate RE PEATE TREERE 4 19 Rate Max Rollover ooocccccncccninnocononos 4 16 4 18 o E 4 18 Rollover Value BUS WE 4 18 Running Total Entered Rollover 4 16 4 18 Scan Pero e es O 4 16 A O 4 17 Today s Total Max Rollover 4 16 4 18 Uncorrected ACCU eenean sd ae 4 17 A AN aa gS NTE RT ES 1 14 6 11 6 12 A 1 Calo PRIS EE 6 11 6 13 COTTON EEN A 4 A 6 Control LPs E 6 10 EE ere nai 6 11 6 12 6 14 IR el A EE 6 17 DO Close EEN 6 12 6 13 BOCs d PU ie ie eee Tasio 6 14 DO Ope E 6 12 6 13 CTA i a EEEE ees aaa esis aden ae ieee 6 15 6 16 Malt PID On Rest ri AE 6 15 Integral Deadband ccccccccccnnnccnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoss 6 16 LOOP Eelere Anere 6 13 6 15 6 16 Manual Tracking salater salen e 6 15 KR Weg e TIE EEN 6 15 BI e EE 6 11 6 13 6 14 DN A 6 14 Override PID LOOP srl as 6 14 Ode BV sacsace tahoe set satinchatceterimstnc estate nausea 6 14 Override Switch PV ii 6 14 Overide Ke 6 15 EENEG 6 11 6 14 A 4 A 6 Primary Loop Tunisia 6 15 A 6 Primary OUMite isla ds 6 12 6 13 Primary PLD eege gie 6 12 Pomar PY ies 6 12 6 13 Pomar S Wate PN serenon oran riet 6 13 Process Variable conan ciniiaiccia cian 6 11 6 13 6 14 E EE 6 16 6 17 KK ETS E 6 16 I 12 SC le Facto ON 6 16 6 17 SE 6 11 6 12 EE Ehe 6 13 6 14 SP EE Eeer 6 16 6 17 Switch to OYES ui 6 13 EEN 6 13 IDO Cont
100. AL loads the Results Register with the value 100 STEP 1 GO jumps to the STEP with the LABEL OUTPUT STEP 2 VAL loads the Results Register with the value 0 STEP 3 GO jumps to the STEP with the LABEL OUTPUT STEP 4 AO operates the control or equivalent device to value dictated by ARGUMENT in this example the value of the Results Register 6 STEP 5 Execution of the FST has completed END After a 100 millisecond delay execution resumes with STEP 0 The Analog Output AO command sends the analog value specified in ARGUMENT to the analog Point Number specified in ARGUMENTI The analog value is not sent if the analog Point Number is in Manual Mode The check for Manual Mode is included as a safety feature and permits the FST to continue operation if the device connected to the Analog Output is being serviced eS e SER If a PID loop is controlling the Analog Output placing the PID loop into Manual Mode allows the FST to send a value to the output parameter of the PID Sending the value to the EU parameter of an Analog Output changes the parameter s contents but does not initiate a new raw output B 16 2 Discrete Output Control Command FST This is an example of a Discrete Output control command in an FST KE LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 DO 31046 D0 DEFAULT STATUS DO 31046 D0 DEFAULT STATUS DO 31046 D0 DEFAULT STATUS DO 2 31046 D0 DEFAULT STATUS DO STEP 0 DO activate
101. ART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer Holding Register Analog output number value to be read Hw Differential pressure Hz Hertz J IC Industry Canada ID Identification IEC Industrial Electrical Code IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers The Open System Interconnection OSI reference model and an international standard for the organization of local area networks LANs established by the International Standards Organization ISO and the IEEE IMS Internet Measurement Services part of the eFlow package IMV Integral Multiplier Value Input Digital input a bit to be read Input Register Input numeric value to be read I O Input Output I O Module Module that plugs into an I O slot on a ROC to provide an I O channel IRQ Interrupt Request Hardware address oriented ISO Organisation international de normalization Internationl Statands Organization IV Integral Value K KB Kilobytes KHz Kilohertz L LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light emitting diode LNK Ethernet has linked LOI Local Operator Interface Refers to the serial EAI 232 RS 232 port on the ROC or FloBoss through which local communications are established typically for configuration software running on a PC ERC Longitudinal Redundancy Checking error checking m Meter mA Milliamp s one thousandth of an ampere Manual Mo
102. Al Calibration The Calibration routine provides Verify Calibrate and Zero Shift functions for each input of the meter run as applicable You can calibrate Differential Pressure orifice metering only may be High or Low Differential Pressure depending on the device Static Pressure or Temperature Calibration parameters include Set Zero Set Span and Set Midpoint 1 2 and 3 This allows you to specify the low calibration point between the Zero and Span endpoints The Zero and Span endpoints are used in setting the Midpoints Midpoints 1 2 and 3 are values set between the Zero and Span values All new calibration values are automatically logged in the Event Log NOTE When calibrating Stacked Differential Pressure you may calibrate either the low differential pressure Low DP input or the high differential pressure Diff Pressure input 5 22 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual NOTE Click Cancel to exit the calibration without saving the changes The previous calibration settings are retained NOTE During calibration the ROC or FloBoss time outs and disconnects if it is left idle for an extended period You lose calibration values and must reconnect to start calibration from the beginning If you have an older ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit you can lengthen this time out by increasing the Scan Period for the input s being calibrated CAUTION If you have a FloBoss 503 refer
103. B 8 EST SUUC Ciao B 6 AAA ee A EA 6 32 Index INANE A A A case ater 6 32 Function Sequence Table A O estas aces B 1 G SA II AAA A 7 a cada dre eee rer taeda 6 16 Gas Components ura 5 8 ENEE 5 2 A FEE ERE SEE SEERE acabcoumastesanuiivaatad 5 8 A ERE re FEE ERE BEER ren 5 12 GO eed ob dd B 6 B 9 B 19 B 24 B 35 Goto ES EEN B 12 Gravitational Accelerapon 5 11 Gravity COMECLON eege 5 12 mener CVAD doi B 29 Greater than or equal to B 29 Gross Kee 5 10 NES 5 10 Group 6 EE 2 3 REN 2 4 DE E 2 5 EECH 2 3 3 8 8 1 ROCLINK E 2 3 8 2 H Hat PID On Res ei 6 15 A 6 Hardware UR AUS E 3 17 Heating Eegen 5 9 Vale DAS as 5 8 Help A A an EN eaten Ce eta Tee 1 15 Help Menu HED FODER tac ee 1 15 NA EE B 8 HRAM Bs ses a so iel B 41 Ps o es e TO eee 1 12 High PNM hace eats BEER REDE E SEERE DENE DEERE selene FREDEDE A ANE 4 4 DESSpoOlMt attend 5 7 Flow and Sensor Alarm 5 22 AAA SER SEE ews rales teatmaswnans 4 4 Meter Ala DEE 5 20 Modbus Scale Value eaa 6 25 MISMA ada 6 7 Reims a 4 6 Historical Database i oA ER AEE A mede ks B 37 A A A ecsosta ri eodattes 7 1 7 3 7 5 ArNe TYP 7 4 Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual AUT Lio daa 9 3 Configuring for EFM Reports Wu u u ssssseeseeerrrer 7 6 Daily and EE 9 3 Modbus Access EE 6 27 Modbus Collecpon seven renees esse 6 30 Point and Parameter 7 5 POMS E 3 9 7 3 A O O e 7 10 Valle to ATC Esas 7 4 Hold A A bene enhe
104. C Displays Restore Config amp Clear FSTs Restore configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clear all FSTs Restore Config amp Clear History Restore configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clear all History database files Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Restore Config amp Clear All of the above Restore configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clear all of the above 3 2 2 Returning the ROC or FloBoss to the Factory Default Settings Sometimes it is necessary to return the ROC or FloBoss to the original factory default settings The following procedure clears all saved restart configuration data contained in programmable ROM Only factory defaults are retained To return the ROC or FloBoss to the original factory default settings 1 Select ROC gt Flags 2 Select Clear Internal Config Memory or Clear EEPROM and click Apply 3 Perform a Cold Start using the Restore Config amp Clear All of the above option Refer to Section Performing a Cold Start on page 3 2 3 2 3 Setting ROC Flags To set ROC Flags 1 Select ROC gt Flags Refer to Figure and Figure ADL Een ne et piore D breed Features ROC Flags ROC Flags Sia D ren odo EL O pare Dorsal feat Start Options Cold Start Options CRE Check l aterm Eat T Gee GEPAOM DO wen lo BE PAG y Sr 5 art ie Enabled P Ki D ss Wanzen Col
105. C and FloBoss units approved for Measurement Industry Canada custody transfer ROCLINK software is designed for ease of use Drop down menus simplify accessing the functions provided by the software Dialog boxes and drop down list boxes help to direct selections and data entry You can perform actions with the keyboard or a pointing device such as a mouse Refer to Section U A for a description of the user interface Help screens are accessed either from the Help menu or using the lt F1 gt button This feature makes it easy to access on line information for any ROCLINK software topic You can build custom displays for the ROC or FloBoss that combine both graphic and dynamic data elements The displays can monitor the operation of the ROC or FloBoss either locally or remotely The software also provides multiple levels of security for controlling access to ROCLINK software functions as well as the ROC or FloBoss database Making changes to passwords or to the access level for personnel is accomplished through the ROC and Utilities menus which are available only to an authorized person Y so NOTE If you are using a serial mouse typically plugs into serial port COM1 be sure to set up communications to the ROC FloBoss through a port that does not share interrupts typically COM2 or a conflict could occur locking up your PC Rev 05 03 Getting Started 1 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 4 Software Installation To use ROCLINK
106. CLINK software and returns you to the point where you started ROCLINK software Security can be enabled by Identifier and Password or by Access level of the user If Access Level security is enabled then your Login and Password must also be valid for the unit Refer to Section ROC Security NOTE You can only run one version of ROCLINK at a time ROCLINK does not support multiple copies of ROCLINK running on the same computer at the same time 1 6 Connecting the Computer to the ROC or FloBoss This section details how to connect the computer to the ROC or FloBoss If the ports on both the computer and the ROC or FloBoss are configured properly then a Connect command causes the computer to begin communicating with the FloBoss or ROC through Comm 1 or Comm 2 For connecting to a ROC or FloBoss locally using the Local Operator Interface LOI port use the Direct Connect to establish communications 1 6 1 Local Hardware Connection LO The PC running ROCLINK software physically connects to the ROC or FloBoss through a cable For a local connection this cable is typically a prefabricated operator interface LOI cable available from the Flow Computer Division of Emerson Process Management One end of the cable plugs into the ROC or FloBoss operator interface connector on the ROC or FloBoss enclosure This connector is either a round screw cap protected connector Amphenol for the FloBoss 407 or FloBoss 500 Series units or a 9 pin D she
107. E e 8 12 Seiler e E 8 11 Contract HOUT EE 3 8 Control KEE eene 1 14 FST Related Commande B 31 Override PID LOOP 6 14 PD E 6 11 6 14 Primary PID LOP i 6 12 Types ee 6 11 6 12 6 14 A 5 CORVERSTO a ee 6 32 A sete ierger setae vecac Gates eaneriee decade 6 28 Convert Codes iA oy 6 1 2 SKS gree eee e RE CSE DERE AL SPP Te SERENE 6 33 Ben Elie 9 5 KEE 1 12 1 13 1 16 Display RN C 5 Corrected EE Train WEE 5 6 COPECO Faclo eet 5 19 CRE ASER EE 3 5 3 7 Creating Display Exa ia C 3 les KE B 10 CT Gh ck E B 19 B 22 B 30 CHLEE N HEEN B 5 B 16 Cul EE B 5 B 16 A EE B 16 Giht EEN B 16 AO EE B 16 GME EE B 16 GES S aaa O B 16 EEN ET EEEE EN B 5 CTS D E 8 9 Current V AIG ee 7 6 CustomDisplayS ici ee id C 1 Customer Nader ii ii ici 3 10 EE O 1 13 A O EEN SET TE EGE SEE errant ere 6 9 CV ClO an EST E B 38 D Daily tert 9 3 A 6 27 Data FW TOD ersen A A 6 1 Ra eegen 8 8 BE EE 1 11 aerer E EANA EEA A 6 23 l 4 A ar en ee ARE 3 15 Eet LOA eebe 6 4 Database EECHER dia is 7 6 Daylieht Savines Times 3 2 3 10 Dead Welch Tester Mee 5 24 IR ale E Te WE 4 4 Deadwereht Calibration E 5 19 Default EI EEN 9 2 9 3 EEN 3 4 IR 8 13 D EE 1 12 B 5 HEEN 2 5 i EE B 12 A A en eet ee 2 4 ROC ege 2 5 Den Vative GC REN 6 16 6 17 A 7 BE EFA MEN 9 6 Montor Ee 4 19 Desktop Shortcut 5 4 roere ai 1 6 DB 21 E 5 10 E KE 5 10 DI Accumulated Value aosa 4 10 AVANCE EE 4 10 EEN ee Kee 4 9 Discreto
108. Figure Click the browse button to select the EFM Report file EFM Report File ows Data CollectD ata aga El Station Address fi Group 2 d Station Name Remote Oprtns Cnitrir Enter meter run to X Start date End date 12 22 1999 he 12 22 1999 z Figure 7 3 EFM Report Data Selection Screen I 2 Click the EFM Report File l button to display a lists the names of all the files that have the AGA or DET extension previously created by using the Collect Data function The configuration file is located to the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data unless you specify otherwise Select the desired file and click Open 4 Use the Enter meter run drop down list box to select the meter run for which to create a report 5 Enter the Start date and End date Alarm events hourly history and daily history records from between these dates inclusively will be included in the report Click Next 6 Select the Data files to include in the report under the Available sections list Refer to Figure Use the arrows to scroll through your selections 7 8 Configuring and Viewing History Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Available sections v Hourly Volume Data Characteristic Confiquration Data Selected sections Characteristic Configuration Data Hourly Volume Data vD aily Volume Data tee Ge v larm Dat
109. Figure FST Parame ter 21 xi General Advanced FST Status EST FST SEQ 1 D Tag eer SEQ 1 F Enabled Disabled Register 1 o Register 6 o Register 2 jf Register 7 fo Register 3 0 Register 8 0 Register 4 0 Register 9 0 Register 5 jf Register 10 0 l il I A Paste 2 Update ox K Cancel 0 Apply Figure B 1 FST Parameters 2 Use the FST drop down list box to select the FST Register point you desire to configure B 2 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 3 Enter the Tag as a 10 character name identifying the FST Register point 4 Select FST Status Enabled for the FST associated with this FST Registers point You can turn the associated FST on or off by selecting or deselecting the correct checkbox and clicking Apply 5 Enter the Register R1 to R10 ten floating point registers are used for storage among all FSTs in the ROC and FloBoss The FST Registers can store calculated or manually entered values and can pass data from one table to another These Registers may be read from or written to by any FST and are referred to as Register R1 to Register R10 B 2 1 FST Advanced Use FST Advanced options to expand FST capabilities 1 Select Configure gt Control gt FST Register 2 Click the Advanced tab Refer to Figure FST Parameter 21x General Advanced Timer Misc Timer 1 o Misc 1 D Exec Delay Timer 2
110. Figure 6 17 Modbus Register Definition 6 31 Figure 6 2 Opcode Table Settings eee 6 4 Figure 6 3 Multi Variable Sensor 6 5 Figure 6 4 MVS Differential Pressure Alarms 6 7 Figure 6 5 Timed Duration Output Parameters 6 8 Figure 6 6 PID Loop Single Al 6 11 Figure 6 7 PID Loop Single D 6 11 Figure 6 8 PID Loop AI Override 00 6 12 Figure 6 9 PID Loop DO Override 1 6 12 Pisure Tele History PO eebe eege deet 7 3 Figure 7 2 History Setup FloBoss 500 Series 7 5 Figure 7 3 EFM Report Data Selection Screen 1 7 8 Figure 7 4 EFM Report Data Selection Screen 2 7 9 Figure 7 5 EFM Report Data Selection Screen 3 7 9 Figure 7 6 EFM Report Data Selection Screen 4 7 9 Figure 7 7 Select History Points to be Shown 7 11 Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Figure 8 1 ROC Communication Parameter Setup E ee 8 3 Figure 8 10 Analog Input RBX Alarming 8 14 Figure 8 11 Configuration Tree Menu 8 17 Figure 8 2 ROC Communication Parameter Setup o AEE A AET A Er E AN 8 4 Figure 8 3 Communication Ports Example 1 8 6 Figure 8 4 Communication Ports Example 2 8 7 Figure 8 5 Comm Ports FloBoss 500 Sertes 8 8 Figure 8 6 Modem Configuration 8 10 Figure 8 7 Modbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROCJO SONES 3 eer 8 11 Figure 8 8 RBX F
111. Form A6091 Part Number D301138X012 May 2003 ROCLINK for Windows Configuration Software User Manual Flow Computer Division Ze EMERSON Website www EmersonProcess com flow ROCLINK 800 User Manual Revision Tracking Sheet May 2003 This manual is periodically altered to incorporate new or updated information The date revision level of each page is indicated at the bottom of the page opposite the page number A major change in the content of the manual also changes the date of the manual which appears on the front cover Listed below is the date revision level of each page Page Revision All Pages 05 03 Software version 1 20 All Pages 09 02 Software version 1 10 All Pages 03 01 Software version 1 01 ROCLINK is a mark of one of the Emerson Process Management companies The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co All other marks are the property of their respective owners This product may be covered under pending patent applications Fisher Controls International LLC 2001 2003 All rights reserved Printed in the U S A While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Fisher Controls does not guarantee satisfactory results from reliance upon such information Nothing contained herein is to be construed as a warranty or guarantee express or implied regarding the performance merchantability fitness or any other matter with respect to the products nor as a
112. Frame Begin of Frame LRC Error Check T1 T2 T3 T4 1 Byte 1 Byte N 1 Byte 2 Bytes 11 T2 T3 T4 3 Select Log Modbus Events Enabled to log all Modbus parameter changes to the Event Log or select Disabled to allow Modbus parameter changes to occur without being logged By default Log Modbus Events is Enabled 4 Select the Byte Order of data bytes in a transmission or request can be reversed by the selection made in these check boxes This only affects the Data field of a Modbus message and has no effect on the data for Function Codes 01 02 and OS Least Significant Byte First Selecting this check box places the Least Significant Byte first This is the default value Most Significant Byte First Selecting this check box places the Most Significant Byte first 5 Select Enron Modbus Enable to use an implementation of Modbus protocol with EFM extensions This causes the Hourly Periodic and Daily indices to be returned as floating point values instead of the standard integer and character values In addition the history index is adjusted to accommodate a one based index 1 to 840 and the date stamp MMDDY Y is returned before the time stamp HHMM which does not include seconds 6 24 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 6 8 1 Scale Values By default all Scale Values are set to zero Refer to Figure 1 Select Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration gt Scale Values tab MODBUS Configurati
113. H X amp D2 amp C amp S1S 1S7 255 9600 Dial up Modem Card W38169X0012 amp W38169X0022 AT amp F E V H X XK XSIS 1S7 255S24 6 FloBoss 500 Series ATE H V XIQ amp CI amp D2Z amp S amp QL S 1S7 6 Enter the Hayes style Connect Command required to contact the host Typically this is the command ATDT followed by the telephone number This parameter is required only for dial out operations such as for RBX Alarming Configuring Communications Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual ATDT lt number gt For example ATDT5155551212 8 2 3 Configuring Modbus Host Parameters on the ROC or FloBoss When using a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit the Modbus Host Parameters tab available in the ROC Comm Ports screen allows you to set parameters that typically require the Modbus Host emulation user program to be loaded in order to function 1 Select ROC gt Comm Ports 2 Select the host Port Comm1 or Comm2 and click the Modbus Host Parameters tab Comm Port General Modbus Host Parameters Modem RABY Features Start Transmission Continous Polling Active Ce Inactive C Enabled fe Disabled Starting Host Request o Host Poll Delay E Secs Transmission Status Idle BEZ Faste Update Y OK Cancel H Apply Y x Figure 8 7 Modbus Host Parameters FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series Select the Start Transmission Active radio button to enable Modbus transmission 4 Enable Con
114. ID and Radio Control options enabled in ROC Information Meter Lists all available AGA calculations enabled in ROC Information System Displays ROC Information system folders Comm Port ROC Flags and Opcode Table History Displays all available history points If this is the first time that you have connected to the ROC or FloBoss continue to Section 3 Setting the Clock Rev 05 03 Configuring Communications 8 17 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 8 3 4 Troubleshooting Connection Errors Several events can occur when connection fails Ifthe Direct Connect communication link fails use the Connect Disconnect feature to establish a connection to your ROC Refer to Connect Disconnect in Section The ROC Directory option allows you to change your communications port time out settings and other variables used by the ROC or FloBoss when establishing a communications link to your computer Refer to Section 2 ROC Directory A communications failure can also occur if ROCLINK software stands idle for too long and exceeds the timeout value for a device In this case simply log back into ROCLINK software using Direct Connect or the ROC Directory feature Refer to Section 2 ROC Directory You must enter an Operator and Password for each user who can connect to a ROC or FloBoss in the ROC Security or FloBoss Security options located under the ROC menu NOTE The Operator ID and Operator Password in the Utilities gt
115. INK for Windows User Manual 10 Clear Internal Config Memory FloBoss 103 and 500 series If selected and applied all saved restart configuration data contained in programmable ROM clears upon clicking Apply only factory defaults are retained When the memory is cleared the checkbox is automatically deselected 11 Clear EEPROM FloBoss 407 and ROC300 series If selected and applied all saved restart configuration data contained in programmable ROM clears upon clicking Apply only factory defaults are retained When the memory is cleared the checkbox is automatically deselected 12 Write to Internal Config Memory FloBoss 103 and 500 series If selected and applied most configuration settings including the current states of the ROC Flags and calibration values for a FloBoss 500 only the FST is also saved load into programmable ROM as the new restart configuration When the loading 1s complete the Write Status indicator shows Complete and the checkbox is automatically deselected All user Flags are maintained at their current status during this process Writing to Configuration Memory causes all incoming communications to be temporarily suspended If an FST is running the FST is temporarily suspended but restarts where it was suspended 13 Write to EEPROM or Write to Config Memory FloBoss 407 and ROC300 series If selected and applied most configuration settings including the current states of the ROC Flags
116. Low Flow Cutoff value the calculated flow 1s set equal to zero No Flow is recorded in the Alarm Log if Alarming is Enabled For the Orifice AGA3 calculation method this value is in terms of inches of water column kPa if Metric units are selected 9 Select Flow Alarming Enabled to allow the flow alarms to display in the Active Flow Alarms line and sent to the Alarm Log The Alarms tab allows further configuration 10 When Flow Alarming is enabled Active Flow Alarms indicates current flow alarms as specified in the Flow Alarms dialog The alarms that can appear here are Low Flow High Flow and No Flow 11 During normal operation make sure that this Sensor Alarming is Enabled the default setting Sensor Alarming function applies only to Levels A through C The alarms generated display in the Active Sensor Alarms line and sent to the Alarm Log The Alarms tab allows further configuration 12 When Sensor Alarming is enabled Active Sensor Alarms is used to indicate current sensor alarms which can generate for Levels A through C The alarms that can appear here are Chan A PI 1 A5 Chan B PI 2 A6 Freq Synch Phase and Sequence For more information refer to Table 5 1 and Section Flow and Sensor Alarms on page 5 21 5 2 1 AGA Meter Inputs This displays the Inputs screen that lets you define the field inputs such as differential and static pressure to be used in the flow calculation Refer to Figure To set up the met
117. Low Low Limit change to Low Low Alarm parameter Low Limit change to Low Alarm parameter High Limit change to High Alarm parameter High High Limit change to High High Alarm parameter Rate of Change Limit change to Rate Alarm parameter Not Used Set clear alarm 1 set 0 clear KE SS SS SS Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 29 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 6 8 3 Modbus History Collection The FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series units allow the Modbus protocol to send the Hourly periodic and Daily History Refer to Section Modbus History Access Registers on page 6 27 Each record contains a time and date stamp and all of the history archives for which the Register Number is configured The Modbus Function Code 03 and the History Archive Register are used to collect the archived data Two Modbus registers indicate the current Hourly and Daily history index as selected in the Archive Type field These can be configured in the Hourly History Index Register and the Daily History Index Register These indexes identify the current history archive at which data was last logged To collect the Hourly and Daily history a standard Modbus Function Code 03 is used The Register Number field is used to address the individual History Archive Register The Daily Index Hourly Index and Event Alarm data fields are used to address a history index number The response message contains two floating point values for the time and date
118. Meter ID v Meter Tag Meter 1 Meter Description 11992 Orifice AGA FloBoss 500 Alarming Calc Type 1392 Orifice AGA y C Disabled Integral Multiplier Period imp 115 minutes Ce Enabled Pipe Diameter 8 071 inches Orifice Diameter 4 inches Low Flow CutOff fi inches H20 W Faste 2 Update ox x Cancel Y Apply Figure 5 2 1992 Orifice AGA FloBoss 103 and 500 Series 1992 Turbine Setup 24 x General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms Point Number 1 y Meter ID Meter 1 Meter Description Calc Type 1992 Turbine ISO Base Multiplier Period bmp fi minutes K Factor fi Pulses Ft3 Sensor Alarming i a Active Flow Alarms Disabled None Enabled Flow Alarming Disabled C Enabled Active Sensor Alarms 2 Update E OK x Cancel t Apply Figure 5 3 ISO 9951 Meter Setup FloBoss 500 Series 2 Select the meter run s Point Number and enter the Meter ID Meter Description and select a Calc Type 3 For a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 units enter the Calc Speed as the frequency of calculation in seconds Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 4 4 Enter the imp or bmp For a FloBoss 103 or 500 Series Orifice unit enter the Integral Multiplier Period imp to indicate the frequency of calculation in m
119. OCLINK for Windows User Manual 6 8 2 Modbus History Access Registers The History Archive Register is a single register that can contain one or more history points for retrieval of the Event Log Alarm Log and Historical Archives Historical data is contained in Point Type 55 for the FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 series The FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 series can store up to 35 days of hourly data for each of its history points Figure 6 16 displays the default values for all fields 1 Select Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration gt History Access Registers tab MODBUS Configuration General Scale Values History Access Registers Daily Index 7160 Hourly Index me Events 4larme ES Register Number Starting History Ending History Archive Type Conversion ont E Hourly Ge Dail Hourly E Daily Ge Hourly Daily Ge Hourly Daily Ge Hourly Daily Hourly Daily Ge Hourly Daily Ge Hourly Daily 703 ho fe KE KE KE KE EE KE KE EE Ge Hourly Daily Ee Update K Cancel Y Apply A AS A A Figure 6 16 History Access Registers Specify the Modbus Register Number used to acquire the Daily Index values Specify the Modbus Register Number used to acquire the Hourly Index values Specify the Modbus Register Number used to acquire the Events Alarms logs Refer to Section Modbus Events Alarms Functionality on page 6 28 5 Specify the Modbus Register Number used to
120. PU E 4 9 PGS EEN 4 10 Filter Internal 4 10 A A TO 4 10 E re A arena 4 9 OTT COUMMCE EE 4 11 OC EE en sas HE asics Ee 4 10 Point ee 4 9 A E ERE Meats oats nee beeen desta 1 13 A 4 9 e E EE 4 9 dE 4 9 TDL Parameters EEN 4 11 Lime DUO anida ee EA 4 9 errereen geeiert 8 5 A A 8 9 CONNEC Oene a 2 2 Differential Pressure 5 6 5 19 7 1 7 2 MVS AlI a eders 6 7 DIN TYDE triseta a a 4 9 Direct Connect EE 1 8 1 14 8 15 Directory Eege eg 2 1 BESET e EE 7 5 MVS RBA a dao 6 6 Egger 4 5 8 15 RE le e WEE 1 14 8 16 Time MOGEM WEE 8 10 Discrete Inputs Sl A E 4 9 Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Discrete Outputs A EE 4 12 Di ol cia B 10 N B 11 Display Addis Live Daties C 4 Chanoine EE C 6 COPY SDAA EE C 5 Display eener 1 13 C 3 Rtl 1 13 C 3 ee ee C 3 LED User List Setup WEE 3 14 OT C 1 EE 1 11 AD A NN C 5 Program Information cccccccccnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 1 14 SC C 2 DOSa B 19 B 23 B 31 B 32 B 33 Accumulated V all ana 4 14 PRON GING dci 4 14 ASS Md SETS SEES S GERE SEEREN BEES ESS OSTE SEEGER 6 21 CS ENEE 6 12 6 13 IN A EE 6 14 A 6 CONAN cl 4 12 Distritos 4 12 DOUE TP TO 4 13 A A SER ORESTES ESKE ak e gt 4 13 MOMENI A A a 4 12 OPS Pra eege 6 12 6 13 A 6 A e O SED ERR EDEL SR 1 13 A ebe 5 18 SCAS enee A II SEEREN A 2 E E 4 12 Status on Power Reser 4 14 DO Parameters schon iia is cds 4 15 A 3 TDO TOSSE td ii leia 4 13 TOS Foren rarycner cnr FEEDS veneers feat DUT SEES
121. RELSE BEDE SEERE 3 4 13 Ehe 6 21 DOUBT Pero etary eset tener ewer elser 4 13 Ren e A NEN 9 4 9 5 Save Configuration oooooooooooncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 1 13 9 4 Usec e EE EEN 6 37 TOG WS PES Mn Ee Ee 5 12 Eeer Ee 6 6 DP Alarms KE 6 7 A ons ae re EE ae RENS 5 8 Duplicating Confeuraton ie 1 18 DVS rene i ege ee 5 12 DWK Day Of WOK serisinde B 19 B 22 E BCID DISPLAY erre r e r a EEE ES C 1 Edit Menu ES Di B 12 Rev 05 03 EEPROM and Internal Configuration Memory Ee A EAA 9 1 EFM REDON EE 7 7 9 2 COMES TING Esto 7 6 EE Ee 9 2 EIA 232 Serial COMMUNICA IONS ocooccnnocnnoccnnccnnncnnaronnnicnnoss 8 5 EIA 422 Serial COMMUNICAIONS cooccnnoccnoccnuccnnncnnarinnnicnnoss 8 5 EIA 485 Multi point Serial Communications 2 8 5 Electronic Flow Measurement 9 2 PCV AION eebe 5 11 END ato B 9 B 16 B 19 B 24 B 36 BOL RE 3 9 Ending History Point for Modbus ooooooonnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnos 6 28 RETA AE 6 32 FET Oa teen 7 1 7 2 EEG HST EE 3 8 5 11 Eeer lee e EE 6 24 TEE ees B 5 EU as B 29 Erase D EE B 12 Error FS EE B 13 IE lee 1 15 B 5 EU ERE US aae a ese B 7 Valen O EE 5 27 Event and Alarm 9 2 Madhus EE 6 27 Event Log e E 7 10 EVT EE B 19 B 25 Examples BO C 3 EST Control ERE EE B 31 SNE ee EKO E B 8 FS KE B 36 Mathematical EST li B 25 EXEC Dt is B 3 Execution Error A II SES MESTER BEDER RESEN KERNE DE EE ease B 13 Execution Rate Calculation oooccnnccnnoccnic
122. RG1 LABEL Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in B 11 4 Time Related Commands FST Use time related commands with the FST Timers Description Arguments _ _ Set Timer for specified FST with value 1 FST Point Database Value FST Timer ARG1 ARG2 in 100 msec intervals 1 second for 2 Database or Constant Value RR out RR in FloBoss 103 SVD out SVD in Check Timer for specified FST with 1 FST Point Database Value If FST Timer ARG1 0 continue to value in 100 msec intervals 1 second next command for FloBoss 103 2 LABEL Otherwise Goto ARG2 RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Wait suspend FST until specified 1 Database or Constant Value Delay ARG1 seconds number of seconds ARG1 have RR out RR in elapsed The number of seconds can VD _ SVDij be from 0 1 to 999 999 Sy Oot ida DWK Day of Week sets RR out to the day None RR out Day of Week of the week 1 Sunday 7 Saturday SVD out SVD in NOTE The DWK function requires that the real time clock be set correctly MND Minutes Since Midnight sets RR None RR out Minutes out to the number of minutes past SVD out SVD in midnight B 22 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 11 5 Control Related Commands FST Use control related commands to control outputs Analog Output sets the Analog Output point EUs to AO Point AO Output ARG1 ARG2 the argument value If
123. ROC or FloBoss by using these menu functions in the following order 1 File gt Save Configuration to save the configuration to a specified file 2 File gt Open is optionally used to modify configuration off line 3 ROC gt Direct Connect LOI or Connect modem that physically connects the second unit and then communicates using this function 4 File gt Download opens the configuration file and loads it to the unit After you have loaded configuration data into the second ROC or FloBoss Step 4 above and changed it as needed you can save the configuration to its own disk file by using Step 1 1 18 Getting Started Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 8 4 Creating a New Configuration When connected on line to a ROC 300 series or FloBoss 407 unit new configurations are created by altering an existing configuration or the factory set defaults To create a new configuration file for a FloBoss 500 Series Connect to a FloBoss if working on line Select New from the File menu or press lt Ctrl N gt Select FB503 Configuration or FB504 Configuration Select Yes if you have an I O Card installed and No if not Enter the total Number of PIDs you wish to configure Click OK 10 Enter the name of the new configuration in the File Name field Se E GR 11 Click Save The new configuration file is saved to the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data unless you specify otherwise The file has
124. Refer to Figure 5 11 2S a oS 11 Enter a Meter Description name for the forward flow 12 Click the Advanced tab Refer to Figure 5 16 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Ca Sieg La Aard ii Pr Era Lkan centre Here Larra Se ee m De E Le A L M Fa f DK Filen Hrs Hess d U Ges Upstream Figure 5 13 Meter Setup Advanced Upstream Select the Upstream Pressure Tap radio button Click the Inputs tab In the Differential Pressure I O Definition field select MVS Interface DP Diff Reading and click Apply Select Configure gt MVS Sensor Select the desired MVS from the MVS Sensor drop down list box Select the Upstream Pressure Tap Location radio button and click OK Refer to Figure PAG iadi Poran Deda ee D He m te b s net web we Sen Pepa pepe pl e ger Perreo Tan Locke B bee a Er i E a Upstream RS amm y DE tect Aa AS Figure 5 14 Multi Variable Sensor Upstream with Reverse DP Select Meter gt Calibrate Select the desired Meter ID Calibrate the differential pressure Diff Pressure as a negative value on the low L side of the sensor and calibrate as a positive value on the high H side Refer to the appropriate hardware manual for detailed calibration instructions Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 17 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 2 4 Sampler The FloBoss
125. Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 11 Enter the Strapping Value as a factor for equating 1 inch of water column to the volumetric quantity of the tank 12 Enter the Specific Gravity of the liquid stored in the tank water 1 000 13 Enter the Level Deadband as the amount of change in level required before the Rate Alarm clears 14 Enter the Manual Entry as the amount of liquid removed manually from the tank The operator must enter this value for the daily volume Today s Volume to be accurately counted Total Units Hauled displays the sum of the values entered under Manual Entry Contract Hour Level displays the tank level recorded at Contract Hour This value is used as the starting point in determining the net gain or loss of volume for the day Today s Volume Units Discharged displays the volume in engineering units of liquid discharged through the turbine flow meter since Contract Hour Today s Volume displays the calculated tank volume net gain or loss since Contract Hour Yesterday s Volume displays the calculated tank volume net gain or loss for the previous 24 hour period 6 3 Opcode Table The Configurable Opcode utility is used by certain host computers to group data for more efficient communications The data for the Opcode is normally configured by the host through the communications channel This utility is used for checking and editing Opcode configuration Care must be taken to assure that
126. Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 39 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual RS Current minute summation R6 Current minute counter R7 Save last minute for comparison to determine minute rollover RS Contract minute contract minute contract hour 60 Minutes Hour For example if contract hour is 8 then contract minute 8 60 480 The FST mirrors the way in which the history accumulation is performed by the ROC or FloBoss operating system STEP LABEL El WFST LFST 41 AF 3 UC 55955 55 IFL FST FST 41 Al FST LFT 41 Pi WFST LFT 41 Pi 1 UC FST FST 41 RE FST FST 41 JAG aPSTLFST 41 A 0 UC FST LFST 41 A aPSTLFST 41 JAG 0 UC FST LFT 41 Pi FST FST 1 JAG 1440 UI aPSTLFST 41 A2 WFST FST 41 A2 0 UC WFST LFT 41 Pi FST FST 1 JAG WFST LFT 41 P FST LFST 41 A FST FST 41 A2 aPSTLFST 41 JAS 0 UC GEGIIEGI 41 A2 AGAIN LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 AGAIN LABEL ZERO LABEL AGAIN LABEL 1 STEPS 0 1 On power up the FST sets the last minute R7 to the current minute past midnight This 1s to avoid unwanted accumulation during the first pass through the FST immediately after power up The first pass determines that minute rollover has occurred calculates a minute average and adds the minute average to the current day accumulation R2 An extra delay WT may also provide enough time for the current rate R1 to stabilize 2 STEP 2 Wait WT 3 seconds This d
127. STEP 4 Same as for STEP 3 except that a time stamp WTM is written instead of the contents of the Results Register The format of the time stamp is month day hour minute Because R2 is a floating point parameter the contents of R2 are compared against the number of archived periods and set to zero or incremented by Se 4 STEP 5 WT delays 60 seconds before continuing 5 STEP 6 The END command completes the FST and imposes a delay of 100 milliseconds before transferring to STEP 0 B 19 2 Example 2 Stopping an FST This example demonstrates how the FST Run Flag is set to 0 in order to stop the FST from executing after it has completed a desired task STEP LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 A val OD UC SAV G FSTIFST 1 RUNFLG END 1 STEP 0 VAL loads the Results Register with the value 0 2 STEP 1 SAV stores the value in the Results Register to the FST Run Flag 3 STEP 2 The END command completes the FST In this case the FST will not restart because STEP 1 shuts off execution of the FST B 19 3 Example 3 Cycling an FST On a Periodic Basis In this example an FST is set to run on a 10 second cycle A Timer is used to determine how much 1f any of the 10 seconds remain after the FST executes The Timer indicates the amount of time required to wait before the cycle 1s repeated mei oe E auen NTC Col 8 eremm TMP 101 UO FST BODY aPSTLFST HI TMR 0 1 2511 F571 HI JAR 1 STEP 0 S
128. TRAP Tank strapping value in bbls in S G Specific gravity of fluid compared to H20 B 42 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual APPENDIX C CUSTOM DISPLAYS This section describes the custom Display option in ROCLINK software The Display option allows you to create customized displays load a display from a disk file and monitor flow and I O points Display options are located under the View menu ROC300 Series devices and FloBoss 407 units can have two displays stored in memory FloBoss 103 and 500 Series devices store displays to disk C 1 1 New Display Select View gt Display gt New to create a display Refer to Figure C 1 The new ROC display must be created while connected to the ROC or FloBoss and then saved either to a disk file or to display memory in the ROC or FloBoss The display can incorporate live data as well as other information you may wish to convey One example is a graphical representation of the application that a ROC or FloBoss 1s monitoring and controlling Another example is a display that monitors the ROC and adjusts commonly used parameters from a single screen n or indows Al_dsp ME ES i le BOC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help x P ae Vm e or OOM SO Pl e Analog Inputs Analog Inputs 4 Auto Scan POINT POINT TAG Dghsfs HT EU TAG Id 0 0000 5 LOW EU 0 0000 LOW EU 5 UNITS ites UNITS ites Stop Scan Edit Displa
129. UT CONFIGURATION ccccccsssssseceecceeseeccceeeeeseeceeesaeeseeceessaeeeeeeessuanseseeseaaenes 4 9 4 5 DO DISCRETE OUTPUT CONFIGURATION ccoocccnnnnonnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnns 4 1 e PPP USE INPUT CONFIGURATION oir etapas 4 16 A7 TIO INN 4 19 Rev 05 03 Table of Contents jii ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Section 5 Configuring the Meter Setup ssssscsscccccssssssssssscssscccccscsssssssssscees ek METER EE KEE E RTE EE ENT Mo CALIBRATION ANDA CALIBRADO urette EEEE ree A PLATE CHANGE eesssesesssssssessessvcssessscsvesscsvessessvcsusssvcsuessvcsucssessssssessecsuessvssuessesssessesanessssseessesseeaees Section 6 Extended FUNCTIONS ccccsscccsscssscccssssssccccssccsscccssccessccsscessscccssccsscccssccssocees 5 1 6 1 EIERE 6 1 6 2 PANES NI SURT EC 6 1 6 3 OPCODE LAB LE rado soda 0 3 64 MVS SENSOR cri nn 6 4 6 5 TIMED DURATION OUTPUT TDO CONPIOGURATION een een vennen seven never nens 0 7 PID 6 10 6 7 RA BIO POWER e CNN EE 0 17 6 8 NIOGDBUS CONFIGURATION eege 0 21 6 9 MODBUS REGISTERS ssessesssesssessesssessesssessessvcssessvcssessecsucssscsssssessecsusssecsuessesssessesssssessesseeseeaees 6 30 6 10 DOWNLOAD USER PROGRAMS rta 0 37 Section 7 Configuring and Viewing History ssccccccccccsssssssscsscccccccccssssssscscees C METERT FOR SEE T E de ORNER ER En E 7 3 HISTORY ALARM EVENT AND AUDIT LOG REPORTS ooocccccoccnnnonccnnnononononcnnnnnconono
130. Windows Data unless you specify otherwise Select the User Program file you desire to load and click Open 4 Select the User Program in the User Programs Installed in ROC field and click Turn On This automatically enables the program run Flags and performs a Warm Start Note that the Status field displays ON or OFF indicating the status of the User Program If you want to ensure that the program automatically restarts after a Cold Start also perform a Write to EEPROM or Write to Internal Config Memory in the ROC Flags screen To perform configuration for a User Program that has just been loaded use the screens that are typically located under the Configure menu in the User Data option 6 10 1 User Data Options that display under Configure gt User Data list user program configuration screens for a ROC of FloBoss that has one or more user programs loaded These User Data screens are used to configure the parameters needed for each user program After you install a user program the User Data drop down menu then lists the menu options associated with the program Refer to the user manual supplied with your user program for details concerning these configuration screens After you select a user program option from the User Data drop down menu the screen associated with that option displays You can then proceed to configure the parameters Refer to the user manual for the user program such as the Modbus Protocol User Program Form A4606 for det
131. a Event Data v Event Data EFM Report Data Selection EN Choose the sections you to want to view in the report You can also organize the sections by using the up and down arrow buttons kb lt gt Back Le Next di Finish se Cancel Figure 7 4 EFM Report Data Selection Screen 2 7 Click Next 8 Select the Available Subsections to include in the report Refer to Figure Use the arrows to scroll through your selections EFM Report Data Selection EN Choose the subsections you to want to view in the report You can also organize the subsections by using the up and down arrow buttons Selected sections Hourly Volume Data Daily Volume Data Alarm Data Event Data 7 Available Subsections Selected Subsections Characteristic Confiquratio System Parameters wi Genera Flow Parameters Gas Composition Input Point Assignment P Calculated Factors Low DP Input Point Defir Meter Input Point Definitii Static Input Point Definitii lt lt lt lt lt KK Temperature Input Point System Parameters General Flow Parame Gas Composition Input Point Assignmer Calculated Factors Low DP Input Point D Meter Input Point Def Static Input Point Def Temperature Input Pc v lt Back Le Next di Finish x Cancel Figure 7 5 EFM Report Data Selection Screen 3 9 Click Next 10 Select the Point Ty
132. abase or For FST History Point historical database value of the specified database Constant Value RR out History point ARGUMENT1 and the specified pointer 2 Database or Value ARG1 ARG2 ARGUMENT2 to the historical database value Constant Value Applies to historical database points defined for the FST only Specify historical database points as base RAM 1 30 For floating database value ARG2 i If ARG1 gt No of archived expansion RAM1 31 60 periods ARG1 then expansion RAM2 61 90 ARG2 0 If ARGUMENT2 is a floating database value For Otherwise ARG2 ARG2 1 example FST1 FST SEQ 1 R8 the command i increments ARGUMENT 2 to the next historical pee ore Ea database value and sets it to O when the number of out ARIA archived historical periods are exceeded SVD out SVD in Otherwise no effect occurs to ARGUMENT2 Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 23 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Name Description Arguments Results Write To Historical Database set the RR in to the 1 Database or For FST History Point value of the database point ARGUMENT1 and the Constant Value History Value ARG1 ARG2 pointer ARGUMENT2 Applies to historical 2 Database or RR in database points defined for the FST only Specify Constant Value For floating database value historical database points as ARG2 base RE 1 30 If ARG2 gt No of archived expansion RAM1 31 60 periods ARG1 then ARG2 0 expa
133. absolute pressure for the flow equation In the case of the FloBoss 503 or FloBoss 553 version 2 30 and higher and the FloBoss 103 version 1 10 and higher the firmware assumes the DVS is installed with the static pressure tap upstream The upstream downstream selection causes the firmware to convert the raw input to a downstream value for display and archiving and then converts the value back to upstream for the flow equation In all other units the upstream downstream selection indicates the input is already a downstream pressure and causes the value to be converted to upstream for the flow equation To configure ROCLINK for Windows to archive downstream pressure for FloBoss 500 Series 1 Connect ROCLINK for Windows to the FloBoss 500 Series unit 2 Select Meter gt Setup and click the Advanced tab Refer to Figure Ei EL PA RR BE Downstream Ma La JE Dags y sl Cama E we Figure 5 8 Meter Setup Advanced Downstream Select the Downstream Pressure Tap radio button and click OK Select Meter gt Calibrate and select the desired Meter ID For FloBoss 503 and 553 firmware version 2 30 or greater calibrate the differential pressure Diff Pressure in the same manner as you would for an upstream application Refer to the ROC FloBoss Accessories Instruction Manual Form A4637 for detailed calibration instructions Downstream pressure is calculated Stat Pressure minus Diff Pressure f
134. aceseenestecuamscen B 13 L DATS ET EE B 5 B 6 TACOS aah sarees ee aad gate A te ahs 5 11 Launching EST Edi dais 1 14 B 4 ROCTINK anios 1 7 ROCLINK during OtartUD ooooooooonncncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnos 1 6 LCD A A SEESR EGE ESER 3 11 Message eener B 25 SE 3 15 Uscr EE 3 14 User List Display Configuration 3 14 User Lise re EE 3 11 User List Setup iu ean 3 14 USO a esa 3 6 Leased line Modem Communications 8 5 Least Significant Byte Fret 6 24 RGSS TAM EE B 29 Less than ore gaar lO uses leia hasan ite B 29 Level Tram Ser EE B 41 Levels ee 5 6 5 21 Edel 5 6 5 21 dE 5 6 5 21 HE 5 21 edd 5 21 Lie Pres eege 7 2 E A 3 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Encar Eed ee 5 6 ee 3 15 Listing E ee B 12 Live ReadMore ia 5 24 LN Natural Logarithm B 19 B 20 B 26 LOAL Low Alarm PU nia ia B 41 Local Communications Port 2 2 Local Display Panel A RESEN SS O 3 11 3 13 3 15 A A 3 15 Local Porta e 8 8 Log A Ra B 25 Eege B 25 Methane AU sne enken ser ek 5 8 VModbus ENE EE 6 24 Ke EE 5 24 LOG POO ANIM BEE B 19 B 20 B 26 Loge ine A l 7 Losical Number ri C 2 IR A GE 1 7 Kol 1 8 E ee Se assed in OU eae 8 16 Loop PO AN 6 13 6 15 6 16 A 5 A 7 LOOPS S 6 10 A 5 See B 9 Low NEE 4 4 Battery EE 6 19 PD PMB UE kee eebe eer 5 6 DPE SOUP OI lituana denia enicio 5 6 Flow and Sensor Alarm 5 22 Flow te EE 5 5 Low Low Alam ennen ennen ener 4 4 Meter E EE 5 20 Modbu
135. adio during power up initialization of the receiver causing part of the On Time to be unavailable for receiving requests Refer to Table for a typical configuration of the Radio Control feature for a ROC FloBoss and a Host with a 25 duty cycle Table 6 1 Typical Power Control and Host Configuration ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 500 On Time 2 seconds Radio Power Control Enabled On Time Ehe Seconds mode if applicable Key on Delay 250 milliseconds Key off Delay 10 milliseconds Number of retries 13 Time between retries 350 milliseconds After configuring the Radio Control points click Apply Save the configuration to programmable memory using the Write to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM ROC Flag 6 7 1 Output Definition The radio power is controlled either by means of the DTR signal or by a Discrete Output On the FloBoss 407 the DTR signal is available only through the COM2 port Because COM1 and COM2 have separate Radio Control points radio power cycling for COM1 can be configured differently from that for COM2 including independent timer values and separate output controls using the Output Definitions options 6 20 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The DTR signal is always activated regardless if a DO point is defined or not An external relay for radio power is required when using the DTR signal without a DO point defined When using a DO the DO is wired directly to the ra
136. ailed information about the parameters Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 37 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 6 38 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SECTION 7 CONFIGURING AND VIEWING HISTORY This section describes how to configure a FloBoss or ROC for history archival History can be archived for specific meter runs and for individual points and parameters within the ROC or FloBoss The historical database is a configurable time stamped database that logs required values In natural gas applications a primary function of the database is to log hourly values of parameters such as pressure temperature volumetric flow rates and accumulated flows When requested the ROC can send the contents of the database to the host Alternately you can save the database to disk and the database information can be downloaded to another computer By default minute hourly and daily values are stored for each point configured in the database Sixty minute values 840 hourly values and 35 daily values are stored for each point The minute hourly and daily databases are circular the oldest value is written over at each logging interval start of an hour start of day SY so NOTE The time stamp used for standard logging of historical values reflects the time at the end of the period not at the beginning For example Data collected from 8 00 to 9 00 is time stamped 9 00 er NOTE The FloBoss 103 units also m
137. ain current binary value in one or more holding registers Read Input Registers Obtain current binary value in one or more input registers Preset Single Holding Register Place a specific binary value into a holding register Force Multiple Logic Coils Force a series of consecutive logic output coils to defined ON or OFF states Preset Multiple Holding Registers Place specific binary values into a series of consecutive holding registers 6 22 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 05 Force Single Logic Coil Force logic coil to a state of ON or OFF Acknowledge Alarm or Event request ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 Select Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration Refer to Figure MODBUS Configuration General Scale Values History Access Registers Status mr Modbus Type Log Modbus Events Byte Order Ascii C Disabled Ge Least Significant Byte First Ge ATU Ge Enabled i Most Significant Byte First Enable 2 Update Iw o A Cancel t Apply Figure 6 14 Modbus Configuration 2 Select the Modbus Type The Modbus protocol supports two modes of transmission ASCII and RTU All devices in the same communications network must be configured with the same mode of transmission The data link between the host device and the FloBoss requires one of the following communications cards EIA 232 RS 232 Serial Communications Card EIA 485 RS 485 Serial Communications Card Dial up Modem Communications Card The d
138. aintain a 10 minute historical database Refer to the FloBoss 103 Flow Manager Instruction Manual Form A6114 The historical database can be configured to log only the values that need to be logged The values are logged in the standard minute hourly daily time base of the ROC or FloBoss unless FST control is used By using the FST Editor utility the period in which the data is logged can be placed under program control Configuration of the historical database occurs in 2 distinct ways The required points for meter specific AGA flow calculations are discussed in Section 7 1 Meter History The points for all other historical data gas quality inputs outputs etc are discussed in Section 7 2 General History The first eight points in the historical database are intended for use as Meter History do not attempt to use them as General History 7 1 Meter History History points associated with an AGA calculation should be archived for each individual meter run History points are sampled every second unless they are configured for FST Time or FST Data For an AGA3 meter run the first eight history points are configured as follows 1 Accumulate Flowing Minutes Average Differential Pressure Average Static Pressure Average Temperature LC Prime hwPf Pressure Extension Accumulate Flow Oh EE ee DO Accumulate Energy Rev 05 03 Configuring and Viewing History 7 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual For an AGA7 meter run
139. alculate flow in a meter run depending on the type of ROC or FloBoss being configured Calculation types include AGAJ3 for 1985 Orifice metering For new installations use 1992 AGAS3 for 1992 Orifice metering AGA7 for 1985 Turbine Positive Displacement PD or other linear meters For new installations use 1992 AGAT for 1992 Turbine Positive Displacement PD or other linear meters ISO for 1992 Turbine Positive Displacement PD or other linear meters The Calc Type indicates whether Orifice or Turbine flow calculation is being used For the 1985 calculations either the NX19 or AGAS method of determining the compressibility factor may be used For the 1992 calculations only the AGAS compressibility method is used The NX19 method uses an empirical method of evaluating compressibility factors for normal natural gas mixtures The AGAS method calculates the compressibility factor based on the physical chemistry of the gasses at specified temperatures and pressures The AGA8 method provides extended capabilities for accurate computation of compressibility factors beyond the temperature pressure and composition ranges of NX19 The AGA 7 calculation method differs from the AGA 3 calculation in that the uncorrected flow rate is determined by converting pulses from the meter to engineering units CFH The uncorrected flow is then corrected for flowing pressure and temperature compressibility and spec
140. alculated input instead If the Meter Output is used the Tank Level Input is required to be a Pulse Input In a typical application the differential pressure transmitter is installed near the bottom of the tank where it measures the pressure differential between the weight of the liquid in the tank and atmospheric pressure As the liquid level varies so do the pressure differential and the corresponding signal output from the transmitter Atmospheric pressure variation affects both sides of the transmitter equally and therefore produces no net effect Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The turbine flowmeter is normally connected to the output of the tank As liquid is discharged the flowmeter produces a pulse output proportional to the flow rate The firmware uses both pressure and output flow readings to calculate tank volume changes The method of calculating volume changes takes into account the change in tank level as measured by the differential pressure transmitter the total volume pumped as measured by the turbine meter and the total volume manually removed as entered by the operator These values are all measured over a 24 hour period based upon Contract Hour The Analog and Pulse Inputs are scanned at a configurable rate If the drop during a single scan period exceeds a configurable number an alarm is generated Volume data can be archived as part of the ROC database 1 10 6 2 Select Con
141. amount of time that the Discrete Input must remain in the On high state before it is recognized as such The Filter time is entered as a number from 0 to 255 and the Filter Interval selection determines the time basis The Discrete Input returns to the Off state immediately upon detection of the On to Off transition there is no filtering for this transition At a 0 25 Seconds Filter Interval Filter is defined as the number of 250 millisecond 50 millisecond for built in DIs on a ROC306 312 with ROCPAC 100 millisecond for FloBoss 103 and 500 Series units intervals before the input is recognized At a 15 0 Seconds Filter Interval the Filter is defined as the number of 15 second 3 second for built in DIs on a ROC306 312 with ROCPAC 5 second for FloBoss 500 Series units intervals before the input is recognized Select Normal for the Input going high contact closure to produce an On Status Select Inverted to cause the field Input to be inverted in the Status parameter field If the DI has the Inverted option set the field input is inverted in the Status field On becomes Off and vice versa An open circuit in the field would then be indicated as On in the Status parameter and closed contacts would be indicated as Off in the Status Enter the Accumulated Value as the number of times the Discrete Input goes from Off to On The accumulator is a 32 bit number with a maximum count of 4 294 967 295 The accumulator can be preset by entering t
142. and I O type 4 AO parameter 9 Raw D A Output 5 Enter the Float Scale in the Low Value Float Scale and High Value Float Scale fields used when the Host is not able to process floating point numbers Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 25 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual In Host systems that do not accept floating point numbers eight sets of floating point ranges for values can be specified This allows floating point values such as PID Setpoints to be read and set by the Host as integer values The FloBoss floating point values are converted to integers by configuring a register or range of registers with the Conversion field set in the Modbus Registers Definition configuration The equations used to convert floating point values to integer values to enable the reading of floating point values are Float Range High Value Float Scale Low Value Float Scale Integer Range High Value Integer Scale Low Value Integer Scale Adjusted Reading Float Reading Low Value Float Scale Integer Integer Range x Adjusted Reading Low Value Integer Scale Float Range The equations used to convert integers to floating point values are Float Range High Value Float Scale Low Value Float Scale Integer Range High Value Integer Scale Low Value Integer Scale Adjusted Integer Integer Sent Low Value Integer Scale Float Value Adjusted Integer x Float Range Low Value Float Scale Integer Range 6 26 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 R
143. and PID Loops that provide information about the ROC or FloBoss and its operating environment 1 Select View gt I O Monitor Monitoring Options 1 x Disabled option indicate that the point is not available in the ROC What do you want to Monitor I Flow Calculation Select All T Discrete Inputs Deselect All Discrete Qutputs Select ug PID Loop Gase I Analog Outputs X Cancel Figure 4 14 Monitoring Options 2 Select one of the What do you want to Monitor checkboxes Select All Selects all checkboxes Deselect All Deselects all checkboxes Select I O Selects only the inputs or outputs 3 Click OK The I O Monitor screen shows the requested point information such as field I O values or calculated flow values These on screen values are automatically updated by ROCLINK software Rev 05 03 Configuring Basic I O 4 19 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 20 Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SECTION 5 CONFIGURING THE METER SETUP This section describes how to configure a FloBoss or ROC to perform the basic functions used in a meter run The Meter menu contains the functions directly associated with measuring and logging flow including setup of American Gas Association AGA calculation configuration parameters calibrating the meter monitoring calculated values and building reports 5 1 Meter Setup ROC or FloBoss The Met
144. and RDB commands to work A History Point number is required as ARGUMENTI for these commands Although History Points 9 and 10 are used in this example any of the available history database points could be used The Point Type Point Number and Parameter definitions for the History Point are used solely to provide descriptive text when selecting History Points for viewing through ROCLINK software The following example increments a counter and writes its value to History Point 9 every 60 seconds History Point 10 is used to store the time as a time stamp that the counter value was written to History Point 9 STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENT ARGUMENT2 Sc aPSTLFST HI Pi C 1 UC aPSTLFST HI Pi 3 El FST FST HI bi 10 APSTLFST HI A2 Register R5 is used as the counter Registers R1 R2 and R5 are initialized to 0 when the FST is loaded into the ROC or FloBoss This can be confirmed before setting the Run Flag to start the FST R1 is the pointer for History Point 9 and R2 is the pointer for History Point 10 1 STEP 0 to 2 VAL increments the counter R5 by 1 and the new value is stored to the Results Register 2 STEP 3 WDB writes the contents of the Results Register to History Point 9 location R1 Because R1 is a floating point parameter the contents of R1 are compared against the number of archived periods and set to zero or incremented by 1 Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 37 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 3
145. aracter The Integer to Long conversion changes a transmitted integer value to a long data type for the FloBoss The Float to Integer conversion changes a FloBoss floating point data type to an integer for transmission to the Host Float to Integer No Scaling Integer to Float No Scaling 3 4 6 16 The Integer to Float conversion changes a transmitted integer value to a floating point data type for the FloBoss Float to Byte No Scaling 3 4 The Float to Byte conversion changes a FloBoss floating point data type to a byte for transmission to the Host Byte to Float No Scaling 3 4 6 16 The Byte to Float conversion changes a transmitted byte value to floating point data type for the FloBoss Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 33 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Convert da Slave Float to Long No Scaling 3 4 floating point data type to a Long Integer for transmission to the Host Long to Float No Scaling 3 4 6 16 The Long to Float conversion changes a transmitted Long Integer value to a floating point data type for the FloBoss Float to Byte 6 16 The Float to Byte Unsigned Character conversion 6 16 16 Definition The Float to Long conversion changes a FloBoss changes a transmitted floating point value to an unsigned character data type for the FloBoss Float to Unsigned Integer Float to Unsigned Long 6 The Float to Unsigned Integer conversion changes a transmitted floating point value to an unsigned 57 to 64 intege
146. arameter check to see which Communications Ports are assigned in the PC 8 Select the Connection Type if necessary Modem Enter the Phone No of the ROC to be dialed by ROCLINK Use the Select Modem drop down list box to choose your modem Only the modems set up from the Modems dialog box in the Window s Control Panel on your PC display Ensure that the selected modem is properly setup TCP IP Enter the IP Address of the ROC to be accessed by ROCLINK Enter the Port Number of the ROC to be accessed by ROCLINK software 9 Click the Advanced tab Refer to Figure Rev 05 03 Configuring Communications 8 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 4 ROC Communication Parameter Setup General Advanced Advanced Features Number of Retries E Time Out 0 25 SBCs Tx Delay g secs Key Off Delay fo SECS Cancel H Figure 8 2 ROC Communication Parameter Setup Advanced Set the Number of Retries from 0 to 25 parameter default is 5 to control the number of times after the initial try that ROCLINK software attempts to establish communications with the specified ROC or FloBoss before reporting a timeout error Adjust the amount of time between retries using the Time Out parameter Set the Tx Delay default is 0 05 seconds to enable the RTS line for the amount of delay specified before transmitting data Tx Delay is typically used to allow a radio to fully enable the tran
147. around STEP 4 which is executed only for TRUE comparisons Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 29 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 STEP 4 If the comparison in STEP 1 is TRUE VAL loads the Results Register with the value 1 TRUE to be saved in STEP 5 6 STEP 5 SAV stores the value in the Results Register to Register R5 7 STEP 6 The FST is complete END Delay 100 milliseconds and begin execution at STEP 0 B 15 Time Related Commands FST Use time related commands to implement simple time related operations such as setting Timers checking Timers determining if Timers have elapsed wait time before continuing and imposing a delay upon each command executed Timers are used to stop the execution of the FST for a specified period of time following an action If the desired reaction does not occur an alarm or another action may be required to stop the process Up to four Timers are available for use in an FST and each Timer has a resolution of 100 milliseconds Each FST Timer decrements by count every 100 milliseconds if the Timer contents are greater than 0 Set Timer The ST command sets any one of the four available Timers for any of the available FSTs ARGUMENT specifies the number of the Timer to set and ARGUMENT specifies the number of 100 millisecond intervals to which the Timer is set The Timers decrement every 100 milliseconds Check Timer When executing a loop repeatedly in an FST it is recommended a del
148. ason you need to manually create the Desktop Shortcut Mu Computer 1 Double click the My Computer icon 2 Navigate to the C Program Files ROCLINK software For Windows Bin folder or the folder where you installed ROCLINK for Windows software 3 Select the ROCLINK exe file i 4 Select Create Shortcut from the File menu GT 5 Click and drag the file Shortcut to ROCLINK exe to your Desktop Shorteut bo 6 Double click the Shortcut to ROCLINK exe icon on your desktop to launch Hoclink exe ROCLINK software 1 4 4 Launching ROCLINK for Windows Software during Startup This procedure launches ROCLINK software each time you start this computer 1 Double click the My Computer icon 2 Navigate to the C Program Files ROCLINK For Windows VBin folder or the Bin folder inside the folder where you installed ROCLINK software Select the ROCLINK exe file Select Create Shortcut from the File menu Double click the My Computer icon if the directory is not already displayed Navigate to the C Windows Start Menu Programs Startup folder Click and drag the file Shortcut to ROCLINK exe to the C Windows Start Menu Programs Startup folder Sea a 2S 1 4 5 Upgrade Procedure This section details upgrading ROCLINK software from a previous version Insert the ROCLINK for Windows software upgrade CD Install ROCLINK software using the procedure in Section 1 4 1 Installing ROCLINK for Windows Software using AutoRun on Page 1 4 When the
149. ata communications signal V Z V Volts Rev 05 03 Glossary of Terms G 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual G 6 Glossary of Terms Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual INDEX A TEDE NE BENE REE a 5 25 Abbreviations DO Ar EB REED BEARS SE FEDE S 4 15 100 Pulse Width Subtraction EEN B 19 B 20 A 4 11 l NOCE QUANTO tua B 19 B 22 1985 Difference Live Act Sen 5 25 ES e sccsccscsessssssssssssssssnsseesesesenee 5 2 Multiply SEES SEES SEERNES B 19 B 20 AGAT E MOE 5 2 A iuonisieaeelaontes B 19 B 20 1992 A BRS DET 7 8 9 2 AGA3 O ee 5 2 153 E 3 16 AGAT Turbine mn 5 2 A SISSE REED anu EET IO Bates FARS SKORE Manne EEK RESSET LADES 9 5 ISO Turbine arm 5 2 BE FE A A CT 9 4 A A FASE ENE REDE Br 7 8 9 2 A RE E C 2 O A HE A ES Es 9 4 AHAS UNC HER EEN 3 7 Eege AA 9 5 ABS A eegen 9 5 Absolute Value B 19 B 20 B 26 Divide or INVOKE oooooonnncccccccccccccccccnnnnnno B 19 B 20 Absolute a aia 5 12 AS A A GE REESE RETTERE En FINNEN B 7 Access Leve A a 3 12 3 13 8 9 CAG a E Ea B 7 A a 8 16 A EEN B 7 ACCUMULA E ia dla 7 4 7 6 QO OM EE B 7 PS ete ca A DEE FSR TEN RENEE SE 7 1 7 2 OPE E B 7 A eege ebe 7 1 7 2 EE B 7 Flow ne Minute adi s 7 1 7 2 TAS EE B 7 Te B EE 7 4 7 6 CIO E B 7 Uncorrected FIO Wisin 7 2 DEE B 7 Action on Ear 6 6 2 A E EEE EE E EE E E RE TEET T E EN B 7 Active A E EE Ee EET EEE EET T E A B 7 NEE 4 4 BER le EEN B 7 Ke EEN 5 5 SE Paea B 7 KEREN
150. ata link can operate in the RTU Remote Terminal Unit mode or the ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange mode ASCII mode allows additional time intervals of up to one second to occur between characters without causing an error This allows the messages to be read with the use of a dumb terminal Each character is divided into two 4 bit parts that are represented by their hexadecimal equivalent The ASCII mode uses twice as many characters as the RTU mode Each character sent 1s composed of a Start bit 8 or 7 Data bits and one or two Stop bits with Even Odd or No parity ASCII mode uses Longitudinal Redundancy Checking LRC error checking RTU mode allows for greater character density and better data throughput than ASCII for the same baud rate Each message is transmitted in a continuous stream Data is sent in 8 bit binary characters In the ASCII mode each RTU character is divided into two 4 bit parts that are represented by their hexadecimal equivalent RTU mode uses Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC error checking By default RTU is enabled Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 23 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual In either mode ASCII or RTU a Modbus message is placed by the transmitting device into a frame that has a known beginning and ending point Refer to Table and Table Table 6 3 ASCII Message Frame Begin of Frame LRC Error Check 2 Characters 2 Characters N Characters 2 Characters CRLF Table 6 4 RTU Message
151. ated pulses today times the Conversion factor If the PI Value in EUs exceeds the rollover EU value it is cleared The PI Value in EUs is not cleared at Contract Hour Today s Total specifies the total EUs accumulated today At Contract Hour this value is transferred to Yesterday s Total and Today s Total is cleared 3 Enter the Rollover Value EUs when Running Total Entered Rollover is selected in the EU Options field enter a number in EUs not pulses to specify when the rollover should occur 4 Enter the Rate Period if Rate was selected under EU Options Three time bases or periods can be selected to perform the rate calculation These periods are minutes hours or days e EU Min Calculation based on EU minute totals e EU Hour Calculation based on EU hourly totals EU Day Calculation based on EU day totals 4 18 Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 Select the Conversion if Rate was selected under EU Options this parameter specifies how the number entered in the Conversion field on the main PI screen is used EUs Pulse The specified number of engineering units typically fractional parts such as 0 01 are registered for each pulse Pulses EU This is the inverse of EUs Pulse Here the specified number of pulses such as 100 is counted to register as one engineering unit 4 7 VO Monitor I O Monitor displays all installed and active I O points flow calculations
152. ay CT be included so the loop executes only once every 100 msec This prevents the loop from executing several times within the allotted task period eliminating unnecessary calculations that could deprive time from other tasks Wait The Wait WT command imposes a delay entered in seconds and tenths of seconds before executing the next command For example Entering a value of 0 1 implies a 100 millisecond delay and a value of 1 0 implies a one second delay The following example demonstrates the use of Timers This example opens a valve allowing a fluid to flow After a period of time has elapsed the valve is closed when the flow falls below a pre determined level so NOTE Tag names have been removed from the I O B 30 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual STEP LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENTZ Aldaz l 100 UC FST S 600 011 5 malas di FLING LABEL FST AGAIN LABEL 101 47 0 UC 3600 START 1 STEP 0 AO opens the control valve to 100 percent flow 2 STEP 1 Set Timer 1 ST for a period of 1 minute 600 x 100 millisecond The flow rate should be at least 25 percent of maximum after 1 minute 3 STEP 2 Wait WT 5 seconds This delay helps control the rate of execution of the FST freeing time for the execution of other tasks Not using a delay can cause unnecessary repetitive executions 4 STEP 3 VAL reads the instantaneous substance flow rate as measured b
153. be selected 8 Click Apply Configuring and Viewing History Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 7 2 General History The Configure gt History option allows data values and calculated variables to be stored in the historical database Hourly and daily values are stored for up to 33 days The historical database can be configured to log only the values that need to be logged Y so NOTE History points set up in the Meter gt History screen overrides history points set up in the Configure gt History screen Make sure when configuring history points that the point 1s not already defined in Meter History 1 Select Configure gt History Select History Point Value To Archive History Point 1 Com 1VRXCTR T History Point H2 History Point 3 History Point 4 m Select Archive Type EE C Dialed History Point 7 C Average History Point 8 Ce Accumulate an S ER C Current Value History Point 11 Plea History Point 12 FST Time Min History Point 13 C FST Time Sec History Point 14 FST Data History Point 15 Select Accumulation Time Basis C Per Second C Per Minute C Per Hour C Per Day x Cancel Apply Figure 7 2 History Setup FloBoss 500 Series 2 Select the history point you desire to configure in Select History Point The parameter currently configured if any for this history point appears in the Value to Archive field Note that in the FloBoss 103 and
154. ble 7 3 History and Log Data Archival Types Data Logged Last 240 alarms Last 240 events Audit Last 240 occurrences of parameters changes affection the audit trail for the AGA flow measurement calculation Minute Last 60 minutes in one minute increments from the current minute for 15 d tt points 10 Minute 60 days of 10 minute data for 4 points FloBoss 103 only Hourly Periodic 35 days of hourly data for 15 points with 840 hourly log entries 35 days of daily data for 15 points with 840 daily log entries Minimum Maximum historical data for today and yesterday ROCLINK for Windows can display 240 historical records ROCLINK software requests the first 60 values read from the ROC or FloBoss lm VU og db ay To view the remaining historical values Display first record Display previous page of records Load previous 60 records Display previous records one file at a time Load previous 60 records when you reach 60 Display next records one file at a time Load next 60 records when you reach 60 Display next page of records Load next 60 records Display last record Load all records re su sc Lo me mu 7 3 1 From ROC A report is generated based on your Search Criteria from the currently connected ROC or FloBoss 1 Select View gt History Alarm Event or Audit Log gt From ROC 2 If you select Alarm Event or Audit Log the ROC or FloBoss unit on line will produce a report and the log scree
155. ble ROM 1s used This save is performed using Write to EEPROM or Write to Config Memory in the ROC Flags screen 5 Select Enabled to perform a CRC Check Cyclical Redundancy Check on serial communications when using a FloBoss 500 Series 6 Set RTS High for 30 secs for the operator interface port LOI Port or the COM port to activate the RTS Request to Send signal for that port when using a FloBoss 500 Series or FloBoss 103 7 Select FST Display Clear to clear all FSTs and ROC Display 1 and 2 from RAM when using a ROC300 Series 8 Select I O Scanning Enabled to allow normal scanning mode when using a FloBoss 500 Series When Disabled all I O scanning is stopped and the last values are used until the scanning 1s resumed 9 Select a Pass Through Communications option to send Pass Through messages when using a FloBoss 103 By using any of the FloBoss 103 communications ports Pass Through allows data to be received by one unit and then passed through to other devices connected to any other communications port For example the host communicates via a radio on the LOI port Other FloBoss 103 units can be connected to the EIA 485 RS 485 port of the first unit and all the FloBoss 103 units can use the same radio to communicate to the host NOTE COM2 may only use a Dial up modem if it is receiving Pass Through messages COM2 cannot transmit to other field devices via Dial up modem Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 5 ROCL
156. cations with the ROC or FloBoss begins by using the communication parameters configured in ROC COMMI ROC Root Vi Te ROC COMM Modem ROC Es New Group Te New ROCI 2 New DOC d New Group2 d New Groups Figure 2 2 ROC Root 2 2 ROC Directory Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The ROC and FloBoss units can be categorized to form Groups A ROC FloBoss Group is typically several units in the same geographical area or a number of units with something else in common ROC and FloBoss units can be configured for on line communications using either the Local Operator Interface LOI port or a communication port such as when using a modem Each Group contains a list of all the ROC and FloBoss devices contained within that ROC Group Each ROC or FloBoss has a Station Name Tag and unique ROC Address with which to differentiate each device The physical ROC Station Name is setup in ROC Information It is advised that you use the Station Name as the Tag Each ROC and FloBoss is individually configured for communications The computers running ROCLINK software can also be categorized to form ROCLINK Groups If more than one computer running ROCLINK software will be communicating with a group of ROC devices either by radio or by other multi drop communications the ROCLINK Address of each ROC Directory setup must be unique to avoid multiple responses The ROCLINK Address must also be different from any other host system tha
157. ch as resetting and RBX Alarming for the Analog Output 1 Select Configure gt I O gt AO Points gt Advanced tab Analog Outputs General Advanced Raw D A Output 00 Value on Power Reset Adjusted D4 0 ano Low EU Retain Last Value Adjusted D A 100 4000 SE RBs Alarming C Disabled i On Alarm Set Dn Alarm Set and Clear Copy le Paste Update Iw ol Cancel Apply Figure 4 4 Analog Outputs Advanced 2 Enter the Raw D A Output current reading in counts directly from the Digital to Analog converter The D A value sent to the AO is the Raw D A Output 3 Enter the Adjusted D A 0 count used by the digital to analog converter for zero percent output This value is also used to scale the output to engineering units 4 Enter the Adjusted D A 100 count decoded by the digital to analog converter for 100 percent output This value 1s also used to scale the output to engineering units 5 Enter the Value on Power Reset When Low EU is selected the Value parameter is cleared upon a reset of the ROC such as a power restart or a Warm Start and the Low Reading EU is used as the new Value If Retain Last Value is selected the last output value is used after a reset If the AO Scanning is set to Disabled no changes occur unless manually entered 6 Select an RBX Alarming option to generate a Spontaneous Report By Exception message 4 8 Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manua
158. cnnocnnocons B 39 EXP EXPON EEN B 19 B 20 B 26 FE XV ATIC A A ET E I FEER SR T LSE 1 12 ERT 7 4 Extended Functions viii 6 1 EXTENSIONS ias 7 8 7 10 9 2 9 5 C 2 A he Rn en ENGER SNS SONNE KANARIE 8 10 EXtra Ke Olinda 8 13 Extra Ke OM Dela 8 13 I 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual F ek WE 1 15 B 5 B 16 Eege ee B 5 Le Ba B 16 ee B 5 Factory Default Settings oooooonnnncnccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnos 3 4 ole Et 6 7 ee 6 6 FB103 FB500 Firmware eee 3 11 Figure 1 1 Functions of ROCLINK for Windows SOWA a a A A 1 3 Figure 1 2 Configuration Menu Tree for the On line ROCLINK for Windows Software 1 10 Figure 1 3 Sample ROCLINK for Windows Software DIS E 1 11 Figure 1 4 Typical Configuration Tree Menu 1 16 Figure 1 5 TLP Box Point Type Definition 1 17 Figure 2 1 ROC Directory Communications Directory Tree Example eege eege ees 2 1 tee AEN eet eegene 2 2 Figure 2 3 New ROC in Group 2 4 Fire SL Cloe Enesa 3 1 Figure 3 10 Points ROC300 Series oocccccccnccnnnnno 3 9 Figure 3 11 ROCLINK Securlty cccccccccccncnnnnnnnnnno 3 12 Figure 3 12 ROC300 LCD Security 0 3 13 Figure 3 13 FloBoss 407 Operator Security 3 13 Figure 3 14 LCD User List 3 14 Figure 3 2 Cold Start Optons 3 3 Figure 3 3 ROC Flags FloBoss 500 Series 3 4 Figure 3 4 ROC Flags ROC300 Series with ees 3 4 Figure 3 5 ROC Flags FloBoss 103 3 5 Figure 3 6 ROC Flags
159. connector EIA 422 RS 422 Serial Communications Protocol using four signal lines EIA 485 RS 485 Serial Communications Protocol requiring only two signal lines Can allow up to 32 devices to be connected together in a daisy chained fashion EME Electro motive force EMI Electro magnetic interference ESD Electrostatic Discharge EU Engineering Units Units of measure such as MCF DAY F Firmware Internal software that is factory loaded into a form of ROM In the ROC809 the firmware supplies the software used for gathering input data converting raw input data values storing values and providing control signals FlashPAC ROM and RAM module that contains the operating system applications firmware and communications protocol in a ROC300 Series unit Flash ROM A type of read only memory that can be electrically re programmed It is a form of permanent memory requires no backup power Also called Flash memory FloBoss A specialized Remote Operations Controller ROC a microprocessor based unit that provides remote monitoring and control FPV Compressibility Factor FST Function Sequence Table a type of program that can be written by the user in a high level language Ft Foot or feet G GFA Ground Fault Analysis G 2 Glossary of Terms Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual GND Electrical ground such as used by the ROC power supply GP Gauge Pressure H H
160. ctions previously discussed CKHIAL PUMPON and PMPOFF are used in this example The control scheme uses the level transmitter LT1 to measure the instantaneous fluid level in the tank LT1 is wired to Analog Input B9 in the ROC A high alarm HIAL and a low alarm LOAL are configured LT1 is spanned to read from 0 MINEU 0 inches to 180 MAXEU 180 inches of H20 HIAL is set equal to 150 inches H20 and LOAL is set equal to 10 inches of H20 A Discrete Output AS is connected to an interposing relay R1 which starts or stops Pump and is also interlocked to fill control valve FCV1 Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 41 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual TANK 1 PUMP 1 STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENTI ARGUMENTZ Pg CKHIAL SOBI TANK LEVELEU IDBS TANK LEVEL HIAL PUMPON LABEL CKHIAL LABEL 210870 PUMPI STATUS 1 UC IBS TANK LEVELEU OBS TANK LEVEL LOAL PMPOFF LABEL CKLOAL LABEL 0870 PUMPISTATUS i UC CKHIAL LABEL When Pump is started FCV1 diverts the inlet flow to Tank2 When Pump is stopped FCV1 diverts the inlet flow back to Tank1 Thus a pre metered amount of fluid is delivered downstream of Pumpl on a cyclical basis HIAL is used to start Pumpl and LOAL is used to stop Pump The amount delivered during each pump down cycle is easily adjusted by changing HIAL and or LOAL according to the expression Volume bbls HIAL LOAL STRAP S G where HIAL LOAL Change in fluid level due to pump down S
161. ctly configured If a modem link is being used ensure that all parameters on the Comm Ports Modem tab are correctly configured Pay special attention to the dial out parameters for the Connect Command and the Connect Time Click the RBX Features tab Refer to Figure 8 8 Comm Port General Modbus host Parameters Modem FRA Features Ce Fixed Num Ce Fixed Num Ce Fixed Num Ce Enabled Retry Count 1 Retry Count 2 Retry Count 3 Extra Kev on Delays Continous Continous Continous C Disabled 3 o Second Store and Forward Path Address HI Group 1 0 Address 2 Group He o Address 43 Group 3 o Host Address ii Host Group o REX Sharm D REX Status Inactive Index Copy Paste 2 Update Iw ol Xx Cancel t Apply Figure 8 8 RBX Features Set the Retry Counts to the number of retry times a message is repeated if a valid response is not obtained on the first attempt Note that the three Retry Count parameters each have an associated Delay parameter This allows you to set up different length delays for successive retries Selecting Fixed Num allows you to enter a value for how many times a message 1s retried after the first unsuccessful attempt Note that a 0 entry causes no retries Selecting Continuous 255 causes continuous retries that can only be stopped when the host clears the RBX alarm Configuring Communications Rev 05 03 10 11 12 13 14 15 1
162. d Start Options Cad Sue TO PST Boole Cha Jh Cold Start Disabled Dip Pet Lem Frossen CH Lire Frege LL Leen Pee cers d lee teg O E irga A r P Set ATS High 30 Secs 140 Scanning _ em Baum l dees Dior duchies Tiplon 2 arba pir El LOI Port ie Enabled FT Ars Dpto 3 E Actes ipin 3 gra pin 3 E rata brave D helle Alea Faa Clear Internal Config Memory Write Mem Status F inaen hiin Write to Internal Config Mernory U Acs ir d aiis pin 3 Update Iw ok Cancel Appl Figure 3 3 ROC Flags FloBoss 500 Series 3 4 Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 Figure 3 4 ROC Flags ROC300 Series with FlashPAC ROCLINK for Windows User Manual ROC Flags ROC Flags Start Options Cold Start Options CRC Check 1 fam Start O TRIAS e Enabled Cold Start Options i T Cold Start Disabled Fass Through Communications SetATS High 20 Secs 20 Scanning No Pass Through GG LOI Port Enabled Ze LOeCOM1 COM2 gt LOl LOeCOM2 COMI COM2 7 COM2 C Disabled COMi LOL C COM2 gt COM1 Clear Internal Config Memon Write Mem Status Complete Write to Internal Config Memory Update Iw o x Cancel Apply Figure 3 5 ROC Flags FloBoss 103 4 Select Cold Start or Warm Start to initialize the ROC FloBoss from RAM if it is valid which ensures databases and FSTs remain intact or if the RAM does not have a valid configuration the configuration last saved to programma
163. d between executions from the beginning of one execution to the beginning of the next When the Calc Type is set to Discrete enter the Loop Period as the amount of time in seconds between PID calculations This interval is typically set equal to or greater than the process variable Scan Period to ensure that an updated Primary Process Variable is received for each PID calculation Enter the Setpoint around which the Primary Process Variable is controlled When in Manual Mode enter a Process Variable value to be in line with the Setpoint so there is not a harsh bump at startup When in Auto Mode the current value of the Process Variable is determined by the input definition The value is used for comparison to the Setpoint When in Auto Mode this is the current value Output of the Primary output from the PID control expressed in engineering units When in Manual Mode enter the value desired for the Primary output from the PID control in engineering units Select the Primary PV input point defined as the Process Variable for the Primary loop of the PID algorithm Select the Primary Switch PV input point assigned for comparison with the Primary Switch Setpoint This value determines when switchover to the Override control loop occurs If Control Type is set to Analog select the Primary Output Analog Output point to be assigned as the control output for the Primary loop of the PID algorithm If Control Type is set to Discrete select th
164. d dernes our te 6 6 br 6 18 6 19 IS Ter Ra B 16 Host e e 8 13 GOUD aea 8 13 Modbus Parameters ooccnoccnnocnnoccnicononccnnaconiconanos 8 11 Pou De eet cient tea elve an ett aes 8 11 Ho rly History secr oci 9 3 See erte E 6 27 I O Conf cunnt Basi da 4 1 DEFA e e 1 17 MONOT soit ore er rese 4 19 Seet Oe ee EE 4 1 O 3 7 A toeseeacdadteecenenenekiediceenss 3 5 3 7 e HE EE 4 1 E 4 5 F EE 4 7 RIES 4 9 EE 4 12 Phea 4 16 TOS an A ERE SEV SEK ERNE 2 2 IR 3 10 Idle Cara Cte ts ac ciscwsesiesded caonedesosdondednonedveseodondovieomavoues 8 9 WEE 5 4 WEE 5 4 acusi EMO sind leas e 8 10 TGC XING eiii ida 6 35 Information AP TO 3 8 A A e 5 11 IOPU CE Pe A A 5 5 A a 5 5 ANIOS A 4 5 PS AE 4 9 SA E ee 4 16 Insert E EE B 12 Install Program ccccccccnnnnonononononononononononnnnnnnnnos 1 4 1 6 Instrument Calbranon 5 19 INT Integer Value W W u u ncsseeeeeeeeerereeee B 19 B 20 B 26 Rev 05 03 Integer Eenheete ee 6 1 EE Ehe 6 25 Integral DeadbanG EE 6 16 6 17 A 7 BCE EE 6 16 A 7 IVT H Perosio cuneeasstanesiseennonseee 5 4 IVE DCR EE 5 4 KE 5 4 tee 8 10 Save to Configuration Memory ooccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnninnnns 9 1 A N 7 12 ANA ERE ater eet 8 3 A a ee 5 6 T2 F A O A eT Teen 5 10 SE ee ee a er ee PRE ee are T 5 10 eet 5 4 K Ko PAC E 5 4 ICV OLE DE eats el ees Sale 8 4 8 9 Kev Om EE 8 9 E 1 14 Keys Commonly Used ooccccccccccccnccnnnnnnooccnnnnnnss 1 15 eege 1 14 A peewee i
165. d sc 0 6 GE 8 4 PIMC EE 5 28 B 3 B 31 TEBO sce keete ebe 1 17 7 4 C 2 TEP ROC Parameter lse nederen E 6 36 Today s Total Max Rollover cessseeeeeeees 4 16 TOOLID IEn N 1 13 Total Mole rrene laa rat 5 8 Toa Ae hina tect ac EEK EEG ERE FE FENDER Eee 7 6 Kee B 12 B 16 O NEE B 17 Transmission Status ocoooccnnccnnoconoconoccnnncnnoronancnuncnnos 8 11 Transmitter Power GT 3 8 Troubleshooting COMMUNI CAM OM 8 18 Connection EC 8 18 D EE B 9 SENS OL ALAS nda 5 21 Tuning BEN e Lo EE 6 16 PID Parameters E 6 14 A 6 Paman LOOP E 6 15 SES ek E 5 2 5 4 5 6 Turn On LISE POSTI E 6 37 EAR 8 4 Eeer 5 28 l 16 U A A II 6 22 UnCorrecicd VOM tio 5 6 Uninstalling ROCLINK oil 1 6 A rs SER E 3 8 4 1 5 11 Ee 6 5 Unused Memory Block 6 37 Update rot 1 12 C 1 E erh ee mp RRO Oe OFT NTT EOE EVE SNERRE 3 15 amp 270 EE 3 17 Upgrade to FlashPAC crand 3 18 Upgrading ROCLINK svcioiaadaicali ic 1 4 1 6 Upsi DEE 5 12 KEE 6 6 BEE 5 11 User Correction Factor ccooccnnocnnoconiccnnnccnnoconaconironanos 5 19 IRC e PETEERE 6 37 Pros raS CA nen ea ttansenrieceetaians 3 6 6 37 is ics sescccscsatscantersen eeetnlnaseansonamssinasenconment 1 9 Menu Bar and Menus cee cee cceecceeeceeeseeeees 1 11 BEE 1 9 Utilities Menu Calibration Values ocoooccncccnnccnnccnnnocnnoconironanos 5 27 NA A 9 5 ESTEMOS asa B 4 MVS Calibration Values 1 1 1 W W ssseveeereeereersresee 5 28 Security ROCTLINK
166. d then squares the result This formulaic method produces a slightly lower value than the linear method Flow Wet Linear Average Flow Weighted Linear Average method does not discard any samples instead it weights each sample by multiplying it by a flow value square root of the differential pressure measured during the sample period and then performs a linear average by dividing the sum of the flow weighted sample by the sum of the flow values This results in minute and hourly values that are more reflective of short periods of high flow Flow Wet Formulaic Average Flow Weighted Formulaic Average method combines the flow weighting action with the formulaic averaging technique both of which are described previously Flow Accumulation Flow minute values are summed to compute based on the value set in the Accum Time Basis field Flow Minute Accum Flow minute values are summed totalized to compute the minute value When using a Formulaic Average you must enter an exponent for non linear flows Exponent Formulaic Only This value should be 0 5 for differential pressure static pressure and temperature When using Flow Accumulation you must select the rate of accumulation in the Accum Time Basis Flow Accum Only field Options include second minute hour and day For example if you are archiving accumulated flow for a parameter with units of ft hr then an Accum Time Basis of Hour should
167. d value acquired by an FST Softpoints consist of a Tag identifier one integer value and twenty floating values Thirty two Softpoints are available 1 Select Configure gt Soft Points 2 Use the drop down list box to select the Softpoint you desire to configure 3 Enter the Tag as a 10 character identification name for the Softpoint 4 Enter the Integer Flag as a 16 bit unsigned integer value This value is typically used as a flag to denote the validity of the floating point data or as a counter The value may be under the control of an FST or user program 5 Enter the Data 1 to 20 data fields formatted for floating point data The values in the fields are under the control of or used by FSTs and user programs For example an FST may write an intermediate result of a value 1t acquired and the Modbus host program may poll the ROC for that information 6 Click Apply 7 Save Soft Point configuration to programmable ROM Select Write to Config Memory or Write to EEPROM Flag in the ROC Flag display and click Apply 6 2 Tank Measurements When using a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC Tank Monitoring uses one Analog Input Tank Level Input which is typically connected to a differential pressure transmitter and one Pulse Input Tank Outlet Input which is typically connected to a turbine flowmeter to track liquid volume changes within a tank The Tank Level Input does not have to be an Analog Input but could possibly be a c
168. day January 06 2000 03 41 111 AM Set ROC s Date and Time ES January 2000 q L Pace Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri WI E 26 27 28 29 2 l 2 3 4 507 Se NS 9 10 11 12 13 14 OR 16 17 18 19 20 21 g SE 23 24 25 26 27 28 LE E 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 Today 01 06 2000 9 40 504M f K X Cancel t Apply Figure 3 1 Clock 3 Use the arrow buttons to select the correct Month and Year You can also click D D the Month to select the exact month or the Year and use the arrows to select the desired Year 4 Click on the desired day of the month NOTE The current date displays in the Today field Click the Today field to synchronize the ROC or FloBoss with the same date and time as your computer 5 Click on a time field and type in the desired value type P or A for the AM PM field or use the arrows You can also use the mouse to drag the hands on the clock to the desired position 6 Click Apply and click OK Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual For a FloBoss 103 or 500 Series unit the clock can automatically compensate for daylight savings time by enabling this feature in the ROC Information screen Refer to Section For a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit the clock must be set manually or from a host computer to compensate In the spring the clock needs to be set ahead an hour to cause the historical log to skip an hourly log in the fall the clock needs to be set
169. de Scanning is Disabled MAU Medium Attachment Unit Modbus A popular device communications protocol developed by Gould Modicon mm Millimeter MMBTU Million British Thermal Units Rev 05 03 Glossary of Terms G 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual msec millisecond MVS Multi Variable Sensor The MVS provides differential pressure static pressure and temperature inputs to the ROC809 for orifice flow calculation mV Millivolts or 0 001 volt mW Milliwatts or 0 001 watt N NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer s Association O OH Off Hook modem communications signal Off line Accomplished while the target device is not connected by a communications link For example off line configuration is configuring a ROC809 in a electronic file that is later loaded into the ROC ROC809 Ohms Units of electrical resistance On line Accomplished while connected by a communications link to the target device For example on line configuration is configuring a ROC809 while connected to it so that current parameter values are viewed and new values can be loaded immediately OP Operator Port see LOI Opcode Type of message protocol used by the ROC809 to communicate with the configuration software as well as host computers with ROC driver software P Q Parameter A property of a point that typically can be configured or set For example
170. default communication parameters apply Refer to Section 8 3 1 Direct Connect on page 8 15 ROC Root Directory Connect Double click the Station Name to connect to the ROC or FloBoss using the parameters currently set for that ROC or FloBoss Refer to Section 2 ROC Directory Connect Connect to the ROC or FloBoss Station Name currently selected in the Action List Refer to Section Connect Disconnect on page 8 16 8 3 1 Direct Connect The Direct Connect option in the ROC menu allows you to connect with the ROC or FloBoss quickly if the default communication parameters apply For the Direct Connect option to work security conditions must be met and the IBM compatible personal computer PC must be connected to the Local Operator LOI Port I of the ROC or FloBoss with communication settings of 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity Refer to Section B Configuring System Parameters for instructions on setting the Security options Select Direct Connect to establish a connection through the LOI port of the ROC or FloBoss currently attached to the PC After your initial connection you may set up other communication parameters Rev 05 03 Configuring Communications 8 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Y NOTE An LOI cable may be purchased as an accessory from Emerson Process Management Flow Computer Division To use Direct Connect 1 Physically connect the ROC or FloBoss to the Local Port 1 using an LOT cable
171. der however the sequence may be altered by certain decision making functions The number of FSTs available and their maximum length varies depending on the type of ROC or FloBoss ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 Up to four FSTs with up to 300 separate steps each FloBoss 103 One FST with up to 3000 bytes typically 300 separate steps FloBoss 500 Series Up to two FSTs with up to 4000 bytes each typically 200 300 separate steps Each FST may consist of as many functions as can fit into the memory reserved for the FSTs Reserved memory is pre determined by the ROC or FloBoss An FST is built from a library of commands Table B 5 that provide mathematical and logical operations database access operations testing and branching operations and control related operations For ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units the operating system allocates the FST firmware 10 milliseconds of execution time out of every 100 milliseconds of the operating system task cycle If the FST task executes in less than 10 milliseconds the remaining time can be used by the operating system to perform other tasks For the FloBoss 103 the FST will execute 20 functions per second If the FST task executes in less than the 20 functions per second the remaining time can be used by the operating system to perform other tasks For all devices when a task completes another task is given the opportunity to execute If the FST task does not complete in t
172. dio to provide source power 1 Select Configure gt Radio Power Control gt Output Definition Output Definition EN OutPut Type DO Only DO Assignment po A ESTATUS DO Type Ge Normal Inverted OF Cancel Figure 6 13 Output Definition 2 Select the DO Assignment to assign the DO channel to be used by the Radio Power Control function 3 Set the DO Type as Normal or as Inverted If you select Inverted the ON state is the low signal 0 instead of a high signal 1 The FloBoss 407 may read the ON and OFF state in reverse Check the output to make sure you are receiving the results you desire 6 8 Modbus Configuration The Modbus Protocol Emulation Program is designed to allow the FloBoss 103 or FloBoss 500 Series unit to emulate the communications protocol used by Modbus devices This makes it possible to integrate the FloBoss and Modbus devices into the same Host Slave system The FloBoss 500 Series acts as a Slave device located on COM1 The Modbus protocol is built into the FloBoss 500 Series firmware and uses COM1 which automatically determines if the incoming communication request is in ROC protocol or Modbus protocol The FloBoss responds using the same protocol The FloBoss 103 has the built in capability of determining a ROC protocol or Modbus protocol message on any communications port This built in protocol feature is for Modbus Slave operation only If Modbus Host is required then a user program can
173. directly or by an FST 4 Click the TDO Parameters tab Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Discrete Output General Advanced TOO Parameters Cycle Time 15 00 Seconds US Count Seconds 100 Count 12 00 Seconds Low Reading EU 10 High Reading EU EU Value Units Percent EA Paste Le Update Iw ol A Cancel t Apply Figure 6 5 Timed Duration Output Parameters The output pulse from the TDO function must be defined for proper engineering unit EU conversion The minimum pulse width 0 Count and the maximum pulse width 100 Count define the minimum and maximum ON time of the output pulse The values entered in the 0 Count and 100 Count are the number of seconds the output is ON Example A TDO is used to emulate a field instrument measuring flow The TDO outputs a pulse width of 3 seconds for no flow and a pulse width of 12 seconds for 1000 MCF per day flow 0 Count 3 seconds 100 Count 12 seconds 6 5 2 TDO Defining the Engineering Units The engineering units EUs are defined by entering range values that correspond to the 0 Count and the 100 Count These values are entered in the Low Reading EU and High Reading KU fields Example A TDO is used to emulate a field instrument measuring flow The TDO outputs a pulse width of 3 seconds for no flow and a pulse width of 12 seconds for 1000 MCF per day flow 0 Count 3 seconds 100 Count 12 seconds
174. ds for ROC with ROCPAC the amount of time is fixed This parameter is used for radio communications Enter the Store and Forward Path Address and Group numbers of the ROC or FloBoss devices that need to receive this RBX message and forward it on to the next device to extend the communications path You may also specify addresses for other devices that support the ROC protocol The device specified by the last non zero Address Group then sends the message to the host specified by the previous parameter Enter the Host Address and Host Group number of the host to which the RBX feature 1s communicating The defaults of 1 and O are used by most host driver software This Host Address 1s also the destination address when Store and Forward is used Enter the Receive Ctr Copy ROC300 Series with ROCPAC to check the activity of the receive buffer before transmitting an RBX sequence Enter the Retry Counter ROC300 Series with ROCPAC to indicate the number of times an attempt has been made to transmit a message in the current sequence Enable and configure the Alarms for each point that you want to monitor through RBX Alarming Refer to Configuring Basic RBX Alarming Parameters to page The RBX Alarm Index indicates alarms currently being reported through RBX The RBX Status parameter indicates the status of RBX messaging either Active or Inactive Active indicates that an RBX alarm is being processed Rev 05 03 Configuring Communications 8 13
175. e updates as specified in seconds for the Scan Periods The default value is 1 second Click the TDI Parameters tab Discrete Inputs General Advanced TDI Parameters Alarms 0 Pulse Width 0 6 Sea lama fa o00000 100 Pulse Width Gi Secs SpanEU 100 00000 Mas Time Between Pulses jo Sec Ell Value 0 0000000 Actual Pulse Width fo Secs Units Percent Copy Paste 2 Update Iw o Cancel Apply Figure 4 7 Timed Duration Input Parameters 2 Enter the 0 Pulse Width to reflect the width of a zero percent input pulse in seconds 3 Enter the 100 Pulse Width to reflect the width of a 100 percent input pulse in seconds 4 Enter the Max Time Between Pulses as the number of seconds within which the input must make a transition to the ON state If a new signal is not received in the number of seconds entered in this field the value of the Actual Pulse Width parameter is set to 0 The Max Time Between Pulses function is disabled by entering a 0 Enter the Actual Pulse Width of the input signal as measured in seconds The pulse width is the time that the input signal is in the ON state This parameter can be affected by the Max Time Between Pulses parameter as described above Enter the Zero EU engineering units value corresponding to the 0 Pulse Width This is the low reading EU Enter the Span EU value corresponding to the 100 Pulse Width This is the high reading EU Rev 05 03 Configur
176. e DO Open Pt desired Discrete Output point to open the valve or other device If Control Type is set to Discrete select the DO Close Pt desired Discrete Output point to close the valve or other device Specify Switch to Override if the value of the Switch Setpoint to be compared with the assigned input Primary Switch PV to determine when switchover to the Override control loop occurs The type of comparison is gt greater than or lt less than FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series Specify the Switch to Primary if the value of the Switch Setpoint to be compared with the assigned input Override Switch PV to determine when switchover to the Primary control loop will occur The type of comparison gt greater than or lt less than FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series Section 6 6 3 Override PID Loop in Override Control on page 6 14 to setup your Override Loop parameters Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 13 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 6 6 3 Override PID Loop in Override Control If the Control Type is Override then the parameters that appear affect the operation of the Override secondary loop Control is automatically switched to the Override loop when the control algorithm determines that the conditions have been met for switchover To use Override PID Loop in Override Control 1 2 Select Configure gt Control gt PID Refer to Figure 68 and Figure Enter the Primary PID Loop values Refer to Section Primary PID Loop
177. e Loop Discrete is selected in the Control Type field of the PID Parameters screen the PID expects both outputs to be Discrete Outputs The Discrete Output Control Type for the PID decides which Discrete Output changes to the calculated output Ramping can be used if the Primary Override Setpoint change maximum is set to allow for a slower change in the output Select the Primary PV correct point type defined for the Primary loop This is the input assigned as the primary input Process Variable for the PID algorithm When in Manual Mode you may enter a value to be in line with the Setpoint so there is not a harsh jump at startup This is the Analog Input that you set up previously Specify the DO Open Pt for the desired Discrete Output point to open the valve This 1s the Discrete Output that you set up previously Set the DO Closed Pt for the desired Discrete Output point to close the valve This is the Discrete Output that you set up previously A 5 1 Tuning Primary PID Parameters The Primary Loop and the Override Loop are configured independently 1 Select Configure gt Control gt PID 2 Click the Tuning button in the PID Parameters screen as displayed in Figure A 4 to display the Tuning dialog 3 Set Halt PID on Reset to Enabled The PID control loop shuts down upon a reset of the ROC or FloBoss such as a power restart or a Warm Start PID Loop fed ES PID hy cue Type Tuning Pr
178. e active appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear If Alarming is set to Enable an alarm is generated when Scaming 1s disabled To optimize processor time alarms should be enabled only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so no false alarms generate Alarm parameters include Low Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the I O must fall to generate a Low Alarm High Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the I O must rise to generate a High Alarm LoLo Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the I O must fall to generate a Low Low Alarm The value 1s set lower than the Low Alarm HiHi Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the I O must rise to generate a High High Alarm The value is set higher than the High Alarm Rate Alarm The value in engineering units that represents the maximum amount of change allowed between updates If the change 1s equal to or greater than this value an alarm 1s generated To disable the Rate Alarm without disabling the other alarms the Rate Alarm value must be set greater than the Span of the Analog Input or TDI Alarm Deadband The value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits The purpos
179. e created using the New ROC and Save Configuration functions Save file Saves the current configuration of the connected ROC or FloBoss to a disk file Use this feature when multiple ROC or FloBoss units require similar configurations are being configured for the first time or when configuration changes need to be made off line Once a backup configuration file is created it can be loaded into a ROC or FloBoss with the Download function i Cut Delete currently selected text and place it in the Clipboard Copy Duplicate currently selected text and place it in the Clipboard Paste Place text currently m the Clipboard to location of the cursor AI Points View the Analog Input window AO Points View the Analog Output window DI Points View the Discrete Input window DO Points View the Discrete Output window PI Points View the Pulse Input window Display1 View Displayl stored in ROC memory FloBoss 407 and ROC 300 Series only 218 8 A I El le Display2 View Display2 stored in ROC memory FloBoss 407 and ROC 300 Series only Rev 05 03 Getting Started 1 13 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Clock View the ROC Clock window Comm Ports View the Comm Ports Setting window Direct Connect Connect to a ROC or FloBoss locally using the Local Operator Interface LOI port with default settings Connect Disconnect Connect to or Disconnect from a ROC or FloBoss with a m
180. e of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data 4 4 Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 1 2 1 Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX The Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX or Report by Exception RBX alarming feature allows the ROC or FloBoss to call in to a host computer when an alarm occurs All parameters must be configured correctly to prevent nuisance alarms from being reported to the host If you desire dial up RBX then a modem must be present and appropriately configured Enable the host computer to receive calls Select a Spontaneous Report by Exception RBX option Disabled Select Disabled to turn RBX Alarming Off On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC generates a RBX message On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC generates a RBX message On Alarm Set and Clear In either condition an RBX message generates RBX Alarming requires the communications port to be properly configured 4 2 Al Analog Input Configuration Analog Inputs are analog signals generated by measurement devices such as pressure and temperature transmitters including RTD probes NOTE Multi Variable Sensor points are setup under Configure gt MVS Sensor 1 Select Configure gt
181. e point 1 base RAM location 25 is set to 50 00 R1 26 NOTE The RDB WDB and WTM commands are operational only when the History Point number is O to 89 when the History Point archival type is defined as either FST Time Min FST Data or FST Time Sec and when the RAM for the History Point is present B 18 Miscellaneous Commands FST Miscellaneous commands provide operations such as an unconditional go to message to local display panel alarms and event generation return day of week and number of minutes elapsed since midnight GO The GO command executes an unconditional branch to the LABEL in ARGUMENTI Branching can be in either a forward or a backward direction This example demonstrates the use of the GO command SEE LABEL CMD ARGUMENT ARGUMENT2 GO FINISH LABEL 1 STEP 10 GO unconditionally branches to STEP 23 with the FINISH LABEL Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 35 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 2 STEP 23 Execution of the FST has completed END After a 100 millisecond delay execution restarts with STEP 0 Message The Message MSG command provides a 30 character message and value for viewing on the local display panel ARGUMENT2 should be a value that does not change frequently therefore the Results Register should not be used This example demonstrates the use of the Message MSG command Enter a value in Register R1 that is compared to the value 10 Depending upon the result o
182. e runs on a personal computer such as a laptop or notebook style that uses the Windows operating system This manual covers configuration calibration monitoring database archiving custom displays and embedded utilities NOTE ROC is sometimes used in this manual and in ROCLINK for Windows software to stand for all ROC and FloBoss flow computer products 1 1 1 Organization This manual is organized based on how configuration occurs Use this manual in conjunction with ROCLINK software on line help system Appendices in this manual supply examples and cover related topics The manual includes major sections Section 2 ROC Directory details the ROC Directory which is the first screen that displays after logging on to ROCLINK for Windows software Section 3 Configuring System Parameters describes how to set system preferences within the ROC or FloBoss such as the Clock Security System Information and Flags Section 4 Configuring Basic I O describes how to configure input and output options Section 5 Configuring the Meter Setup describes how to configure a FloBoss or ROC to perform the basic functions used in a meter run Section 6 Extended Functions describes how to configure a FloBoss or ROC to perform the extended functions used in a meter run Section 7 Configuring and Viewing History describes how to configure a FloBoss or ROC for history archival History can be archived for specific meter run
183. e sensor body performs scaling of process variables helps to perform calibration provides storage of operating parameters does protocol conversion and responds to requests from the ROC or FloBoss A special point type called the MVS Interface allows configuration of the interface electronics The point type is used primarily for specifying the Address of each connected MVS The MVS returns the Differential and Static Pressure The raw Analog to Digital A D signal is acquired from the MVS and is stored to the Analog Input point The AI engineering value is then calculated from the Calibration values set for the Al 1 Select the I O gt MVS Sensor Refer to Figure 6 4 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Multi Y ariable Sensor 21x MYS Sensor Point 1 Sensor Interface Version 0 m MYS Values Sensor Config Tag vs 1 Address 240 Voltage o Write Read y r Pressure Tap Location Pressure T emperature Values gt Scanning Units Diff Pressure 0 In H20 Enabled Failed f US Upstream SE Rz men Disabled C Metric C Downstream po Sensor Alarms gt Action on Failure E i 2 ee Status Se GG Hold Last Value Disabled C Set To Fault Value Diff Pressure Alarm r REX Alarming Enabled Disabled Status OK Modify Limits e Disabled Pressure Alarm WEE GG Enabled Disabled Status OK Modify Limits Temperature
184. e taken place causing the calibration mode to be automatically ended Mode Calibration mode 0 Run not in calibration mode 1 Setup old values being saved 2 Calibrate value being set 3 Cal Run inactive but still in calibration 4 Restore old calibration values being restored and 5 End Cal calibration being ended Type Indicates which calibration value is currently being set 0 Inactive no value 1 Zero 2 Span 3 Midpoint 1 4 Midpoint 2 5 Midpoint 3 6 Zero Shift 5 3 3 MVS Calibration When using a FloBoss 407 or a ROC300 Series with a Remote MVS Interface select Utilities gt MVS Calibration to view all the calibration values for MVS points Click the Set To Factory Defaults button to return the values to their original values and reset the MVS 5 28 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 4 Plate Change The Plate Change option allows you to change the size of an orifice plate Fi 1 Select Plate Change from the Meter menu to record an orifice plate change 2 Select the correct Meter ID for the meter run you are changing FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 series units have only one meter run and do not require this step 3 Select Yes 1f the plate change occurs during flowing conditions Click No for non flowing conditions 4 After selecting the appropriate Meter ID click Freeze If you are performing the Plate Change under flowing condit
185. e that the TDO can be energized to move the motor Set the 0 Count to a value that allows movement but also provides good resolution of control 5 Set the 100 Count in seconds that represents a 100 percent output pulse width The default is 12 seconds 100 Count is the maximum amount of time that the TDO can be energized to move the motor Normally this is the amount of time it takes for the actuator to move the valve from fully open to fully closed 6 Set the Low Reading EU in engineering units value corresponding to the 0 Count In this example the EUs are scaled from 0 to 100 percent the same as the Analog Input used for the Process Variable This results in the PID scale factor remaining at unity 7 Set the High Reading EU in engineering units value corresponding to the 100 Count In this example the EUs are scaled from 0 to 100 percent the same as the Analog Input used for the Process Variable This results in the PID scale factor remaining at unity Rev 05 03 PID with TDO Control A 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 8 Set the EU Value applied to a Discrete Output configured in the TDO When a value is saved written to this parameter the Discrete Output is activated according to the magnitude of the EU Value The amount of on time that a given EU Value represents 1s determined by the scaling from 0 Count 100 Count Low Reading EU and High Reading EU Set the EU Value to 0 The PID control writes to this field to change
186. e the History can provide a proper recalculation the Base Multiplier Period should be greater than the normal time it takes to get a pulse For example If a pulse only occurs once every 3 minutes set the base multiplier period to 5 minutes or greater The Base Multiplier Period should always be equal to or greater than the Scan Period of the Pulse Input of the turbine meter input to eliminate the No Flow condition The BMP should be no more than 60 minutes in length the default is 1 minute Enter the K Factor for the Turbine linear meter constant in counts pulses per unit volume such as 4 pulses per cubic foot or 235 pulses ft The English measurement is in ft and the Metric is in m The K factor is used in AGA 7 calculations and may be specified by the user for various low high flow conditions as received from a specified input The K Factor cannot be less than zero If the Variable K Factor is disabled a static factor will be used Enter the inside Pipe Diameter Orifice of the pipe near the orifice in this meter run The English US units are inches and the Metric units are millimeters Enter the Orifice Diameter Orifice of the orifice in this meter run The English US units are inches and the Metric units are millimeters Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 8 Enter the Low Flow Cutoff Orifice when the differential pressure value of the metering device 1s less than the
187. eatures 8 12 Figure 8 9 Enabling Alamng 8 14 Figure 9 1 ROC Flags ROC300 Series with Ee 9 1 Figure 9 2 Collect ROC Daa 9 2 Figure A 1 Analog Input Configuration A 1 Figure A 2 Open Discrete Output A 2 Figure A 3 Timed Duration Output Parameters A 3 Figure A 4 Primary PID Parameters FloBoss 500 SR A 5 Figure A 5 PID Loop Tunmg eeseeeeeeeees A 6 Figure B 1 FST Parameters esena ended B 2 Figure B 10 Parameters Pop up 1 B 15 Figure B 11 Parameters Menu Listing B 15 Figure B 12 Command Pop up B 16 Figure B 13 Commands Menu Listing B 16 Figure B 14 FST Monitor Display B 17 Figure B 15 Tank Pump Down Schematic B 42 Figure B 2 FST Parameter Advanced B 3 Figure 35 ESTE oia la ies B 4 Figure BA FST Function Structure cocccccccnnnnnnnnns B 6 Figure B 5 Branch Function Example B 8 Figure B 6 DO Function Example B 8 Figure B 7 FST Tee een B 13 Figure B 8 Tags Bop up B 14 Figure BO Tags Menu Listing cccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno B 14 Figure C 1 ROC Display oooooonnnncnnnnnncnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos C 1 Figure C 2 New Display Example 1 C 3 Figure C 3 New Display Example 2 C 4 Figure CA New Display Example 3 C 4 Figure C 5 New Display Example 4 C 4 Figure C 6 Displaying Live Data
188. ect Utilities gt FST Editor or click the FST Editor button The FST Editor opens a new window such as shown in Figure B 3 Title Bar RocLink For Windows Function Sequence Tablel 50dd fst On Line FST Menu Bar FST Edit View Build Monitor Options Window FST Button Bar Function Structure Header Line step oe Lol ARGUMENT ARGUMENTZ Cell a aL NOT VAL SAV SAV SAV Workspace SAV SAY VAL Output Compiled FST For Help press F1 B 4 FST1 CMPFLG 1 UC 0 FST1 FST1 FST1 FST1 FST1 CLK1 ROC CLOCK HOUR 1 aSYS1 SYSTEM PRM CONTRC 60 30 4500 FST1 SET4 0 100000 FL Figure B 3 FST Editor FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The FST Editor provides a Workspace Menus and Buttons for creating a Function Sequence Table Figure B 3 shows the FST Editor Workspace display The Title Bar at the top of the Workspace window identifies the FST being created or edited In Figure B 3 the Title Bar shows Function Sequence Table 1 S0dd fst On Line The Workspace area 1s divided into rows and columns The intersection of each row and column is called a Cell Cells are denoted by a box containing the cursor and a dark black line around the cell Use lt Tab gt and the arrow keys to move between cells or go directly to a cell by clicking on it with the mouse Not all rows are available for viewing at one time You can scrol
189. ect again If this occurs 1 Click OK 2 Select a ROC communications file from the ROC Directory Local Communications Port Serial Port or Radio Connection Modem Port or Dial up Connection ES TCP IP Connection 8 16 Configuring Communications Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 3 Select Connect from the ROC menu 4 If this is the first time that you have connected to the ROC or FloBoss continue to Section 3 Setting the Clock ey NOTE Refer to Section Successful Login on page 8 17 and Section 8 3 4 roubleshooting Connection Errors on page 8 18 8 3 3 Successful Login A successful log in produces an on line connection displaying the Configuration Tree menu as shown in Figure 8 11 as wir Analog Inputs h Analog Outputs i s H1 AD Det ees ue Discrete Inputs EE Ze Ap Discrete Output FE K re w Pulse Input 1 PID 1 Hz PID 2 5 PID 3 Se System S Comm Ports S 1 Local Port E 3 2 Comm E Bn Opcode Tables Leer ES History Figure 8 11 Configuration Tree Menu NOTE Once you are on line you can use the and symbols to display or hide various options The following views and options are available I O Lists all available inputs and outputs by type NOTE Double click the desired function to display the associated screen Double clicking an icon is the same as selecting the menu bar or Toolbar button option Control Displays the FST P
190. ect to a serial or dial up modem 1 6 3 Comm Port Configuration Whether the PC running ROCLINK software is connected locally or remotely the communication ports on the computer and the ROC or FloBoss must be configured similarly The computer s communications port is configured using the ROC Directory Refer to Section 2 ROC Directory The ROC or FloBoss communication port LOI Comm 1 or Comm 2 is configured using the ROC gt Comm Ports window Refer to Section 8 Configuring Communications 1 7 User Interface Users interact with ROCLINK software using various displays on the computer monitor and the computer keyboard and or pointing device The major components of ROCLINK software user interface are Menu bar and menus affected by the security system Function screens 4 4 Dialog boxes Keyboard and pointing devices 4 Help system including the Status Line and message boxes ROCLINK software employs a Graphical User Interface GUI with a standard Windows menu structure After logging on to ROCLINK for Windows software available functions display in a menu bar with drop down menus A Status Line at the bottom left of the display contains pertinent information about the highlighted item such as a menu option or a parameter Buttons display dialog boxes for further configuration details or perform a desired action such as the Update button To activate the button Click the button with a mouse When a
191. efore executing the next command Once the break period is set to a value other than zero a delay in 100 millisecond intervals occurs between the execution of each subsequent command End The END command completes execution of the FST and causes a 100 millisecond delay before returning to the first STEP of the FST The END command can only be used once in an FST B 19 Application Examples FST This section consists of several application oriented FST examples These examples were taken from actual customer applications and are typical of the types of applications suitable for implementation through FSTs B 36 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 19 1 Example 1 Writing Data to a History Point using an FST In this example two historical database points are defined to demonstrate using an FST to create a minute based history log The standard history log displays database values using an hourly basis Select History from the Configure menu to enter the following values Define historical database History Point 9 as Archival Type FST Data Point Type FST Registers Point FST 1 Parameter RI Define historical database History Point 10 as Archival Type FST Time Min Point Type FST Registers Point FST 1 Parameter R2 A history database History Point must be defined as an FST Time Min an FST Data or an FST Time Sec archival type to allow the WDB WTM
192. efore the Cold Start the saved FST reloads in place of the one that was cleared If an FST was running when the FST was saved the FST runs when the FST is reloaded by the Cold Start FST registers are always cleared upon restart therefore use Softpoints to load initial values for the FST When using a FloBoss 103 unit logs may be cleared FSTs are not saved when a Write to Internal Config Memory is performed 1 Select ROC gt Flags 2 Select the Cold Start checkbox in the Start Options field 3 Click the Cold Start Options button Cold Start Options EZ Restore Config from Flash defaults Restore Config amp Clear 4larm Log events C Restore Config amp Clear Roc Displays i Restore Config amp Clear FSTs Restore Config amp Clear History Restore Config amp Clear All of the above Cancel Figure 3 2 Cold Start Options 2 Select Restore Config amp Clear All of the above for a new installation and click OK 3 Click Apply Other Cold Start options include None Perform a Cold Start without restoring configurations Restore Config from Flash defaults Restore configuration from default values stored in Flash memory Restore Config amp Clear Alarm Log events Restore configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clear the Alarm Log and the Event Log Restore Config amp Clear Roc Displays Restore configuration from default values stored in Flash memory and clear the RO
193. egister 120 Ending Register 120 Type 17 Param 5 Conv 0 Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 35 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Specifies one value Starting Register 120 through Ending Register 120 for Parameter 5 of a Soft Point Type 17 starting at the fifteenth Soft Point So register 120 Parameter 5 of Soft Point 15 10 Select Param to define the Register values as Parameters If multiple Registers are used Starting and Ending Register values are different each successive Register increments to the next logical Parameter number For example Param Indexing the configuration of Starting Register 109 Ending Register 114 Type 16 Param 2 Conv Specifies six parameters 109 through 114 for FST number 1 starting at Parameter 2 So register 109 Parameter 2 of FST Point Number 1 register 110 Parameter 3 of FST Point Number 1 register 111 Parameter 4 of FST Point Number 1 and register 114 Parameter 7 of FST Point Number 1 Conversion Conv 1 Code 1 Float to Integer Float Scale 1 is used to convert the floating point value to an integer before the response message is returned to the Host For another example of Param Indexing the configuration of Starting Register 57428 Ending Register 57437 Type 17 Param 2 Conv 0 Specifies ten 57428 through 57437 parameters for Soft Point number 10 starting at Parameter 2 So register 57428 Parameter 2 of Soft Point 10 register 57429 Parameter 3 of Soft Point 10
194. egister RR with the value defined in ARGUMENTI ARGUMENTI can be a constant or any database parameter available to the FST The value defined in ARGUMENTI is converted to floating point notation and written to the Results Register These examples demonstrate the use of the value VAL command GT ee oo VAL 0 UC SAV The SAV command writes the Results Register RR value to any database parameter available to the FST This example demonstrates the use of the save SAV command STEP LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENTZ mA SAV EST1 FST SEGHLAT Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 33 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual WDB WTM and RDB The historical database commands Write to Historical Database WDB Write Time to Historical Database WTM and Read Historical Database RDB allow you to establish a non periodic history database one that has no specific time interval a periodic history database one that has a specific time interval or a storage array for data similar to a Softpoint Refer to Section B 19 1 Example 1 Writing Data to a History Point on page B 37 In order for the FST historical database commands to work a History Point has to be configured correctly The database commands are as follows FST Time Min archive type FST Time Sec archive type FST Data archive type When defining history database points define at least one History Point as an FST Time type minute or second to provide a time
195. elay helps control the rate of execution of the FST freeing time for the execution of other tasks Failure to use a delay can cause unnecessary repetitive executions 3 STEPS 3 9 The current rate R1 can be any value but this example requires the value to have units of EUs Day Often the value 1s the end product of several calculations Other times the value is read directly from any one of the parameters the FST has access to such as the scaled engineering units of an Analog Input module B 40 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The FST reads the current rate R1 every 3 seconds adds the current rate R1 to the current minute summation Register R5 and increments the current minute counter R6 by 1 In Steps 18 through 22 a minute average 1s calculated by dividing the current minute summation Register R5 by the current minute counter R6 4 STEPS 10 13 The current minute past midnight is compared to the last minute R7 saved to determine 1f minute rollover has occurred If minute rollover has not occurred after a 3 second delay Steps 3 through 9 are repeated for a new current rate R1 5 STEPS 14 15 Upon detection of minute rollover save the current minute past midnight to the last minute R7 saved for use in subsequent minute comparisons 6 STEPS 16 17 Check for division by zero 7 STEPS 18 22 Calculate the current minute average by dividing the current minute summation
196. ential Pressure Pressure or Temperature value must fall to generate a Low Alarm High Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the calculated Differential Pressure Pressure or Temperature value must rise to generate a High Alarm Alarm Deadband The value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits The purpose of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data Fault Value If the point fails the differential pressure is set to the number entered in the Fault Value field and used for calculations 6 5 Timed Duration Output TDO Configuration This section details how to configure TDO 6 5 1 TDO Defining the Output Pulse To define the TDO Output Pulse 1 Select the I O gt MVS Sensor Refer to Figure 2 Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points 3 Select a DOUT Type of Timed Duration or TDO Toggle in the Discrete Outputs dialog Timed Duration The single pulse output can be triggered by writing to the Status or the EU Value parameter of the DO point This can be accomplished directly by a PID point or by an FST TDO Toggle A continuous pulse is generated with the pulse length being controlled by writing to the Cycle Time parameter in the DO point This can be accomplished
197. er Power T C Ad DI A5 mu NOTE This selection T ON Aux 2 is not operational with d PI A5 the revisions C amp D of the Termination Card 2 Update Iw o K Cancel Apply Update v o Xx Cancel Apply Figure 3 6 ROC Flags Advanced Features Figure 3 7 ROC Flags Advanced Features ROC300 Series ROCPAC FloBoss 407 2 Select CRC Check Enabled to perform CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check checking on serial communications 3 Select I O Scanning Enabled so I O is in normal scan mode When Disabled all I O scanning 1s stopped and the last values are used until scanning is resumed 4 Specify the RTS Settings as the number of seconds 0 255 for the respective port Op Port COM 1 or COM 2 and then click Apply to activate the RTS Request to Send signal The RTS signal turns on for the specified amount of time ROC300 Series with FlashPAC or FloBoss 407 only When using a ROC300 Series with ROCPAC or a FloBoss 500 Series select the respective port Op Port COM 1 or COM 2 click Apply to activate the RTS Request to Send signal The RTS signal turns on for 30 seconds 5 Select Read I O to force the processor to read all the I O types installed and compare them to the last saved configuration If the I O types are not the same which could be caused by the installation of an additional I O module the database points found different are read A new I O module receives a default configuration This Flag
198. er Setup screens are used to configure the computation of gas flow The Meter Setup screens allow you to configure an AGA calculation point for the connected through a meter Orifice AGA3 Turbine AGA7 and ISO 9951 Y NOTE To view the results of an AGA flow calculation once it is configured use the I O Monitor option in the View menu E HI Meter 41 Figure 5 1 Meter Configuration Tree Use the and A symbols to display or hide various options Double click the desired Meter to view the associated configuration screen 5 1 1 Meter Setup Basics Each meter run must be uniquely identified to ensure proper configuration and the ability for a host to acquire the required data If more than one AGA point is available in the ROC or FloBoss use the drop down list box to select the desired Point Number Each AGA point meter run has a unique Point Number and is individually configured Each meter run s Point Number is given a unique Meter ID of up to 10 characters to label the meter run for which this flow calculation is performed Use the Meter Description field to enter up to 30 characters to further identify this meter run or to provide information about the run Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 1 2 Calculation Methods Once the meter run is identified use the Calc Type parameter the select the AGA calculation type that is to be used for calculations There are several ways to c
199. er inputs used in the flow calculation 1 Select Meter gt Setup gt Inputs tab Meter SetUp General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms 170 Definition Values Differential Pressure AIN A TEU o InH20 Static Pressure Jan A ZEU El o FSI Temperature EN A SEU El 429 31 5 Deg F stacked DP Low DP Input Manual D Ce Disabled Low DP SetPoint In H20 i Enabled j d High DP SetPoint o In H20 Averaging Technique Ge Flow Dependent Linear Flow Dependent Formulaic Flow Weighted Linear Flow Weighted Formulaic Copy Paste 2 Update Y OK X Cancel Apply vY OK Figure 5 4 Orifice Inputs FloBoss 503 Example Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 2 Click the Differential Pressure TLP button to assign the input that senses the differential pressure high differential pressure if Stacked Dp is Enabled The units assumed for the input are inches of water column In H20 or kPa is the default value if Metric conversion is enabled If Manual appears the Values field can be used to enter an engineering units value for the meter input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value Y NOTE If Manual appears the Values field can be used to enter an engineering units value for the meter input Click the Static Pressure TLP button to assign the input that senses the static pressure The units ass
200. ers PCs The PC can be a desktop or a portable computer In any case the PC should meet the following minimum requirements CD ROM drive Windows 95 Service Pack B 98 ME 2000 XP or Windows NT 4 0 or higher IBM compatible PC with Pentium class processor 233 MHz recommended 32 MB RAM SVGA Color monitor with a minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels Small system fonts large fonts not supported 10 MB of available hard disk space ETA 232 RS 232 serial connection COM1 or COM2 on most computers or a dial up modem connection if the ROC or FloBoss has dial up communications card installed gt gt 1 1 1 2 Getting Started Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 3 ROCLINK for Windows Configuration Software ROCLINK for Windows software provides the capability to monitor configure and calibrate the Remote Operations Controllers ROC and FloBoss Flow Managers Computers The software and user documentation are supplied on a CD ROM ROCLINK NN Configure ROC FloBoss operating parameters Upload and download configurations Download historical data Download alarm and event logs Download EFM reports Examine configuration parameters Monitor pressure flow and temperature Perform ROC FloBoss maintenance and housekeeping rlfunca dsf Figure 1 1 Functions of ROCLINK for Windows Software ROCLINK for Windows software has the capability to access Audit Logs in RO
201. ers that can affect calibration of the meter inputs The options allow you to set calibration parameters for the Analog Inputs for this flow calculation 1 10 Select Meter gt Set up gt Instrument Calib tab Meter SetUp MEI General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms Dead Weight Calibration Water Manometer Calibration Static Press r Diff Press Diff Press Ne No CG No C Yes C Yes C Yes Calibrated Grav Accel Calibrated H20 Temp eo DegF 32 174 Ft Sec2 Calibrated Air Temp 50 DegF m Mercury Manometer Instrument m Mercury Manometer Used User Correction Factor 1 No C Yes L Ambient Hg Temp en DegF Calibrated Hg Temp 60 DegF Copy EA Paste 2 Update Y OK X Cancel Y Apply e ok Figure 5 16 Instrument Calibration Orifice FloBoss 500 Series Select the respective Yes option for the Dead Weight Calibration if a deadweight tester is used to calibrate the differential pressure Orifice only or the static pressure Enter the Calibrated Grav Accel if the gravitational acceleration calibrated for the tester is different from the value indicated enter the calibrated value The units assumed for the input are Ft Sec in US units or m Sec if the Metric conversion is enabled Select Yes for Mercury Manometer Instrument if a mercury manometer is used Orifice Enter the Ambient Hg Temp if the Amb
202. es Unavailable for a FloBoss 407 or FloBoss 500 Series units 7 Enable Automatic Daylight Savings Time Set for a FloBoss 103 or 500 Series device to set the Clock and the associated time stamping of logs automatically to daylight savings time in the spring and back to standard time in the fall This takes place on the first Sunday in April where the time increments from 1 59 59 am to 3 00 00 am and on the last Sunday in October when the time reverts from 1 59 59 am to 1 00 00 am In the spring the historical log skips an hour and in the fall a duplicate time value is entered 3 3 2 Other Information ROC Information Select ROC gt Information and click Other Information tab This information is read only Customer Name The name of the customer for which the ROM version was created The customer name can be set at the factory at the time of ordering or in the field by a sales representative Version Name Displays the part number and version of the installed firmware ID Identifies the creator of the firmware Time Created Date and time when the installed firmware was created 3 10 Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual ROM Serial The serial number assigned by the factory to the read only memory ROM installed in the ROC or FloBoss MPU Loading Displays the percentage of time that the processor was busy not in the wait task over the last minute The data for this field
203. ess the Minutes mode has been enabled for a FloBoss 103 FloBoss 500 Series or a ROC300 Series for the respective zone Note that the time 1s accurate to 0 2 seconds rounded down For example 6 5 under Zone 1 means that the power is on for 6 4 seconds during each cycle that occurs in Zone 1 Off Time during a power cycle that the output is in the OFF state in seconds unless the Minutes mode has been enabled for a FloBoss 103 FloBoss 500 Series or a ROC300 Series for the respective zone Note that the time is accurate to 0 2 seconds rounded down For example 18 5 under Zone means that the power is off for 18 4 seconds during each cycle that occurs in Zone 1 9 Enter the Hold Time that the output remains ON after detection of communications activity in seconds unless the Minutes mode has been enabled for a FloBoss 500 Series or a ROC300 Series This value applies to all zones Note that the time is accurate to 0 2 seconds rounded down When communications occur during the On Time the On Time is extended by the Hold Time The DTR signal remains ON the Receive Interrupts remain enabled and the Discrete Output if used remains in the ON state 10 Enter a Low Battery Shutoff value that specifies the voltage at which Power Control is automatically disabled The voltage being sensed is the Power In or Battery voltage diagnostic input El or E2 The Low Battery Shutoff parameter allows power cycling to be automatically disab
204. et 2 3 8 2 SN e Seege 3 11 3 12 ROM Serial 2 3 11 RR Results Heger B 18 RTS CE ona A eN SE reg 8 9 High for Ee 3 5 A A 3 7 La RN EE 6 23 Rules D EE B 9 Running Total Entered Rollover 4 16 S A e A 5 18 A O ADDERES SEN 5 18 Dura On O 5 18 V OMNIS WEE 5 18 SAV Ee B 19 B 23 B 33 SEER oR EE 1 12 Configuration oooooooooonoccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 1 13 9 1 9 4 DTS EE C 2 EEPROM and Internal Configuration Memory 9 1 A A AE A et sacle 1 13 Scale l 14 Pa OT na A 6 16 6 17 A 7 VIE EE EE 6 25 SEHR EES A 1 A EE 4 11 SCANNE ada A 2 A 5 Automatic vs Manual Mode 4 3 O 3 5 My SSG ces asset A se 6 5 PID ee ee ee 6 11 Starting and Stopping Al 3 5 3 7 SC CUI ca retell el te aera O 3 11 A A 8 9 O ee 3 13 Ee 3 12 Select Accumulation Time Bags 7 6 EE 9 6 Eeer reg VO EE 4 19 Archive RE 7 5 History PONT eege 7 5 Montor VO NEE 4 19 User Program Files to Download 1 6 37 Sensor AANE a a a a 5 5 NEE 5 21 6 5 EHNEN 5 21 Serial Communica on anaana a 8 5 A aserne EE 6 32 A A T 2 2 Set A A AS 5 27 A A SNEDE EGE TE ELSE 5 22 Midpoint diia idad 5 26 Ree E 5 26 ii sasines Site tena senst ice teaanaeeatata 5 26 MVS to Factory Defaults ooooooonononocnncnnnos 5 28 RTS High for 30 Sege ee id 3 5 A 5 22 5 25 Ee EF Auge E dd 6 6 A O eech 5 22 5 25 O II rasen 5 26 Set up MEA AE 5 1 5 3 O a nr FREE FEDE ne 6 11 6 13 in E E B 16 SELE KT 1 15 Shortcut SA re astute
205. et Timer ST indicated in ARGUMENTI to the number of 100 millisecond intervals indicated in ARGUMENT2 2 STEP 1 to 3 These are the steps to be cycled every 10 seconds 3 STEP 4 to 6 Read the Timer to see if any time from the cycle remains The value read 1s used to calculate the amount of time that must be delayed before the cycle can be repeated If the Timer has expired 0 then the FST did not complete within 10 seconds If the Timer has not expired then a delay is required before the FST can repeat the cycle To calculate the necessary delay in seconds multiply the Timer by 0 1 B 38 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 19 4 Example 4 Calculate Approximate Execution Rate using a FST This example determines the average time it takes to execute an FST A Timer is used to determine the number of 100 millisecond intervals that have elapsed while a sequence of functions executes It is Important to note that the operating system can interweave the FST execution with other tasks thus lengthening the execution time STEP LABEL ARGUMENT ARGUMENT2 o ST GEGIIEGI H TMA1 FST BODY CaFSTLFST 1 FST FST 1 FST BODY a p5T1 F5T 1 CaFST1 FSTHT 1 STEP 0 The ST command sets the timer in ARGUMENT to the number of 100 millisecond intervals indicated in ARGUMENT2 STEP 1 to 3 Any function sequence STEP 4 VAL reads the Timer to establish the reference time for the beginning of
206. etween the current value and last hour s current value is used for point values This accumulation technique is used to acquire accurate total values for parameters incremented over time e FST Time Min This allows the FST to archive the time it placed a value in another history point The Function Sequence Table controlled time stamp is stored as Month Day Hour Minute FST Time Sec This allows the FST to archive the time it placed a value in another history point The Function Sequence Table controlled time stamp is stored as Day Hour Minute Second FST Data This allows the FST to store a value to the historical database Function Sequence Table controls archiving of data to a history point based on criteria you establish The FST must be written to write to the appropriate index in the historical archive 9 Select Accumulation Time Basis FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series When the selected Archive Type is Accumulate this list appears at the bottom of the screen Choose one of the following options to determine how the accumulated values are computed per second per minute per hour or per day Select the time period of the rate being accumulated Per Sec Values summed given the rate in quantity second Per Min Values summed given the rate in quantity minute Per Hour Values summed given the rate in quantity hour 4 Per Day Values summed given the rate in quantity day 7 2 1 Con
207. f the comparison a message is sent to the display panel indicating that the value in R1 is either less than greater than or equal to 10 The value of RI also displays STEP LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 a FSTIFST H Al 10 UC EQUAL LABEL 10 UC LESS LABEL Fl GREATER THAN 10 PST TLFST H Di END LABEL R1 EQUAL TO 10 FS T1 F5T RI Di END LABEL AILESS THAN 10 GEGIIEGI H Di 1 STEP 0 VAL reads the value of RI and loads the value into the Results Register 2 STEP 1 If the Results Register is equal to 10 branch to STEP 5 EQUAL LABEL otherwise continue with STEP 2 3 STEP 2 If the Results Register is less than lt 10 branch to STEP 7 LESS LABEL otherwise continue with STEP 3 4 STEP 3 If the Results Register is greater than gt 10 send the message MSG in ARGUMENT and the value R1 in ARGUMENT to the local display panel STEP 4 GO jumps to STEP 8 to bypass printing the other messages 6 STEP 5 If the Results Register is equal to 10 send the message MSG in ARGUMENT 1 and the value in ARGUMENT to the local display panel 7 STEP 7 If the Results Register is less than 10 send the message MSG in ARGUMENTI and the value in ARGUMENT to the local display panel 8 STEP 8 Execution of the FST has completed END After a 100 millisecond delay execution restarts with STEP 0 Break The BRK command imposes a delay break period in 100 millisecond intervals b
208. f the parameter to be viewed on the LCD 5 Click the Point Definition TLP button to define the point parameters you desire to view on the LCD display Undefined indicates that no parameter has been specified 3 5 1 LCD The LCD Setup is used to configure Liquid Crystal Display LCD for a ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC that has an optional Local Display Panel LDP connected to it The configured parameters may also be changed from the LCD a ROCPAC requires a user program When setting up a LCD point only the top three lines of the display area are configurable The bottom line is reserved for the function key definition The first 10 characters columns of each line are used for text identifiers of the data contained on the rest of the line The specified data displays starting at character position column 12 in the format n nn As many as eight displays can be configured to display a variety of function and database parameters 1 Select Configure gt LCD 2 Enter the Line Value data or parameter to display is selected by using windows to select the function function number and parameter Because text characters cannot display in the Value field select only parameters that return a numeric value 3 Enter the Text up to 10 characters to appear on the Liquid Crystal Display The Text should describe the Value selected for this line 3 6 Update Firmware The Update Firmware feature updates the internal software stored
209. figure gt Tank Measurements Tank Monitoring Tank Points M Point Number Tag TaN Ki Current Level Scan Period 5 Secs Rate Alarm Units Alarms None Tank Level Input Undefined E Tank Outlet Level Undefined E Others Strapping Value o Total Units Hauled T Specific Gravity Contract Hour Level 3999 Level Deadband Units Discharged Io Manual Entry Today s Volume 0 Yesterday s Wolume Io et Figure 6 1 Tank Monitoring Use the drop down list box to select the Tank Point you desire to configure Enter the 10 character name Tag identifying the tank Point Number Current Level displays the current liquid level in the tank measured in engineering units divided by the specific gravity Enter the Scan Period as the number of periods in seconds between calculations of tank volume Enter the Rate Alarm as the maximum drop in level between input scans before an alarm generates Enter the Units as a 10 character name for the engineering units assigned to the tank level such as barrels or gallons Alarms indicate any alarms that are active for this point Enter the Tank Level Input normally from a differential pressure transmitter used to measure the level of the liquid in the tank Enter the Tank Outlet Input used to measure liquid flowing out of the tank The input can be a Pulse Input normally from a turbine flowmeter or it can be left unused Extended Functions
210. figuring History for EFM Reporting In order for the EFM Reports utility to work the historical database in the ROC or FloBoss must be configured so that certain flow calculation values can be retrieved from memory by the utility Table 7 1 shows how the history points must be configured for each meter run depending on whether it is AGA3 or AGAT metered Table 7 2 shows additional history points that may also be configured as needed for detailed EFM Reports applies to ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units only and typically used for gas chromatographs The order or database number of these history points 1s not critical the EFM Reports utility will search for them For a ROC300 Series units with a ROCPAC it is necessary to have all the required history points for a meter run located in the same RAM location such as Base RAM 7 6 Configuring and Viewing History Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series units have all the required flow parameters factory configured into History Points through 8 these history points cannot be changed by the user ROC300 Series with FlashPAC units and FloBoss 407 units have the required flow parameters factory configured into the first 8 history points for Meter Run 1 only however these points can be changed if needed A ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC always defaults to AGA3 ROC300 Series units with a ROCPAC are void of default values An AGA user program is required
211. file is created it can be loaded into a ROC or FloBoss by using the DownLoad function 1 Select File gt Save The Save As dialog box appears 2 Type the desired File name of the backup file or use the default 3 Click Save The file is saved in the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data unless you had changed the directory The extension DCF is used for a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC ROC300 Series units with a FlashPAC and all FloBoss units have the extension FCF 9 5 Open The Open option allows you to open an existing configuration file Configuration files are created using the Save Configuration function To open a configuration file 1 Select File gt Open 2 Select the configuration File name The extension DCF is used for a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC ROC300 Series units with a FlashPAC and all FloBoss units have the extension FCF 3 Click Open Once the configuration file is opened it automatically becomes active and you may edit the file Off Line The configuration file may also be loaded into a FloBoss or ROC by using the DownLoad function Refer to Section DownLoad on page 9 4 9 6 DownLoad Use DownLoad in the File menu to download a previously saved configuration to a ROC or FloBoss Configuration files are created using the Save Configuration function To download a previously saved configuration 1 Connect to the ROC or FloBoss 2 Select File gt DownLoad 3 Se
212. flow values This method s results include minute and hourly values that are more reflective of short periods of high flow Flow Weighted Formulaic This method combines the flow weighting action with the formulaic averaging technique both of which were described previously Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 2 2 Gas Quality Gas Quality defines the mole percentages of twenty gas components as well as the Heating Value Basis the Heating Value and the Specific Gravity If the ROC or FloBoss has multiple meter runs use Copy and Paste to create Gas Quality configurations for meter runs with similar characteristics 1 Select Meter gt Setup gt Gas Quality tab Refer to Figure Meter SetUp HEI General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Nitrogen M Heptane o z Log Methane Adjust D a eo co2 fo cana o y Enabled Disabled Methane 96 7 Nonane fo Heating Value Basis Ethane EE Decane o 2 Dy C Wet C Ae Deliv Propane o H3S o n Butane o eter o x Heating Value Calculate Enter i Butane o x Helium o n Pentane o x Oxygen o x BTU Lb i Pentane o 2 E Ue o Spec Gravity gt Hud S E WE fo T fo Calculate C Enter Total Mole 99 99999 Copy e Paste Update Iw o x Cancel Y Apply Figure 5 5 Gas Quality 2 Enter the mole percent of each Gas Component
213. for FloBoss 500 Series units In ROC300 Series units with ROCPACs due to the amount of RAM available in the Base RAM the number of days of hourly data that can be archived is dependent upon the number of database points configured NOTE Once the number of database points is defined and the ROC or FloBoss has been running values are archived in the ROC database Changing the number of database points in any RAM location re initializes the history database causing all previously archived values to be lost 5 Enter the number of RAMI database points contained in the first additional RAM area in a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC 128K of an optional RAM module This field accepts a value from 0 to 30 however a maximum of 20 is actually available for a FloBoss 407 and none are available for a FloBoss 500 Series Each database point contains 33 days of hourly data or 840 entries NOTE Although only 20 points are possible for a FloBoss 407 ROCLINK software may take values greater than 20 and the corresponding history points show up in database configuration However you cannot actually configure them 6 Enter the number of RAM2 database points contained in the second additional RAM area in a ROC300 Series unit for ROCs with ROCPACs 128K of an optional RAM module This field accepts a value from 0 to 30 when used with a ROCPAC and from 0 to 27 when used with a FlashPAC Each database point contains 35 days of hourly data or 840 entri
214. for Windows software to configure a hardware device you must have the ROC or FloBoss wiring properly connected to power and I O Refer to the appropriate hardware instruction manual Initially the ROC or FloBoss should also be physically connected to a personal computer PC using the Local Operator Interface LOI port running ROCLINK software 1 4 1 Installing ROCLINK for Windows Software using AutoRun This sections details first time installation of ROCLINK software If you already have a previous version of ROCLINK software installed refer to Section on page 1 6 To install ROCLINK software on a PC with AutoRun perform the following steps 1 Place the ROCLINK Software Installation CD ROM into your drive When the Main Menu screen appears select the Install a ROCLINK Product button From the Installation Menu screen select the Install ROCLINK for Windows button US From the Setup Type screen choose either Install a Newer Version or Update or Uninstall ROCLINK for Windows and click Next Click Next in the ROCLINK for Windows Welcome screen A dialog box will appear asking if you would like to read the installation notes Read the License Agreement and click Confirm Enter your Name and Company name and click Next G EE A Select the path if you want to install the software in a directory other than the default C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows The ROCLINK for Windows default directory is recommended Click Next 10 En
215. g Only SVD out SVD in the first 10 characters of the 30 character message are used NOTE The ALM and EVT functions can ee ee ee or overfill the allotted log space of 240 alarms and 240 events It is important to assure that these two functions do not operate ee ee ee or B 12 Command Examples FST This section provides examples of how specific commands can be implemented in an FST Refer to Section B 19 Application Examples on page B 36 for application oriented examples B 12 1 Mathematical Commands FST B 12 1 1 Add Subtract Multiply and Divide FST This example demonstrates the use of the add command but also applies to the subtract multiply x and divide commands Ec LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT VAL 5 Lit EY 10 UC SAW FSTLFST SEQH1 A1 END 1 STEP 0 VAL loads 5 into the Results Register 2 STEP 1 The value 10 is added to the Results Register STEP 2 The result is 15 the summation of 5 and 10 The Results Register is saved SAV to Register R1 for viewing 4 STEP 3 Execution of the FST has completed END After a 100 millisecond delay execution restarts with STEP 0 NOTE For the divide command no operation occurs if ARGUMENTI is zero Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 25 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 12 2 Power and Exponent FST This example demonstrates the use of the power command ZE LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 das 25 T11 F5T a R
216. ge or Absolute as the way of measuring pressure at the static pressure tap This choice must match the way the static pressure input is actually measured The MVS and DVS can be ordered with a FloBoss to provide either absolute or gauge measurements 5 2 3 1 Downstream and Bi Directional Flow The following details downstream pressure and bi directional flow connection configuration and calibration guidelines for various FloBoss and ROC products In all FloBoss and ROC products the value of the static pressure input as displayed on the Input tab of the Meter gt Setup screen is the value that is archived in history 9 12 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual While the Dual Variable Sensor DVS and the Multi Variable Sensor MVS are intended to measure and report upstream absolute static pressure options are described in the following sections for setting up these devices to report a downstream pressure as the value of the static pressure input This is required by users who need to archive the downstream pressure value to meet the needs of their gas accounting system or for bi directional flow The value of the upstream absolute pressure will always be used in the calculation of flow as required by the AGA 3 standard The selections made in ROCLINK software for absolute gauge and upstream downstream tell the unit what if any conversions must be done to the input value to calculate the upstream
217. gram to advance to the branch identified by the LABEL and to perform the functions defined there STEP LABEL ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 o PuMPON PMPOFF por 1 Il In the example above the program is instructed to GO to the LABEL PMPOFF as established by ARGUMENT 1 in STEP 0 STEP 0 jumps to STEP 1 where the LABEL PMPOFF is located B 4 2 Command CMD The FST command CMD field specifies the action to be taken by a function and is identified by a one two or three character mnemonic Table B 4 shows the function commands and provides a brief description of how they operate on the RR CF and Argument values Section B 11 Command Library on page B 18 describes the command set in detail STEP LABEL ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 RES In this example the command CMD GO is present B 6 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 4 3 Arguments Arguments can be numerical constants ASCII characters or data read from or written to applications you develop or embed in the firmware software Table B 2 on page B 7 lists mnemonics and their descriptions for the pre defined point types used with FST programs The symbol in each mnemonic indicates the point type has been pre defined in the FST software and must be included in any reference to point types STEP LABEL ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 o ij OAL Tag Name EU After pressing F9 to select the ARGUMENT Point Type and Point Number IOA1 Tag Name press F10 to select t
218. gure the Modem Type and the Inactivity Time to permit proper use of the modem Select the Modem Type None Serial link to the host External Modem that is external to the ROC FIoBoss Internal ROC FloBoss modem communications card Set the Connect Time parameter to determine the amount of time that the ROC or FloBoss waits after initiating a call to receive a connect message from a device typically the host before it terminates the call If a successful connection is made the Disconnect Time begins Set the Disconnect Time parameter to determine the amount of time that the ROC or FloBoss waits for further activity on the line before it hangs up This timer resets and starts counting down after each valid receive signal Set the Inactivity Time parameter to determine the amount of time that the ROC or FloBoss waits for a valid receive signal before it resets the modem after an invalid signal is sensed This parameter is useful for resetting the modem when the modem has connected at a baud rate that the ROC or FloBoss itself does not recognize Enter the Config Command characters required to initialize the modem for reset if the Inactivity Time expires For external modems refer to the manufacturer s literature For an internal modem use the default or the modem card may not work The default Config Command modem strings are 4 FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series 2400 Dial up Modem Card W38079X0012 ATE V Q
219. he ROC or FloBoss is connected and communicating Once the disk file is created a report can be generated anytime thereafter such as in the office and connection communication with the ROC is no longer necessary The EFM Reports utility formats this report for a single meter run covering a specified period of time You can choose to view the report or print the report Rev 05 03 Configuring and Viewing History 7 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual NOTE In order for the EFM Reports utility to work the historical database in the ROC or FloBoss must be configured so that certain flow calculation values can be retrieved from memory As mentioned the EFM Reports utility uses the flow data that was gathered using either the EFM Report Data or the All option under Collect Data in the ROC menu The All function retrieves ROC data including the EFM Report Data and stores it in disk files identified with various extensions The EFM Report function retrieves just the detailed flow data needed for an EFM report and stores 1t in disk files with either an AGA ora DET extension AGA files are created for FloBoss 103 and 500 Series devices and contain only the eight standard history points for the meter run DET files are created for ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 devices and are formatted to contain gas composition specific gravity relative density and heating value averages 1 Select View gt EFM Reports Refer to
220. he active cell When you drag and drop a Tag the Parameter dialog automatically displays Click the to close the listing B 8 4 Parameters FST The Parameters menu shown in Figure B 10 and Figure B 11 provides a list of the Parameters available for each of the ROC point types listed ROC point Parameters are used in Command Arguments to further define the action to be taken For each point type a different list of Parameters displays You can select Parameters in the following ways B 14 Select View gt Parameters Click the Parameters button Click the F10 button while in an Argument field Press the Parameters shortcut lt Alt Ctrl P gt Press lt F10 gt F10 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Point Type DESC Filter Modes Alarm Code Accumulated Value On Counter Off Counter 0 Count 100 Count Max Count Scan Period Zero EU Span EU Low Alarm High Alarm LoLo Alarm Figure B 10 Parameters Pop up HiHi Alam EU Value in EUs RATEFL Rate Flag RATEPR Rate Period SCANPA Scan Period CON Conversion LOAL Lo Alarm EU PARAMETERS Figure B 11 Parameters Menu Listing The cursor keys provide movement within the list and lt Esc gt removes the list from the Workspace In the pop up Figure B 10 double click on an item to choose it and place it in the active cell in the Workspace In the menu listing Figure B 11 double click on an item
221. he allotted time the FST task uses whatever time is left over from other tasks to attempt to complete the sequence of functions As the sequence of functions executes two memory locations store intermediate results from one function to the next One location called the Results Register RR stores a floating point or analog value referred to as the Signal Value Analog SVA The other location called the Compare Flag CF stores a discrete value called the Signal Value Discrete SVD Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Depending on the function the Results Register RR and the Compare Flag CF may be loaded stored tested modified or left unchanged Refer to Section B 10 Monitoring an FST on page B 17 for information on monitoring these values B 2 FST Register Parameters The FST Register creates or monitors a Function Sequence Table Register point FSTs allow you to define and perform a set of specific actions to be taken when a set of conditions exists FSTs can be written specifically for applications that require special control features such as logic sequencing capability For example an FST may be written that is used as an emergency shutdown control when dangerous flow occurs An FST defines the input to output relationships in the ROC or FloBoss through a set of user selected instructions called functions These functions which define the specific actions to be performed are executed i
222. he corresponding Parameter EU that you desire to monitor read store or alter write In the previous example IOA1 is the Point Type Point Number and Tag Name and EU is the Parameter Table B 2 Pre defined Point Type Mnemonics Mnemonic 1 Description Power Control Tag FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series In the following example the argument IOB9 Tank Level EU used with the VAL command returns to the Results Register RR the real time Value of a Tank Level in scaled engineering units EU The parts of this argument are as follows The argument structure begins with the mnemonic CTO followed by the slot Point Number location of the physical input within the ROC or FloBoss The Point Number indicates the location of the point such as rack and module number in the ROC or FloBoss The Point Number is automatically assigned by the ROC and cannot be edited Each input or output has a unique Point Number to identify the I O The Point Tag for the physical input comes next Tank Level is the user assigned Tag for Point Number B9 The Point Tag is assigned in the I O parameter screens of ROCLINK software Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Last comes the desired Parameter of the Point Type In this example EU is the Parameter This Parameter specifies the current process value for input B9 scaled in engineering units User defined Tags are created by entering and configuring points in ROCLINK
223. he desired value or can be cleared by entering 0 Enter the On Counter to count the number of 50 millisecond periods when the Status parameter is in the On state The On Counter which does not operate if Scanning is set to Disabled is a 32 bit number that automatically rolls over when it reaches its maximum value The On Counter can be preset by entering the desired value or cleared by setting the Status parameter to Off Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 6 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Enter the Off Counter to count the number of 50 millisecond periods when the Status parameter 1s in the Off state The Off Counter which does not operate if Scanning is set to Disabled is a 32 bit number that automatically rolls over when it reaches its maximum value The Off Counter can be preset by entering the desired value or cleared by setting the Status parameter to On 4 4 1 2 TDI Parameters For a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit TDI Parameters lets you configure the scaling parameters and other features unique to Timed Duration Inputs TDI The DIN Type must be set to Timed Duration TD for this feature to be available When a DI is configured to operate in the TDI mode the time the discrete input is active versus the time it is inactive is converted into a quantitative value 1 2 Select Configure gt I O gt DI Points gt TDI Parameters tab Enter the Scan Period TDI calculation period as the amount of time between EU Valu
224. he metering location The units are in degrees and minutes separated by a decimal point For example 46 15 10 Enter the dynamic Viscosity of the flowing gas either in terms of Lbm ft sec or cP centipoise when Metric is selected The FloBoss 103 and 500 Series expects the viscosity to be in cP for both English and Metric Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 11 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Enter the Sp Heat Ratio of the specific heat at constant pressure to the specific heat at constant volume at flowing conditions A value of 1 3 1s used for the expansion factor tables in report AGA3 ANSI2530 If entered the value must be greater than zero Enter the Gravity Correction factor as desired when using a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 This need not be limited to gravitational adjustments For a FloBoss 500 Series unit refer to the User Correction Factor in the Instrument Calibration dialog box Select the Orifice Material as Stainless Steel Monel or Carbon steel to indicate the material of which the orifice plate 1s made Enter the Reference Temp of the orifice plate when the orifice diameter was measured If Metric is selected the units of measurement are in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius Select the Pipe Material 1992 version as Stainless Steel Monel or Carbon steel to indicate the material of which the pipe in the meter run is made Select Force Reca
225. he next FST command to be executed and then stops You are given the opportunity to examine the results of the FST command and determine the next FST command to be executed The location of the action depends on the nature of the command The action may be traced to the history log I O value or Point Numbers Softpoint and so on The command executed is determined by comparing the Instruction Pointer IP shown on the Monitor screen to a printout of all Instruction Pointers and their corresponding commands Trace thereby verifies proper execution and sequencing of commands Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 17 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual so NOTE Before entering Trace mode print out an Instruction Pointer listing of the FST Press lt F6 gt to execute the next command Entering Trace mode from a newly compiled FST starts at the first STEP Entering Trace mode from an executing FST starts at the STEP being executed A value can be entered into the Instruction Pointer IP field to manually jump to another STEP NOTE When you attempt to trace an FST that contains WT BRK ST or CT commands a pause in the sequencing can occur until the command conditions are met B 11 Command Library FST Commands are identified by a name that consists of one or more characters or mathematical symbols Table B 4 shows the conventions used throughout this section Table B 4 Command Library Conventions RR in The value or contents of the Result
226. he quantity of non hydrocarbon components as follows 1 Specific Gravity 2 The mole of CO2 3 The mole of N 5 10 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual NOTE If either Gross Method is chosen manually enter the Specific Gravity and Heating Value in the Gas Quality screen For Gross Method Il the heating value is required only for calculating the gas energy flow If the Calc Type parameter is set to 1985 Turbine AGA7 flow calculation you can select between the NX19 and the AGAS methods of calculating the compressibility factor NX19 Uses an empirical method of evaluating compressibility factors for normal natural gas mixtures The AGA8 method calculates the compressibility factor based on the physical chemistry of the gases at specified temperatures and pressures AGAS Provides extended capabilities for accurate computation of compressibility factors beyond the temperature pressure and composition ranges of NX19 NOTE Be sure to enter the Specific Gravity and Heating Value in the Gas Quality screen 3 Select either US English Units or Metric units for calculations when using a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 If Metric units are selected then the AGA calculation expects all inputs to be in the indicated units such as kPa for the static pressure input keep in mind that any existing entered values are not converted To see the new nomenclature appear on the screen click Update
227. ide PY JAIN A Eu af Process Variable fo Override Output Undefined a Output o Overide Switch DN EN A 1 EU e Tuning gt gt SC fo Tuning gt gt Copy EA paste 2 Update or x Cancel t Apply Ex Copy Haste 2 Update Y or x Cancel Y Apply Figure 6 8 PID Loop AI Override Figure 6 9 PID Loop DO Override Select the PID control loop point you desire to configure 3 Enter the Tag as a 10 character name used to identify the PID control loop 6 12 Select the Control Type Override Analog Dual loop control with Analog Output s Override Discrete FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series Dual loop control with Discrete Outputs Set Scanning to Enabled or Disabled to control the ON and OFF status for scanning the PID loop Extended Functions Rev 05 03 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Set Mode to Auto or Manual PID control is effectively disabled by placing the point in Manual Mode In Manual Mode the value applied to the output is taken from the Output parameter Note that for ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units the value for the output is taken from the Override loop regardless of which loop was in control when the PID point was placed in Manual Mode Enter the Calc Time to indicate the actual period of time in seconds between executions of the PID algorithm This is the amount of time measure
228. idpoint 3 such as 75 of range for the Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature Set Midpoint 3 allows you to specify the high calibration point between the Zero and Span endpoints The Zero and Span endpoints you recently established are used in setting the midpoints Midpoint 3 should be the high value magnitude above Midpoint 1 and Midpoint 2 Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units Click the Set Mid 3 button If you have calibrated Differential Pressure click Set Zero Shift to zero the static pressure effect for the Differential Pressure input Refer to Figure Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Set Zero Shift Diff Pressure Point Fixed AIH Live Reading om 00000 Figure 5 25 Zero Shift Dialog Box 23 Click the Done button when you are finished with Zero Shift 24 Click the OK button to close the main calibration window and unfreeze the associated inputs To calibrate the inputs for another meter run if available return to Step 1 5 3 1 Calibration Report The Calibration Report details which parameters were set during calibration 1 Select View gt Calibration Report 2 Select the Calibration Report you desire to view The file has the extension cal and is located in the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data directory unless you changed the directory location when you created the Calibration Report
229. idual device among all units in a communications group The Address can be assigned a value from 1 to 255 240 is the System Default Address and should not be used The host performs a search by looking at the Group and Address fields of every ROC or FloBoss on the network until it finds a match Enter a Group to identify a set of ROC or FloBoss units for communication purposes typically to a host that polls the ROC The station Group can be assigned a value from to 255 All of the ROCs addressed as an area in the host have the same station Group 240 is the system default Group and should not be used Set the Contract Hour time when values are totaled for a single day of production accumulators are cleared and data is logged to the Daily History database The Contract Hour is based on a 24 hour clock with midnight as the 0 hour When using a FloBoss 500 Series or FloBoss 103 select either US English Imperial or Metric Units for calculations Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 7 Select Force End of Day and click Apply to cause the current day and 1ts hourly values to be logged into memory for all historical data except station totals Force End of Day resets the daily and hourly accumulators 8 Select ROC Flags gt Write to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM 3 3 1 Points ROC Information The Points screen allows you to set other parameter options such as the numbe
230. ient or Calibrated temperature of the mercury is different from the indicated values enter the correct values The default is 60 F or 60 C if the Metric conversion is enabled Orifice Enter the Calibrated Hg Temp if the Ambient or Calibrated temperature of the mercury is different from the indicated values enter the correct values The default is 60 F or 60 C if the Metric conversion is enabled Orifice Select Yes for Water Manometer Calibration if a water manometer is used to calibrate the differential pressure Orifice Enter the Calibrated H2O Temp if the calibrated temperature of the water is different from the indicated values enter the correct values The default is 60 F or 60 C if the Metric conversion 1s enabled Orifice Enter the Calibrated Air Temp if the calibrated temperature of the air is different from the indicated values enter the correct values The default is 60 F or 60 C if the Metric conversion 1s enabled Orifice Enter the User Correction Factor to adjust all calculated flows by the same amount If you use the default value of 1 no correction is applied Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 19 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 2 6 Meter Setup Alarms Meter Set up Alarms allows you to set alarm limits configure RBX Alarming and view active alarms for the selected meter run 1 Select Meter gt Set up 2 Set Alarming to Enabled in the General tab and click the Alarms tab Refer to Fig
231. ific gravity If necessary the flow is also corrected to the contract pressure and temperature terms NOTE A FloBoss 407 with Version 1 06 or greater firmware supports either the 1985 or the 1992 calculation version depending on which Flash ROM is installed but not both NOTE Two additional Flash ROM chips are available for Measurement Industry Canada versions 1985 and 1992 NOTE A ROCPAC only supports the 1985 calculation type NOTE FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series units only support the 1992 calculation method 5 1 2 1 Alarms You can either enable or disable alarming for each meter run point If you enable alarms the alarms can be configured using the Alarms tab in the Meter Set up screen and are logged to the Alarm Log To optimize processor time alarms should be enabled only when necessary If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this point regardless of the Alarm configuration Alarm conditions display in the Active Alarms fields located in the Meter Set up screen Alarms tab 5 2 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 2 Configuring AGA Parameters Each meter run must be individually configured and each AGA calculation type Calc Type has parameters specific to that type of installation To configure AGA parameters for a meter run 1 Select Meter gt Setup Meter Setup RES General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms
232. igured such as Byte Word Double Word Floating Point or 10 character string Function Codes 3 4 and 6 can contain more data bytes than the other functions Function Codes 15 and 16 can contain up to 240 data bytes The data byte upper limit is 240 bytes FloBoss point types and parameters for Modbus Function Codes 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 and 16 are configured using ROCLINK software Any supported FloBoss 500 Series Point Type and Parameter can be selected for Function Codes 3 4 6 and 16 With one exception described in the next paragraph Function Codes 1 2 5 and 15 are restricted to input and output status point types Table 6 2 provides details of the Modbus Function Codes supported by the FloBoss Function Code 5 can be used to acknowledge an alarm or event request sent by the Host When the FloBoss is polled for the Alarm and Event Logs using Function Code 3 for Register 32 the FloBoss begins to collect twelve points at a time starting where the last poll left off The FloBoss sends the information back to the Host which in return replies with Function Code 5 indicating that the points have been received and the Host is ready for the next twelve points Table 6 2 FloBoss Supported Modbus Function Codes ERC RRE Read Logic Coil Status Obtain current status ON OFF of a group of logic coils outputs Read Discrete Input Status Obtain current status ON OFF of a group of Discrete Inputs Read Output Registers Holding Obt
233. ile is opened or when ROC FloBoss memory is read The Workspace shortcut is lt Ctrl W gt B 8 2 Output FST Activates the Output window The Output view is populated with data when a Compile operation 1s performed or when an FST is read from the ROC or FloBoss The Output shortcut is lt Alt 1 gt Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 13 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 8 3 Tags FST The Tags option provides a list of the Tag names as shown in Figure B 8 and Figure B 9 for each point configured in the ROC or FloBoss Refer to Table B 2 You can select Tags in the following ways 4 gt Select View gt Tags Click the Tags button r Press the Tags shortcut lt Alt Ctrl T gt Press lt Shift gt while in an Argument field Click the F9 button Press lt F9 gt Fixed 41H2 Spare FCI Deflt AO Default DO Default FCI Deflt Spare Spare Spare GO AN Fined Ali EE al 43 Spare IO A4 FCI Def GO Ab AU Default ral AE DU Default Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Figure B 8 Tags Pop up Figure B 9 Tags Menu Listing The cursor keys provide movement within the list and lt Esc gt removes the list from the Workspace In the pop up Figure B 8 double click on an item to choose it and place it in the active cell in the Workspace In the menu listing Figure B 9 double click on an item to choose it and place it in the active cell in the Workspace or drag and drop the item onto t
234. iles are saved in the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data unless you change the directory The files have the following default extensions EFM Electronic Flow Measurement Report Data Collectdata aga or Collectdata det Event Collectdata evt Alarm Collectdata alm Minute Collectdata mdb 10 Minute Collectdata edb Daily History Collectdata day Hourly Periodic History Collectdata pdb gt gt gt The EFM Report Data function retrieves detailed flow data and stores it in API Chapter 21 compliant disk files that have either an AGA or a DET extension The AGA files are created for FloBoss 103 and 500 Series units and are based on eight flow related history points The DET files are created for ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units and they can include an additional 22 history points required for a gas chromatograph When you select EFM Report Data all Flow Configuration History Event Logs Alarm Logs and Audit Logs associated with all meter runs in the ROC or FloBoss are saved NOTE You can view the EFM Report Data by selecting View gt EFM Report When you select Event or Alarm the ROC gt Collect ROC Data function saves all 240 events and 240 alarms Y se NOTE You can view the Event Log or Alarm Log by selecting View gt Alarms or Events 9 2 Saving Retrieving Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual When you select Daily or Hourly H
235. imary Taq Pom Loop Status Primary Discs sl Loop Period 1 50 Scanning r Mode Gan os GG Enabled C Manual Calc Time Da Secs Reset Hu C Disabled fe Auto Rate o Scale Factor Ho Setpoint fo EM AN ails l Integral Deadband fo Process Variable 2526316 DO OpenPt DO A6EU E SPRamp Rate E Output 12 54737 DOClosePt DO ABEU El Manual Tracking Disabled C Enabled Halt PID On Reset Disabled C Enabled E Copy Bols 2 Update Y or x Cancel t ppl Figure A 5 PID Loop Tuning A 6 PID with TDO Control Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 Set the Loop Period as the amount of time between PID calculations second intervals for the Primary loop To provide the best timing this parameter 1s typically set to one fourth of the time required for the actuator to move the valve from fully open to fully closed In this example it takes 60 seconds to move the valve over its range so the Loop Period is set to 15 seconds 5 Set the Gain Proportional Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in input the Primary Process Variable based on control action in which there is a continuous linear relationship between the output and input An initial proportional Gain setting of 0 2 is recommended to avoid loop instability Initially set to these values and change later if tuning is required 6 Set the Reset Integral Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the
236. in Override Control on page 6 12 3 Enter the Setpoint around which the Override Process Variable is controlled 10 11 Enter the current value of the Process Variable which is determined by the input definition The value is used for comparison to the Setpoint When in Manual mode you may enter a value to be in line with the Setpoint so there is not a harsh bump at startup When in Auto Mode enter the Output for the current value of the Primary output from the PID control expressed in engineering units When in Manual Mode the value desired for the Primary output from the PID control expressed in engineering units Select the Override PV input point defined as the process variable for the Override loop of the PID algorithm Specify the DO Closed Pt desired for the Discrete Output point to close the valve or other device Select the Override PV input point defined as the process variable for the Override loop of the PID algorithm Select the Override Output Analog Output point to be assigned as the control output for the Override loop of the PID algorithm Select the Override Switch PV input point assigned for comparison with the Override Switch Setpoint This value determines when switchover to the Primary control loop occurs Refer to Section Tuning PID Parameters on page 6 14 6 6 4 Tuning PID Parameters Configure the Primary Loop and the Override Loop independently 1 2 3 6 14 Select Configure gt C
237. in the ROC or FloBoss The Point Number is automatically assigned by the ROC and cannot be edited Certain Point Numbers designate diagnostic inputs For a FloBoss 500 Series all Point Numbers designated with a B are located on the I O Card For ROC300 Series and FloBoss 407 units the points are in the same order as the I O modules installed in the slots proceeding left to right in each rack and top to bottom For example Four points of this type in a ROC364 might have Point Numbers A7 A12 B3 and B3 Point Numbers designate with a E are diagnostic inputs NOTE When configuring similar point types use the Copy and Paste options to speed configuration Each Point Number is given a Tag which includes up to 10 characters to identify the Point Number being defined in the UO screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used If necessary the Unit of measurement is defined for the Tag Units is a 10 character name for the engineering units assigned to the I O For example PSIG MCF degrees F milliamps or volts Table 4 1 Input and Output Point Numbers E Discrete Analog Input Analog Output Discrete Input Output Pulse Input ROC306 and A1 Al 1 A4 A5 A6 DO Default A4 AN ROC312 A2 Al 2 Switched E6 Aux Out 1 Switched A3 Al 3 though the though the E1 Al Spare Advanced Advanced E2 Power In Features in Features in voltage ROC Flags ROC Flags E3 Al Spare E4
238. ing Basic I O 4 11 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 8 Enter the EU Value At intervals determined by the Scan Period parameter the EU Value is calculated using the 0 Pulse Width 100 Pulse Width Low Reading EU High Reading EU and Actual Pulse Width parameters If Scanning is set to Disabled the normal TDI calculation is suspended and a value can be manually entered Enter the Units as a 10 character name for the engineering units assigned to the TDI input For example MCF or CFM 4 5 DO Discrete Output Configuration A Discrete Output may be set to send a pulse to a specified device DOs are high low outputs used to turn equipment On and Off For a FloBoss 103 or 500 Series the built in DO is often used in the TDO mode for sending pulses to a sampler or odorizer A Discrete Output can be configured in one of several different modes Latched Momentary Toggle Timed Duration Output TDO and TDO Toggle 1 Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points Refer to Figure Discrete Output El ES General Advanced Discrete Outputs v Point Number fa 4 Tag po Default Status Momentary C On Off On pif DOUT Type 7 Scanning Latched C Toggle Ge Enabled Disabled C Time Duration TDO Toggle Time On Active Alarms Dm Secs None Copy Lo Faste 2 Update Iw o x Cancel P Apply Figure 4 8 Discrete Outputs 2 Set the Status Status is both an indicator and a c
239. ing a disk file E E ZS Connect the ROC or FloBoss to the PC running ROCLINK software Select Utilities gt FST Editor Select File gt Read FST Select From File Open an existing FST file with the FST extension Fill in each STEP with the appropriate values The LABEL fields are optional and are generally only used when the STEP branches to another STEP using the GO command 7 Select a command CMD using F9 10 11 12 13 14 Select ARGUMENT1 using F9 The Tag automatically displays Select the Parameter using F10 Select ARGUMENT 2 using F9 The Tag automatically displays Select the Parameter using F10 Enter the END command at the end of your FST Select Write from the FST File menu Type a File name and click Save Y NOTE You can also create a new FST on line and then save the FST to a disk file B 7 1 2 Using an ASCII Text Editor It 1s possible to copy an FST file and edit 1t using an ASCII text editor before loading into a ROC or FloBoss 1 Open an existing FST file with the FST extension in an ASCII text editor Note that the text editor must not convert or add any characters such as converting tab characters to spaces When adding new lines functions to the FST use line copy to make sure all lines have the correct length Any other editing should be done in an overstrike mode to keep lines the correct length Save the text file as a pure ASCII file with the extension FST Star
240. int tracks the Process Variable when the loop is in Manual mode This is typically used to eliminate a bump when transferring back to the Automatic mode NOTE For a FloBoss 103 or a FloBoss 500 Series unit manual tracking is available on the Primary Loop only Set Halt PID On Reset to Enabled and the PID control loop shuts down upon a reset of the ROC such as a power restart or a Warm Start Set Override Type Select to Low or High Use Low Select when the Primary change in output is less than or equal to the Override change in output Use the High Select when the Primary change is output is greater than or equal to the Override change in output FloBoss 500 Series 6 6 4 1 Primary Loop Tuning When you use the Tuning button in the PID Parameters screen shown in Figure 6 8 a dialog box appears that lets you configure the Primary loop Refer to Figure 1 Enter the Loop Period as the amount of time between PID calculations second intervals for the Primary loop This is typically set to 1 5 seconds to ensure that an updated Primary Process Variable is received for each PID calculation FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series 2 Enter the Proportional Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in input the Rev 05 03 Primary Process Variable based on control action in which there is a continuous linear relationship between the output and input An initial proportional Gain setting of 0 2 is recommended to avoid loop instabili
241. ints gt Advanced tab Discrete Output General Advanced TOO Parameters Accumulated Value a Status on Power Reset Off Ge Retain Last Status Copy Le Paste Update v o Cancel t Apply Figure 4 9 Discrete Outputs Advanced 2 Enter the Accumulated Value as the number of On to Off transitions of the Discrete Output The accumulator is a 32 bit number with a maximum count of 4 294 967 295 The accumulator can be preset by entering the desired value or cleared by entering zero 3 Select the Status on Power Reset parameter When set to Off the Status parameter is cleared and set to Off upon a reset of the ROC such as a power restart or a Warm Start When set to Retain Last Status the last output value is used after a Warm Start or a power restart for the Status 4 Click Apply 5 After configuring a point click Apply Use Write to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM in the ROC Flags display to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a Cold Start 4 14 Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 5 1 2 TDO Parameters The TDO Parameters tab only becomes accessible when one of the DOUT Types Timed Duration or TDO Toggle is selected in the Discrete Outputs screen Refer to Appendix AJ PID with TDO Control 1 Configure gt I O gt DO Points gt TDO Parameters tab Discrete Output General Advanced TOO Parameters Cycle Time 15 00
242. inutes of the Integral Multiplier Value IMV in the flow equation as described in the API measurement standard Chapter 21 Section 1 The Integral Value IV portion of the flow equation is calculated once per second This value must be an integer divider of 60 such as 1 2 3 5 6 10 12 20 30 or 60 For a FloBoss 103 or 500 Series Turbine unit enter the Base Multiplier Period bmp to indicate the frequency of calculations in units The Base Multiplier Period bmp is the amount of time in minutes between calculations of the combined correctional factors called the Base Multiplier Value BMV in the API measurement standard Chapter 21 Section 1 The BMV is multiplied by the actual uncorrected volume to arrive at the quantity accumulated for the period To determine if flow was occurring over the Base Multiplier Period the number of counts over the period is viewed If there is an absence of counts or the bmp is set shorter than the normal time it takes to get a pulse the following occurs Meter run is defined in a No Flow condition Accumulated flow is stored as zero for historical data over that time period Energy is stored as zero for historical data over that time period For example The Base Multiplier Period is set to 2 minutes but a pulse only occurs once every 5 minutes If there are counts then the accumulated flow and energy are calculated and accumulated for historical data over that time period To ensur
243. ions the dialog box shows you the Freeze Value of each meter input for purposes of data logging while the change is being made All I O values are held in Manual mode at the current value The values are returned to an active state after clicking OK in the Plate Change dialog box Refer to Figure Meter ID 1 sl Meter Tag AGAT Will Plate Change Be Under Flowing Conditions fe Ces e H e Diff Pressure 24 812500 Static Pressure 24 812500 Temperature 24 843750 Pipe Diameter 8 071 Inches Orifice Diameter H Inches Y KIX Cancel t Apply Figure 5 26 Meter Plate Change under Flowing Conditions 5 Enter the new exact size for the Orifice Diameter Inches or Millimeters in the new plate Click Apply to record the change creating a record in the Event Log and restarts the flow calculation using the new orifice size data 7 Click OK Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 29 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 30 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SECTION 6 EXTENDED FUNCTIONS This section describes how to configure a FloBoss or ROC to perform the extended functions used in a meter run 6 1 Soft Points Softpoints are storage areas for data or are used to pass configuration information to an FST and a user program For example a Softpoint may be used to store the results of a specified calculation by an FST or to store an intermediate result of a specifie
244. istory the ROC gt Collect Data function saves Hourly and Daily Historical data for all parameters configured in the history database Upto 15 for a FloBoss 103 or FloBoss 500 Series Upto 50 for a FloBoss 407 Upto 90 for a ROC300 Series NOTE You can view the history logs by selecting View gt History Selecting All collects data for all options in the ROC gt Collect Data screen Refer to Figure 9 3 Viewing and Saving the Audit Log The Audit Log is available 1f the ROC or FloBoss is a Canadian Custody Transfer unit To view and save the Audit Log 1 Select View gt Audit Log gt From ROC You can also display a Audit Log that has been saved to a disk file The Audit Log has the log extension 2 Click Save and either accept the default File name or enter a new File name The files are saved in the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data unless you change the directory 3 Click Save NOTE You can also save the Audit Log using the EFM Report Data function in the ROC gt Collect Data screen Rev 05 03 Saving Retrieving 9 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 9 4 Save The Save option saves the current configuration of a connected ROC or FloBoss to a disk file In addition to backup this feature 1s useful when multiple ROCs requiring similar configura tions are being configured for the first time or when configuration changes need to be made off line Once a backup configuration
245. l 4 4 DI Discrete Input Configuration Discrete Inputs come from relays switches and other devices which generate an on off open close or high low signal 1 Select Configure gt I O gt DI Points Refer to Figure Discrete Inputs General Advanced TDI Parameters Alarms Discrete Inputs fi Point Number Pa Tag Di Default Scan Period 3 00 C Standard Latched Time Duration TD COn Off bes Staus e i Scanning l Alarming Ge Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Active Alarms Figure 4 5 Discrete Inputs 2 Select the Discrete Input and Point Number 3 Enter the Tag identification name 4 Select the DIN Type to determine how this Discrete Input functions Select Standard if you want the Discrete Input status to follow the actual field input Select Latched if you want the Discrete Input status on an active transition of the input from Off to On to change to On and remain in that state until it is cleared To be cleared the Status parameter must be changed to the Off state either by the software or manually If the DI has the Input Inverted field set the field input is inverted in the Status field On becomes Off and vice versa When using a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 unit select Time Duration TDD if you want the Discrete Input to function as a TDI For TDIs the time that the DI is active versus the time it is inactive i
246. l B performs continuous detection and warning of errors as 1t compares one pulse train against the other If the frequency of the pulses falls below 101 Hz the SM defaults to a simulated Level C until the frequency increases above 111 Hz Sensor alarms are produced and logged as indicated in Table 5 1 Level C This level of fidelity checking requires a dual pulse train Both pulse inputs on the SM of the FloBoss 304 must be used Level C allows automatic detection and warning of errors as it compares one pulse train against the other at approximately one second intervals Sensor alarms are produced and logged as indicated in Table 5 1 Level D This level of fidelity checking uses only a single pulse train Only one pulse input on the SM of the FloBoss 504 is used Level D allows manual detection of errors as the results of the pulse train calculations are compared by an operator against a mechanical readout user supplied at specified intervals Level E This level of fidelity checking uses only a single pulse train Only one pulse input on the SM of the FloBoss 504 is used The pulses are counted but no comparison is performed for error detection integrity depends solely on the quality of the equipment Table 5 1 Sensor Alarms Sequence Out of Order Error Sequence Received a pulse on the same channel as the last pulse Level A or B Phase Discrepancy Error Phase The phase between pulse streams was incorrect Level A or B
247. l through an entire FST of up to 300 0 299 Steps The Header Line of the Workspace contains the Function Structure column names The STEP column contains the numbers 0 through 299 which correspond to the number of rows or steps available in the Workspace The LABEL CMD ARGUMENTI and ARGUMENT columns correspond to the structure of the functions Rev 05 03 Table B 1 Workspace and Output Keystrokes Key TT een FST Editor B 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 4 Function Structure Each function consists of a STEP number a LABEL a command CMD and up to two Arguments ARGUMENTI and ARGUMENT 2 as shown in Figure BA STEP LABEL ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 Figure B 4 FST Function Structure The FST program provides the STEP numbers 0 299 for each FST You complete the other fields in the structure to build a function NOTE Do not skip any STEPs The FST program treats a blank STEP as the END of a program and will not compile correctly B 4 1 Label The LABEL field allows you to uniquely identify a function and consists of up to six alphanumeric characters in any combination A LABEL identifies the action being performed by the function For example The LABEL PUMPON describes a function that activates a pump LABELS enable referencing of one function to another called branching For example after completion of a given program STEP a GO command that has a LABEL provided in ARGUMENTI directs the pro
248. l x Cancel H Appi Figure 4 11 Pulse Inputs FloBoss 500 Series Figure 4 12 Pulse Inputs FloBoss 407 and ROC300 Series with FlashPAC 2 Enter the EU Value that is dependent on how the EU Options are set in the PI Advanced tab Ifthe PI is set up for a Rate Max Rollover then the Current Rate is the EU Value Ifthe PI is set up for an accumulator using Today s Total Max Rollover then Today s Total is the EU Value Ifthe PI is set up for accumulator using Running Total Entered Rollover the EU Value corresponds to the accumulated pulses for the contract day times the Conversion The EU Value is compared to the value entered for the rollover maximum If it is greater than or equal to this entered value the EU Value here is reset to zero Refer to PI Advanced in Section on page 4 18 3 Enter the Scan Period as the amount of time between scans of the EU Value in second intervals The default value is 5 seconds The rate calculation is performed based on the number of pulses counted during the scan interval divided by the time interval To avoid highly fluctuating calculation results there should typically be at least 10 pulses occurring between scans at low flow conditions more than 10 is a minimum for slow pulses In addition longer Scan Periods reduce the loading on the processor For example If a flow meter produces one pulse per second at low flow then the Scan Period should be set to a minimum of 10 seconds
249. lay2 The ROC Displayl and Display2 options read a display 21 lines from the ROC translate the data fields and perform an initial update on the data If gt this display was not saved from the build display function as Display1 or Display2 the screen appears blank and you may create a new custom display Refer to Figure C 1 C 1 4 Creating a Display Example The following is an example for setting up a display that monitors Analog Inputs for specific points in a FloBoss or ROC 1 Select New from the Display option under the View menu 2 Click the Character Set button 3 Use the Character drop down list box to display Character Set 2 4 Place the cursor in the top left corner of the screen as shown in Figure C 2 Z RocLink For Windows Al dsp losa theo my UE Ss As Vee PE Figure C 2 New Display Example 1 Type A Use the Character drop down list box to display Character Set 1 Place the cursor to the right of the A you typed previously and type nalog Use the Character drop down list box to display Character Set 2 66 99 66 99 Place your cursor to the right of the g in Analog and type I Leave a space between the g and the T 10 Use the Character drop down list box to display Character Set 1 eS N o oo A 11 Place your cursor to the right of the I and type nputs and press lt Enter gt Your screen should look like Figure C 3 e NOTE To save time you can c
250. lculation and click Apply for a FloBoss 500 Series unit to cause a full recalculation of the flow without waiting for the next normal recalculation Normal recalculation periods are established in Meter Set up screen using the Integral Multiplier Period or the Base Multiplier Period Upon forcing a recalculation the accumulations are zeroed and the flow value is logged as a new entry The Force Recalculation parameter is automatically set to Clear after the recalculation Select the Pressure Tap or Static Press used in this meter run Select Gauge or Absolute as the way of measuring pressure at the static pressure tap This choice must match the way the static pressure input is actually measured by the sensor The MVS Multi Variable Sensor and DVS Dual Variable Sensor can be ordered with a FloBoss to provide either absolute or gauge measurements Select Upstream or Downstream to indicate the location of the static pressure tap in relation to the orifice and normal flow The MVS and DVS sensors normally use an upstream location For Downstream operation refer to Section Select Flange or Pipe to indicate the type of pressure taps in this meter run For a 1992 AGA calculation select Flange For 1985 select either Pipe or Flange Select the API 5 5 for the 1992 Turbine ISO Calc Type the API 5 5 choices for pulse fidelity checking also called integrity or security are the same Level A through Level E Select Static Press as Gau
251. lect the configuration File name with the extension FCF FloBoss FlashPAC or DCF ROCPAC 4 Click Open 5 Select the Point Types you desire to download Use Select All or DeSelect All to change multiple Point Types Select or DeSelect individual Point Types by selecting the configuration Point Type in the left hand column and selecting specific Point Types in the right hand column 9 4 Saving Retrieving Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual NOTE The Configuration Points screen changes depending on the type of device that you have connected 6 Select only the Configuration Points you desire to download 7 Click Download The Configuration Points automatically begin to download 8 Click OK when the download 1s complete 9 7 Convert Files The Convert Files option converts the existing ROC history files to a spreadsheet format file for easy file exportation Convert Files 1s located under the Utilities menu The following categories of data logs can be converted into a spreadsheet format 4 4 4 Minute History File extension MDB Hourly History File extension PDB Daily History File extension DAY Select Utilities gt Convert Files Click the El button to select the File to Convert All applicable history files found in the default C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data directory display These files must have been created either by using the Collect Data function or by using the Save func
252. led whenever the input voltage to the ROC or FloBoss falls below the specified threshold For a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 the default value is 11 volts For a FloBoss 500 Series the default value is 11 5 volts For a FloBoss 103 the default value is 6 2 volts Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 19 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 11 The Power Timer counts down the amount of time On Time Off Time or Hold Time that the Radio Control is currently using The value is the number of seconds or minutes remaining as indicated Note that the time is accurate to 0 2 seconds 12 The On Counter value indicates the cumulative time that the Power Control has been in the ON state 13 The Off Counter value indicates the cumulative time that the Power Control has been in the OFF state 14 Select the Output Definition ROC300 Series with newer FlashPAC or FloBoss 407 Refer to Section For a FloBoss 103 or FloBoss 500 Series unit the output cannot be defined however it is available as a DO style of control when an EIA 232 RS 232 serial communications card is installed Make sure that if a Spontaneous Report By Exception RBX message needs to be sent to the host computer the radio power is turned on accordingly The radio power should stay on long enough to allow the ROC to receive a response back from the host At least three requests should be present during the On Time that a radio is active Some of the On Time is also used by the r
253. line is one greater than the Ending Register address of the previous line a continuous data table can be created up for Modbus Function 3 4 or 16 up to the limit of 240 bytes This type of data table allows access to all its data with one request Up to fifteen different lines can also be configured for Modbus Function Codes 1 2 5 6 and 15 For Function Codes 1 2 5 and 15 the parameter specified should be a single byte parameter type preferably a status parameter only bit 0 is used because this function packs the data into a binary format for transmission Each address span must be unique within the function for proper operation If not the first valid address 1s used 1 Select Configure gt Modbus gt Modbus Registers Registers Function Number Function Name Function 1 1 Starting Register Ending Register Conversion Serial Humber foro fora m Indexing 5 Point Param DO A4STAT TLP Copy Le Paste Update lv o A Cancel och Figure 6 17 Modbus Register Definition Refer to Table concerning Modbus Register Definition defaults Table 6 8 Modbus Register Definition Defaults Function ROC FloBoss Code Parameter 1070 1070 2 3 3 Point 0 0 0 0 0 Point 3 0 14 46 128 51 47 128 0 Row Starting Register Ending Register Indexing Conversion 46 128 15 4 0 0 0 0 0 Point 5 1 1070 1070 2 3 3 Point 1 6 7052 7059 3 0 14 Point 2 7100 7102 46 128 51 Param 2 3 4 4
254. ll female connector for the ROC300 Series units The other end of the cable plugs into a serial communications port on the PC running ROCLINK software This connector is a 9 pin D shell female connector By default the LOI Port is Comm Tag Local Port in the ROC menu s Comm Port Settings screen Use the Direct Connect command to connect using the LOI The Direct Connect option in the ROC menu allows you to connect with the ROC or FloBoss quickly if the default EE communication parameters apply For the Direct Connect option to work security conditions must be met and the IBM compatible personal computer PC must be connected to the Local Operator LOI port of the ROC or FloBoss with communication settings of 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity 1 8 Getting Started Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The Direct Connect command causes ROCLINK software to initiate communications with the ROC or FloBoss by performing a search of the PC communication ports at various baud rates Direct Connect then locks on to the first Comm Port and Baud Rate that are successful in communicating with a FloBoss or ROC unit 1 6 2 Remote Hardware Connection Comm 1 and Comm 2 To connect the computer to a remotely located ROC or FloBoss a serial or dial up modem communications line must be installed This connection is typically made through the host port Comm 1 or Comm 2 on the ROC or FloBoss Use the Connect command to conn
255. lue information displays in the Print Configuration results window 9 6 Saving Retrieving Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual APPENDIX A PID WITH TDO CONTROL EXAMPLE The PID Proportional Integral and Derivative control algorithm in a ROC or FloBoss 1s configurable as a Discrete Output control device for motorized applications Two Discrete Outputs are required one for open forward control and the other for close reverse control In addition feedback process variable required for the loop is configured as an Analog Input The correction calculated by the PID algorithm is sent to one of the two Discrete Outputs each of which is configured as a TDO Timed Duration Output The magnitude of the correction determines the amount of time that a DO is energized If the correction is positive it is routed to the open forward DO If the correction is negative 1t is sent to the close reverse DO A 1 Configuration Procedure The steps in configuring the system for Discrete Output control are 1 Configure the process variable which is the Analog Input Refer to page 2 Configure the open forward Discrete Output Refer to page AR 3 Configure the close reverse Discrete Output Refer to page 4 Configure the PID control Refer to page The following configuration example controls a motorized actuator on a valve and uses the valve stem position as feedback process variable for the control loop A 2 Process Variable
256. ly pulses The units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or 1000 cubic meters per day KM day if the Metric conversion is enabled If Manual appears the Values field can be used to enter an engineering units value for the meter input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value based on non adjusted pulses from the turbine meter Select Stacked DP Enabled when using a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series to use stacked differential pressure transmitters used for low and high pressure ranges Select Averaging Techniques when using a FloBoss 500 Series Refer to Section 6 2 1 1 9 Click the Low DP Input TLP button to assign the input for monitoring low differential 10 9 6 pressure when using a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series The Stacked DP parameter must be Enabled for this input to be used This input may be left in Manual mode Enter the Low DP SetPoint to determine when switchover to the low differential pressure input occurs when using a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series The units assumed for the input are inches of water column InH gt 0 or kPa if Metric conversion is enabled Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 11 Enter the High DP SetPoint to determine when switchover to the high differential pressure input occurs when using a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series The units assumed for the input are inches of water column InH20 or kPa if Metric conversion is enabled
257. module retainer by placing the retainer over the module and tightening the two thumbscrews 3 18 Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 12 13 14 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Apply power to the ROC by replacing the power Bat Bat terminal block Click Continue If you have a Measurement Canada ROC and your Audit Log is full click Yes to save your Audit Log to a disk file You may enter a new name for the Audit Log or override an existing Audit Log Click No to continue or click Yes to install User Programs Wait while the ROC reloads your configuration Click Close when the configuration files are loaded Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 19 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 3 20 Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SECTION 4 CONFIGURING BASIC I O In order to configure a ROC or FloBoss to perform basic functions you must configure several ROC or FloBoss functions and parameters specific to input and output I O points 4 1 Basic Configuration Overview Configuring a ROC or FloBoss is a matter of establishing points and then configuring various parameters Each input and output has a unique Point Number to identify the input or output Each I O point parameter must be individually configured Refer to Table concerning I O Point Numbers The Point Number typically indicates the location of the point such as rack and module number or I O Card
258. n move without affecting the output Enter the SP Ramp Rate as the maximum rate per minute at which the Setpoint and thus the Primary Process Variable is allowed to ramp to a new value After configuring a point and clicking Apply use Write to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM in the ROC Flags display to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section Override Loop Tuning on page 6 16 6 6 4 2 Override Loop Tuning When you use the Tuning button in the PID Parameters screen shown in Figure 6 8 a dialog box appears that lets you configure the Override loop Refer to Figure 1 6 16 Enter the Loop Period as the amount of time between PID calculations in second intervals This is typically set to 1 5 seconds to ensure that an updated Primary Process Variable is received for each PID calculation FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series Enter the Proportional Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in input Override Process Variable based on control action in which there is a continuous linear relationship between the output and input An initial proportional Gain setting of 0 2 is recommended to avoid loop instability Enter the Reset Integral Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in input Override Process Variable based on control action in which the output is proportional to the time integral of the input An initial Reset setting of 3 is rec
259. n their specified sequence The normal top to bottom sequence may be altered by certain decision making functions such as 1f then statements loops or comparison values that you establish Each FST may consist of as many functions as can fit into the memory reserved for the FSTs Reserved memory is pre determined by the ROC or FloBoss An FST is built from a library of commands that provide mathematical and logical operations database access operations testing and branching operations and control related operations Each FST contains ten Registers By default FSTs automatically write and read all results to and from the Results Register RR unless you manually tell the FST in the Argument fields to store or acquire the value from FST Registers R1 to R10 The Registers can store calculated or manually entered values and can pass data from one table to another That is the FST can write values to the FST Register and the FST can also read the values stored in the FST Register storage points These Registers may be read from or written to any FST configured for the ROC or FloBoss and are referred to as Register R1 through Register R10 The FST Registers can be used to store temporary values acquired from a calculated process that was polled by the ROC or FloBoss You may also enter a static value in a FST Register and read that value into an FST to set a process to a specific value 1 Select Configure gt Control gt FST Register Refer to
260. n using a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 series with a FlashPAC and a remote Mult1 Variable Sensor MVS interface version 1 04 or greater To perform bi directional flow configure one AGA meter run to use a downstream pressure tap and a second AGA meter run to use an upstream pressure tap The MVS uses an upstream pressure tap and Reverse DP to compensate for the negative differential pressure reading in reverse flow mode To configure ROCLINK for Windows to archive bi directional flow 1 Connect ROCLINK for Windows to the FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC Select Meter gt Setup Select a meter run to be configured for archiving reverse flow from the Point Number drop down list box Refer to Figure 5 11 Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual i Leed apes Bes e nc Point Number AAA Ps geg ES bipm Bags bannen ft mae E Tat Tee L rss Jr aes pi Figure 5 11 Meter Setup General 4 Enter a Meter Description name for the reverse flow 5 Click the Advanced tab Refer to Figure 5412 Downstream Figure 5 12 Meter Setup Advanced Downstream Select the Downstream Pressure Tap radio button Click the Inputs tab In the Differential Pressure I O Definition field select MVS Interface DP Reverse Flow Click Apply 10 Select a meter run to be configured for archiving forward flow from the Point Number drop down list box
261. n will open From this screen you can save print invert data or close the log report 3 If you select History the Select History Points to be Shown screen will open This will produce a complete History report from the on line ROC or FloBoss To create a report between specific dates refer to Section Error Reference source not found 7 10 Configuring and Viewing History Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Select the History Points in the Search Criteria field Select Deselect All and Select All allow you to mass select or deselect History Points The Search Criteria selections change depending on the Frequency Select the Frequency of values to view You can view Minute Hourly Hour Daily Day or Minimum and Maximum Min Max values The Minute History database option displays the values for history points other than FST controlled logged in the ROC or FloBoss for the last 60 minutes in one minute increments from the current minute The values are always displayed with the most recent value first The Hour History sometimes called historical or periodical database option displays the values for history points other than FST controlled logged in the ROC or FloBoss at hourly intervals for the past 35 days The Hour log contains up to 840 entries and is archived at the top of every hour at the latest The values always display with the most recent value first The Day History Daily History database option displays
262. n your best interest not to turn one FST off or on by using another FST as you may not know the current state of the FST Use wait states WT command to suspend operation of the FST whenever possible to reduce MPU processor overload Itis in your best interest to refrain from using loops if possible Use END commands in place of loops The two most typical errors that occur when creating FSTs are 1 The FST is configured to acquire data from an undefined I O Parameter All I O Parameters and Point Types must be defined in ROCLINK software before they can be referenced by an FST 2 The FST is configured to go to GO command a LABEL that does not exist When using the GO command ensure that you have defined the LABEL that you are referencing with the GO command To use Multi Variable Sensor MVS parameters static pressure differential pressure or temperature in an FST the parameters must first be assigned to an AGA flow point Once this is done the MVS parameters can be referenced in the FST by specifying the current value of the AGA point CURDP CURFP or CURTMP parameter NOTE Before upgrading from a ROCPAC module to a FlashPAC or newer ROCPAC ROC300 Series only all FSTs should be saved to disk Write FST After the new FlashPAC module is installed the FSTs should be loaded Read FST and Compile back into the ROC Failure to do so can result in improper or unexpected operation upon restart Rev 05 03 FST Edi
263. nccnnncnons 6 24 RE Sci ss 6 30 6 31 A ee eege 6 25 Ke 6 23 eet tee 5 28 A 5 Ee GIG EE 8 3 8 9 eent eet eher LEE 8 5 POU EE 2 2 A A AE ENES 8 10 Mone EE 5 12 Monitor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual A SEE ERE ERE ene et oe ENN B 16 B 17 Le EE EE 4 19 MON l EE 3 1 Most Significant Byte First nrerin anse 6 24 MPSS O 3 11 MSG WESSAG Surco ita B 19 B 25 B 36 Multi Variable Sensor SES MI Vir is 6 4 MN Senon ce dvenlorenticicbonacaceebeieseedawaaseues 5 12 Actron on Frans 6 6 e e 6 5 Alarm Fault Valie ii ae 6 7 RE EE 6 7 lr VARER Ee 5 28 DEEP Pres SU EE 6 5 Diff Pressure Alas e 6 6 DPA er EE 6 7 MULES WA EE 6 6 better 6 4 Multi Variable Sensor 6 4 EE 6 5 Pressure AO EE 6 6 Pressure Tap Loca Midas 6 6 REX A ee ee 6 6 Reverse DP eco 6 5 A CO 6 5 SEA ea 6 5 AAA A son BANE FANE 6 6 Sensor CE ONE CULATION ee 6 4 SEAS ere based Sele EE 6 6 EE 6 5 A A he 6 5 Temperature Alaris noiiire ali 6 6 A II A Eege 6 5 A te ea tite tts canis tata esdeeenataeiee 6 5 N NEW EE 1 12 Eege C 1 l STEE 1 13 No e EE 8 13 None ONG E GEN 3 3 A EPE AAE B 19 B 21 Noteu E B 29 Number ol REIES eeraa eee 8 4 NXT Meth OG WEE 5 2 5 10 5 11 O COUME EE 6 20 OR Een EE 6 19 RI e EE 6 18 On Alarm Clear AAA 4 5 5 20 6 6 8 15 On Alarma Seti HASAN 4 5 5 20 6 6 8 15 On Alarm Set and Clear 4 5 5 20 6 6 8 15 Rev 05 03 ARAS A gul senere teeny rte 6 20 A ene eee een cman E ne mC RanE CR E Fo 6 1
264. nfiguring and Viewing History 7 11 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Invert View the log in reverse order default is newest to oldest This changes the time order of the Alarm Event or Audit Log Save Save the report to a file Print Print the report Close Close the screen 7 12 Configuring and Viewing History Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual SECTION 8 CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS This section describes how to Connect Disconnect and use Direct Connect to communicate to a ROC or FloBoss using ROCLINK for Windows software Before attempting to connect to a ROC or FloBoss configure communication parameters in two places ROC Communication Parameter Setup Use the ROC Directory files to set up communication ports on the computer running ROCLINK software Refer to Section R ROC Directory Comm Ports Use the ROC Comm Ports to set up communication ports available for incoming or outgoing communications with the ROC or FloBoss 8 1 Communication Parameters on the Computer The ROC Root directory within ROCLINK for Windows provides a way to create and maintain individual communications setup files for ROC and FloBoss units When you install ROCLINK for Windows ROC COMM1 ROC COMM2 and Modem ROC display you can use these communications setup files or you can create new files Refer to Section A ROC Directory The computer communications setup files allow ROCLINK for Windows to c
265. nononanccnnnanonnnos Section 8 Configuring Communications sssccccccccsssssccccccccssssssscccccecsssscscccsessess 8 1 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS ON THE COMPUTER ccccssssssccceceeeseecceeeaeeeeeccesaeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeaas 8 1 8 2 COMMUNICATION PORTS ON THE ROC OR FLOBOSS ooccccccnccoocccnnnnnononcnnnnnnnnncnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 8 5 8 3 CONNECTING TO AROC OR FLOBOSS ee EE EE 8 15 Section 9 Saving Retrieving Configurations ccccccccccccssssssssscssscccccccccsssscsscsees 9 1 9 1 SAVE TO EEPROM AND INTERNAL CONFIGURATION MEMORY 9 1 92 COLEECTDATA kee 9 2 9 3 VIEWING AND SAVING THE AUDIT LOG EE 9 3 9 4 E 9 4 9 5 EE EE 9 4 iv Table of Contents Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 20 DONEO EE 9 4 9 7 CONVERT ug 9 5 9 8 PRINTE EEN 9 6 Appendix A PID with TDO Control Example ccccssssssssccccccccccssssssssceees A 1 Ad CONFIGURATION BROCE EE A I A 2 PROCESS VARIABLE CONFIGURATION ccccccssssssseeeecccceeaeeesseeececccessaeessseececesessaeeesseeeeeeeseuaaeessses A 1 A 3 OPEN FORWARD DISCRETE OUTPUT CONFIGURATION ccccccsssssccceeceeeeeecceceaesececeesaeeeceeesaeenes A 2 AA CLOSE REVERSE DISCRETE OUTPUT CONFIGURATION cccccoonnnocccnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnarnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos A 4 Ao PID PARAMETERS E EC DEE EE A 4 APPIA BES MUON ee E E TE E F B 1 FUNCTION SEQUENCE TABLE INTRODUCTION cccccccooccnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns E
266. nononoss 3 4 A A ES E E A E OS B 10 Restore Config amp Clear Alarm Log events 3 3 Config amp Clear All of the above 3 3 3 4 Conie alear PS EE 3 3 Config amp Clear History incas eeneg 3 3 Config amp Clear ROC Displays ees 3 3 Config from Flash defaults oocoocccccccnco 3 3 Results Regester B 2 B 3 A EEA E AEAT UDDELES FEET RE TT B 1 Retain Last Stats 4 14 A A 8 4 Retrieve EEN 9 1 Retrieving Configurations occcccccnncnccnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnss 9 1 Retry EI E 8 13 EE 8 13 Eeer 8 12 REVISION e e EE 3 11 ROC EE 2 4 Nee 2 3 3 8 8 1 TE 1 14 3 1 COMIN BORES ida 8 8 Communication Barameterg 2 2 Communications Port Sep 8 5 Delete TEE 2 5 Dels ene 2 5 Pl ai lili 3 4 E A ege 2 3 3 8 8 1 a A A T ate SEEREN TEDE 3 8 I 13 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Menorca a B 10 An 6 36 A ect ps es eae A 2 5 ROC SOC ily anne ona 3 11 ROO ec one ee 2 2 EE 3 11 3 13 EEN e 2 1 Computer Communicaions Setup 8 2 DISPO iio 2 2 ROC TAGS unta ideas 1 14 3 4 Advanced Fe tures ido 3 6 ROC Information A teeta a tees eee Nar ret tl 3 9 ROC Menu A A E E A A A A 3 1 Colec EE 9 2 Comm Portz 8 5 8 8 8 9 8 11 8 12 Comm Ports Modbus ccoocccnccnnoccnoccnnccnnoconinonanos 8 11 O E arced cee sate 8 16 Direc Oe 1 Va EE 1 8 Kee EE 8 16 lettre 3 2 9 1 A A AA 3 8 SEENEN elas 3 13 ROO eos 2 1 Computer Communicaions Setup 8 2 DO O als 2 2 ROCLINK PROTEC SS EEN 2 3 8 2 A eege e
267. ns General Settings Bo IT Clear EEPROM Ba COR Sec HF Write to EEPROM old Star T FST Display Clear COM User Program Op Port User Program Ce Inactive Active Active Option 2 Active Option 3 Cold Start Options m COM User Program fasen DRS 2 Inactive Active Active Active Option 2 Active Option 2 Active Option 3 Active Option 3 Cale User Prograrn Ce Inactive C Active Active Option 2 Active Option 3 LCD User Prograrn Ce Inactive C Active Active Option 2 Active Option 3 Write Clear Status r 2 Update Iw ok Xx Cancel Forge Figure 9 1 ROC Flags ROC300 Series with FlashPAC 2 Select Write to EEPROM or Write to Internal Config memory and click Apply Rev 05 03 Saving Retrieving 9 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 9 2 Collect Data Use ROC gt Collect Data to save various ROC data to disk files After selecting Collect ROC Data select the data you want to save Refer to Figure Collect ROC Data HE Collect ROC Data For sAD ataXCollectdata det IT EFM Report Data rogram Files ROCLINE for Window IS Event rogram Files ROCLINE for windows D ataYCollectdata ewt El I Alarm rogram Files ROCLINK for Windows D ata Collectdata alm Di Figure 9 2 Collect ROC Data Use the Es button to display the Save As dialog box You can either accept the default File name or enter a new File name The f
268. nsion RAM2 61 90 If ARGUMENT2 is a floating database value For Otherwise ARG2 ARG2 1 example FST1 FST SEQ 1 R8 the command For all other cases increments ARGUMENT2 to the next historical E database value and sets it to O when the number of Ee archived historical periods are exceeded out in Otherwise no effect occurs to ARGUMENT2 Write Time To Historical Database sets the value of 1 Database or For FST History Point the database point ARGUMENT1 and the pointer Constant Value If minute resolution then ARGUMENT2 to the historical database time string 2 Database or History Value ARG1 ARG with either minutes or seconds resolution The time Constant Value i format for minutes resolution is min hr day mon oe and for seconds resolution is sec min hr day Otherwise History Value Applies to historical database points defined for the KEE FST only format Specify historical database points as For floating database value base RAM 1 30 Ee EE expansion RAM1 31 60 gt number ot archive i periods ARG1 then expansion RAM2 61 90 ARG 0 If ARGUMENT2 is a floating database value For Otherwise ARG2 ARG2 1 example FST1 FST SEQ 1 R8 the command i increments ARGUMENT to the next historical ee EE database value and sets it to O when the number of oup SR archived historical periods are exceeded SVD out SVD in Otherwise no effect occurs to ARGUMENT2 minute format B 11 7
269. nstream under the Pressure Tap option and click OK 5 Select Configure gt MVS Sensor 6 Select the Downstream Pressure Tap Location radio button Refer to Figure 5 14 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual ide a D call oe Ce Aca Tu wg ff Luins Head Faire ro a Pee e Locator bares I is HI E rubbed 4 i meer Emm i bs Hil E sales Downstream Te Ku dee Ac a Fibra Frang fa Fi z E Enabled she L U Hk Va ce FT ra Ki Zeie DE Parra des PE dere E Era 7 ud 4 Fees JE M t Led U Dai Pogue da P ids Get fr Era Bue sa Leri i I IA l Ce egen d Fs F rai O enga I Hy Leg ls So al Ci Ba Corr ff Esas Ejundas w or ls cuca E dois Figure 5 10 Multi Variable Sensor Downstream Click OK Select Meter gt Calibrate Select the desired Meter ID 10 Calibrate the differential pressure Diff Pressure as a positive value on the high H side in the same manner as you would for an upstream application Refer to the ROC FloBoss Accessories Instruction Manual Form A4637 for detailed calibration instructions Downstream pressure 1s calculated by the sensor interface Stat Pressure minus Diff Pressure for display Data archived to history indicates the downstream pressure Upstream pressure is used in the flow calculations as required by the AGA 3 1992 standard The Electronic Flow Measurement EFM can be configured for bi directional flow whe
270. o use For example an Analog Input is typically Filtered EUs Save If the display is new this pushbutton saves the current display to a disk file located on the computer If the display already exists this saves the display back to where it had been saved before The extension DSP display is added to the specified file name Refer to Section C 1 2 Save Displays on page C 2 Save As Saves the current display to a disk file under a different name to a file or to internal Display or Display2 The extension DSP display is applied to the name of the file Close Close the currently selected display screen 4 NOTE Cut Copy and Paste can also be used when creating custom Displays C 1 2 Save Displays After creating a display you can store the current display to A disk file located on the computer or floppy drive Displayl Display2 if available in the device To save a Display 1 Click Save and proceed to Step 4 Click Save As to save either to a file or to display memory 2 Click To ROC or To File 3 If you selected To ROC select Display1 or Display2 4 If you selected To File enter the desired File name of the disk file or use the default The DSP extension will automatically be added C 2 Custom Displays Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual C 1 3 Display1 and Display2 When using a ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 select Display from the View menu and then choose Display1 or Disp
271. odem connection using Comm 1 or Comm 2 Flags View the ROC Flags window Meter Set up View the Meter Set up window Configure PID Control View the PID Loop window Plate Change View the Plate Change window md El BA lr E d Print Print the configuration file Launch FST Editor Launch the Function Sequence Table Editor Display Program Information Display program information version creation date and copyright of ROCLINK software Help Display ROCLINK for Windows software on line help system 1 7 4 Keystrokes If you are using the keyboard and the menu bar does not have one of its items such as File highlighted use the Alt key plus the letter to activate the menu bar For example Press lt Alt F gt to activate the File menu Use the lt Left Arrow gt and lt Right Arrow gt keys to highlight the menu bar item the help Status Line at the bottom of the screen provides a description of the menu and press the letter For example Press lt Alt F gt and press lt O gt to select the Open file dialog With a menu displayed you can highlight the desired item by using the lt Down Arrow gt and lt Up Arrow gt keys or the mouse With the desired item highlighted press the lt Enter gt key to activate the function 1 14 Getting Started Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual To leave a menu or submenu press the lt Esc gt key You can then select another menu You can also
272. of range for the Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units Refer to Figure Midpoint 1 allows you to specify the low calibration point between the Zero and Span endpoints The Zero and Span endpoints you recently established are used in setting the Midpoints Midpoints 1 2 and 3 are values set between the Zero and Span values Midpoint I should have the lowest value of the three midpoints and should be between the Zero and Span values Midpoints should be entered in order from smallest to largest or vice versa Set Mid 1 Point Line Press Dead Weight T ester 0 0000000 Live Reading 0 0000000 Z Difference DEER a Live Act Span x Cancel y Done Figure 5 24 Set Midpoint 1 Shown Click the Set Mid 1 button Click Done if that is the only midpoint you wish to set If desired calibrate Midpoint 2 such as 50 of range for the Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature Set Midpoint 2 allows you to specify the middle calibration point between the Zero and Span endpoints The Zero and Span endpoints you recently established are used in setting the midpoints Midpoint 2 should be the middle value magnitude between Midpoint 1 and Midpoint 3 Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units Click the Set Mid 2 button Click Done if that is the only midpoint you wish to set If desired calibrate M
273. ol Zone E Enabled Zone ones ones C Disabled Start Time HHMM 700 jem pro ime Uri OnTime Mins 20 fo so Oif Time Mins feo foo Pom Hold Time 100 Ming On Counter o Mins Low Battery Shutoff Di Wolke Off Counter o Mins Power Timer o Mins Remaining Output Definition Copy Le Paste 2 Update ly o A Cancel t Apply Figure 6 11 Radio Power Control Example For each Radio Control point the power cycling can be configured to automatically change three times a day During each of these three periods called Zone 1 Zone 2 and Zone 3 the ON and OFF times can be set up to operate at various intervals to conserve battery power Figure 6 12 is a graphical depiction of how the power control operates within each time zone Host Communication Detected Hold Time Off Time Off Time Figure 6 12 Radio Power Control Timing During the ON time Receive interrupts are enabled on the COM port The power output is switched to ON Communications may occur During the OFF time Receive interrupts are disabled on the COM port The power output is set to OFF Communications may not occur If communications occur during the ON time the ON time is extended by the Hold Time The power output remains ON and receive interrupts remain enabled for the duration of the Hold Time When the Radio Power Control parameter is Enabled radio power cycling is activated The Low Ba
274. ommended to avoid loop instability This value is in terms of repeats per minute Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 Enter the Rate Derivative Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in input Override Process Variable based on control action in which the output is proportional to the rate of change of the input An initial Rate setting of 0 is recommended to avoid loop instability 5 Enter the Scale Factor as a number representing the ratio of the output span to input Process Variable span The sign of the number specifies the action of the loop negative for reverse action the default or positive for direct action Reverse action means that the PID loop point produces a decrease output to close a valve for example when the Process Variable exceeds the Setpoint 6 Enter the Integral Deadband as a window around the Override Setpoint When the Override Process Variable is within this window the integral action Reset is disabled If Discrete Output Control Type is enabled no output pulses are produced For example if you enter 5 there is a region of 5 units above and 5 units below the Setpoint in which the Process Variable can move without affecting the output 7 Enter the SP Ramp Rate as the maximum rate per minute at which the Setpoint and thus the Override Process Variable is allowed to ramp to a new value 8 After configuring a point and clicking Apply use W
275. ommunicate to an individual ROC or FloBoss unit You may also add delete or modify these communications setups and establish Groups of ROC or FloBoss units The ROC Root directory communications setup files are used for setting communications parameters for a computer The ROC Root directory files are used to set up personal computer PC communications ports COM ports In order for ROCLINK software to communicate with a ROC or FloBoss ROCLINK software must know with which device it is communicating Each ROC within a Group is given a unique ROC Address This allows ROCLINK software to differentiate between ROC installations The ROC Group is the Group in which the ROC or FloBoss is associated and the ROC Address is the Address of the specific ROC or FloBoss with which you desire to communicate If you are connected to a multi drop series of ROC or FloBoss units enter the exact and unique ROC Address and ROC Group of that specific ROC or FloBoss to talk to that device NOTE If the PC running ROCLINK software is connected directly to the operator interface LOI port on the device a ROC Group of 240 and a ROC Address of 240 the default values allows access to the ROC or FloBoss no matter what ROC Address and ROC Group are configured in the ROC or FloBoss NOTE For a host port COM Port on the ROC or FloBoss the configured ROC Address and ROC Group used by ROCLINK software must match the Address and Group configured in the ROC Info
276. on General Scale Values History Access Registers Low Value High Value Integer Scale Float Scale 1 Float Scale 2 Float Scale 43 Float Scale 4 Float Scale 5 Float Scale 6 Float Scale 7 TTT Float Scale 8 X Cancel zm Figure 6 15 Scale Values 2 Enter the Integer Scale values In the FloBoss the endpoints of the Analog Inputs and the Analog Outputs are used to scale or calibrate the range of the input or output signal Because each I O point can have different scaling the raw values from the Analog I O points are normalized to the values defined by the Integer Scale Low Value and Integer Scale High Value fields 3 Enter the Low Value that contains the 0 value for all analog data Type 3 Parameter 17 and Type 4 Parameter 9 registers 4 Enter the High Value that contains the 100 value for all analog data Type 3 Parameter 17 and Type 4 Parameter 9 registers The High Value and Low Value fields are signed integers so they can range from zero to 32767 These data fields can also be used to scale the Analog I O to integer values with an implied decimal point For example All Analog I O Raw values can be transmitted with O to 1000 values 0 to 100 0 decimal point implied by setting the values in this field to O for the Integer Scale Low Value and 1000 for the Integer Scale High Value The scaling is used only on Analog I O specified by I O type 3 AIN parameter 17 Raw A D Input
277. onded to because the requested register numbers match or fall in between the Start Register and Ending Register numbers 400 through 700 6 Specify that the Ending Register address is a number representing the last location of a point s data The value for this number is computed by Ending Register address Starting Register address Number of Functions 1 7 Specify the type of Conversion required if any on the data before it is sent to the host or before it is written to the FloBoss The conversions are used to allow integer values to be transmitted and received instead of floating point values Table 6 9 lists the Convert Codes used with the Modbus Protocol Emulation program Conversion codes affect Function Codes 3 4 6 8 and 16 6 32 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Table 6 9 Modbus Function Convert Codes Convert a Slave SG o NoGonversion ll Float to integer Float Scale 1 Float to integer Float Scale 2 Float to integer Float Scale 3 The Float to Integer conversion changes FloBoss floating point data to an integer for transmission to Float Scale 4 Float to UE oat Scale 3 the host The number of the Convert Code Float to integer Float Scale 5 specifies which floating point scaling value is to be a sa Float to integer Float Scale 6 used for the conversion Float to integer Float Scale 7 E BN Float to integer Float Scale 8 9to16 No Conversion Log TI Integer to Float Floa
278. ontrol As an indicator Status shows the 4 12 state of the Discrete Output Off normally indicates that the output is Off that a switch is open On normally indicates that the output is On or that a switch is closed When Scanning is set to Disable and in the Off state the Status can be changed by setting Status radio button to On and clicking Apply Set the Momentary parameter When set to On the Discrete Output regardless of its configured DO Type is placed into the one shot Momentary mode Immediately after setting On and clicking Apply the Discrete Output is activated for the amount of time defined in the Time On parameter The Momentary radio button automatically resets to Off Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 Select the DOUT Type for how you want this Discrete Output to function Select Latched if you want the Discrete Output status on an active transition of the output from Off to On to change to On and remain in that state until it is cleared To be cleared the Status parameter must be changed to the Off state either by the software or manually When the TDO mode is enabled select Time Duration and the TDO Parameters tab provides additional parameters to specify scaling and engineering unit conversion For a TDO the quantitative value calculated by a PID loop is converted into a time that the Discrete Output is active versus the time it is inactive similar to an Analog Output
279. ontrol gt PID Configure the PID Click Tuning in the PID Loop screen Refer to Figure Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual PID Loop PID 1 D i Override A Tag PID H1 Loop Status Disabled Analog D 2xi m Control Type Tuning Primary Override Loop Period 1 50 1 50 Gain Mode Manual C Auto Scanning C Enabled Disabled Primary Setpoint o Process Variable 24 71 875 o Output Calc Time 11 50 Secs Primary PY AIN A TEU H Undefined al Primary Switch PV AIN A 1 EU E Primary Output Switch to Override if Switch to Primary d Override Setpoint lo Process Variable Jo 0 Output Override PY AIN 417 EU El Override Output Undefined El Override Switch SUD SEU E Reset Rate Scale Factor Integral Deadband 20 SP Ramp Rate p Ce Disabled Manual Tracking C Enabled Min Control Time 500 Secs Halt PID On Reset Ce Disabled C Enabled Tuning lt lt i amp Paste 2 Update v ok x Cancel Apply Figure 6 10 PID Loop Tuning Example When using Override control enter the Min Control Time as the minimum amount of time that the Primary or Override control loop must maintain control before switching occurs back to the other control loop FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC If you set Manual Tracking to Enabled the loop Setpo
280. or display Data archived to history indicates the downstream pressure Upstream pressure is used in flow calculations as required by the AGA 3 1992 standard Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 13 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual For FloBoss 503 and 553 firmware version 2 23 or older calibrate the differential pressure Diff Pressure as a positive value on the low L side of the sensor The Live Reading appears as a negative value Calibrate the static pressure Stat Pressure the same as for upstream Refer to the appropriate hardware manual for detailed calibration instructions Data archived to history indicates the downstream pressure Upstream pressure 1s used in the flow calculations as required by the AGA 3 1992 standard To configure ROCLINK for Windows to archive downstream pressure for FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series with FlashPAC 1 Connect ROCLINK for Windows to the FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC 2 Select Meter menu gt Set Up 3 Click the Advanced tab Refer to Figure bias Long TT epn a ed eee P LA A EAS ES il BT BEY l a gt r Cabra Ke Le b s Bis Beat fer d Fa fe Fra hehe D i Bass Herr me Parr Mies let SET Lopes Lea RUE A8 ae ET Po 3 7 Eo O Mem rem E be ei eg EH ste Is e Li T m i Dep i SCH a Fang Fe LA Y SES Pa al a ta kg Limi ET e Downstream Ha er p Elgg MAL Besse Slsraltsel Figure 5 9 Meier Setup Advanced Downstream 4 Select Dow
281. ore and Forward Port to define the transmitting communications port Select Same Port to transmit using the communications port that receives the RBX messages or select Opposite Port to transmit using an alternate communications port For example you can transmit out of Comm and receive into Comm 2 Y NOTE Store and Forward communications are not available for the ROC 300 Series with ROCPAC 8 2 2 Configuring Modem and Dial up Connections on the ROC FloBoss Each communications port has a unique screen with a set of parameters Refer to Figure Ze NOTE If you have a ROC300 Series with ROCPAC or a FloBoss 407 Version 1 04 or earlier you require a special program called the Communications Enhancement User Program loaded in the ROC or FloBoss to allow you to use a dial up modem Select ROC gt Comm Ports Select the host Port Comm1 or Comm2 and click the Modem tab Rev 05 03 Configuring Communications 8 9 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 8 10 Comm Ports El x General Modem REX Features m Modem Type C None C Extemal Intermat Connect Time e Secs Disconnect Time 60 Secs Inactivity Time 600 Secs Config Command aT EQHOVO1 00801 amp D2 508L0S0 15 7 608W 0 Connect Command jATDT lt number gt Modem Status OK Copy e Paste Update lv ol x Cancel Apply Figure 8 6 Modem Configuration e NOTE Even if you are not using the RBX alarming function confi
282. oss 500 Series ElA 232 RS 232 for use N A with ROCLINK software The communication ports of the ROC or FloBoss provide a link to computers such as a PC running ROCLINK software or a host computer Ports are ROC or FloBoss specific Host devices may have up to nine communication ports and ROC or FloBoss units can have up to three communication ports Rev 05 03 Configuring Communications 8 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The Communications Ports include The LOI Port 1 labeled Local Port is standard on every ROC or FloBoss and displays when you first select Comm Ports from the ROC menu Port 2 Comm 1 requires activation by the installation of an optional plug in communications card except on FloBoss 407 Port 3 Comm 2 requires activation by the installation of an optional plug in communications card Comm 2 is not possible on the ROC306 or ROC312 Comm 3 Port 4 through Comm 9 Port 10 always refer to the communications port used by the PC Therefore if the ROC or FloBoss is transmitting out of Comm 1 Comm 2 or the LOI port the ROC or FloBoss can communicate to the PC using the PC Comm 1 through Comm 9 Port Refer to Figure and Figure Comm 1 Port 2 gt gt Modem Local Port Port 1 PC Running ROCLINK Any Comm Port Figure 8 3 Communication Ports Example I 8 6 Configuring Communications Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Comm 2 Port 3 E eme Modem Figure 8 4
283. ost or before it is written to the FloBoss The conversions are used to allow integer values instead of floating point values to be transmitted and received Table 6 9 on page 6 33 lists the Convert Codes used with the Modbus Protocol Emulation program Table 6 5 summarizes the applicable function calls and their associated register and data fields Table 6 5 Modbus History Event and Alarm Functionality FloBoss 103 and FloBoss 500 Series Function i i D s 7160 Daily Index Response contains current daily index 7161 Hourly Index Response contains current hourly index 32 Event Alarm Ignored Response contains Event and Alarm records Maximum number of Register bytes returned is 240 12 records of 20 bytes each Events are returned before Alarms are returned The format is displayed in Table 6 6 32 Event Alarm Ignored After Events and Alarms have been returned there must be an Register acknowledgment made so that the same Events and Alarms are not returned on the next request 703 Daily History History Response contains two floating point values for the time and date Archive stamp of the history archive time stamp HHMMSS and date stamp Register MMDDYY and floating point values for each of the defined history 0 to 34 points for that History Archive Register 704 Hourly History History Response contains two floating point values for the time and date Archive stamp of the history archive time stamp
284. ot directory is the top level of the organizational level in the Communications Directory Tree The ROC Root directory provides a way to create and maintain individual communications setup files for ROC and FloBoss units When you install ROCLINK for Windows ROC COMM ROC COMM2 and Modem ROC display You can use these communications setup files or you can create new files The communications setup files allow ROCLINK software to communicate to an individual ROC or FloBoss unit You may add delete or modify these communications setups and establish Groups of ROC or FloBoss units The ROC Root directory files are used to set up personal computer PC communications ports COM ports Each icon represents a different type of communications connection Local Communications Port Serial Port or Radio Connection Modem Port or Dial up Connection ES TCP IP Connection NOTE If you are in a Configuration Tree menu select Window gt ROC Directory or View gt ROC Directory to view the ROC Root directory Keep in mind that the ROC Root directory files are used to set up personal computer PC communications ports COM ports To set up communications for a specific ROC or FloBoss use the Comm Ports and Information screens Refer to Section 8 Configuring Communications concerning how to configure communication ports on the ROC FloBoss units For example In Figure if you select ROC COMM 1 and Connect from the ROC menu communi
285. ows User Manual 7 1 2 Meter History for ROC300 Series with FlashPAC and FloBoss 407 Up to 10 history points may be configured for each meter run in a FloBoss 407 Up to 16 history points may be configured for each meter run in a ROC300 Series unit with a FlashPAC The first eight history points of the first flow run are pre configured with default values used in EFM Reporting for an AGA3 orifice meter run Do not change these values except for the averaging type or accumulation basis or your EFM Reporting may be incorrect If the first flow run is an AGA7 turbine meter run delete the meter history points for differential pressure and pressure extension so NOTE History points set up in the Meter gt History screen override history points set up in the Configure gt History Setup window Make sure to only configure a history point in one location NOTE A history point can not be re defined in history for another meter run Y NOTE For AGA7 calculations configuration of Totalize Archive Type points must be done in the General History on the Configure gt History screen See note 3 in Table 7 1 Required History Configuration per Meter Run 1 Select Meter gt History History Points Ei ES Meter ID Meter Tag History Points History Point 1 History Point fl History Point 2 i History Point 3 Value To Archive JERN 9 MIMI Dy ns History Point 4 History Point 5 Archive Type History Point 6 Hi
286. perly configured The Active Alarms field on the General tab indicates any alarm currently activated For example Low indicates that the calculated flow is below the Low Alarm limit 5 20 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 2 7 Flow and Sensor Alarms When using a FloBoss 500 Series use the Alarms tab to configure the flow and sensor alarms for this point You can set alarm limits configure RBX Alarming and view active alarms For the 1992 Turbine ISO Calc Type the API 5 5 choices Meter gt Set up gt Advanced for pulse fidelity checking also called integrity or security are the same Level A through Level E These levels are Level A This level of fidelity checking requires a dual pulse train Both pulse inputs on the Sensor Module SM of the FloBoss 504 must be used Level A is the most secure method performing not only continuous detection but also correction of errors as 1t compares the pulse trains against each other on a pulse to pulse basis With this method the FloBoss generates a pseudo pulse input PIN A7 which is the corrected pulse train If the frequency of the pulses falls below 101 Hz the SM defaults to a simulated Level C until the frequency increases above 111 Hz Sensor alarms are produced and logged as indicated in Table 5 1 Level B This level of fidelity checking requires a dual pulse train Both pulse inputs on the SM of the FloBoss 304 must be used Leve
287. pes and Fields to include in the report Refer to Figure EFM Report Data Selection EN Choose the Fields from the sections you chose that you want to view in the report You can also organize the Fields by using the up and down arrow buttons Point Types Selected Sections SubS ections General Flow Paramel a Gas Composition Available Fields Point Number a Selected Fields Point Tag Id Input Point Assignmer Y ron t Tagid Units Calculated Factors MlUnits d Scan Period 4 gt Meter Input Point Defi sw Filter Ad D 0 Static Input Point Defi Adj 44D 100 Temperature Input Po e he ai Wo Low Reading EU ER Hourly Volume Data IACI enee High Reading EU Daily Volume Data v Low Reading EL Low Alarm EU Alarm Data wi Hoh Reading El High Alarm EU Event Data v Low Alarm EU y Lo Lo Alarm EU y lt gt Back Le Hert di Finish x Cancel Figure 7 6 EFM Report Data Selection Screen 4 11 Click Finish The EFM Report displays Rev 05 03 Configuring and Viewing History 7 9 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 7 3 History Alarm Event and Audit Log Reports History Alarm Event and Audit Log can be viewed from the View menu You can view history from an on line ROC or FloBoss or from a disk file History and log files work in a circular fashion the newest data overrides the oldest data when the log is full Ta
288. processing such as history logging while calibration is being performed Rev 05 03 Configuring the Meter Setup 5 23 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 If desired select and specify a Calibration Report File Select Yes to create a report text file containing calibration and verification details Select No to continue without creating a report If you select Yes another dialog box appears 5 Type the name of the Calibration Report File in the File name field and use the extension Cal to represent calibration The Calibration Report File is created in the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data unless you specify otherwise another Directory Drive before you click Save The report can be viewed using a text editor 6 Click Save Meter Calibration Meter ID Bev Meter Tag AGA Freeze Values Diff Pressure Low DP Stat Pressure Temperature 24 937500 24 625000 24 593750 Wer Verity Verity Verity Calibrate Calibrate Calibrate Calibrate Zero Shift Zero Shift K Cancel Figure 5 20 Calibration Dialog after Freeze 7 If the run has been calibrated before verify the calibration at a point in the operating range such as at 0 25 50 75 or 100 percent and set up the input with the desired test value This can also be done immediately after performing calibration Click Verify to proceed with verification of an input s calibration If you do not need to verify the inpu
289. r Messages monitor Compare Flag options and Pause or Resume an FST To start the Monitor mode to display the selected FST select the desired FST from the Monitor menu in the On Line FST menu Refer to Figure B 14 Table B 3 lists the keys and subsequent actions for the Monitor mode NOTE You cannot edit fields while in Monitor mode Use the FST Registers General and Advanced tab in the FST Parameters screen to edit necessary fields Ay RocLink For Windows Fst MonitorTracel On Line FST View Monitor Window 8 gt SE 406869080 Monitoring is ON Tracing mode is OFF 246414641 CURBTU AGAZAGA2 CURBTU FST1FST SEOH 1 R2 46414641 TDYFLO GAGA2AGA2 TDYFLO FST1FST SEQH1 A3 46414641 TDYBTU AGA2AGA2 TDYBTU FST1 FST SEDH1 R4 GAGA1AGA1 YDYFLO GAGA2AGA2 YDYFLO FST1FST SEQH1 A5 4GA14G41 YDYBTU GAGA2AGA2 YDYBTU FST1FST SEQ 1 76 Figure B 14 FST Monitor Display Notice that the Help Status Line at the top of the Monitor display indicates that Monitor mode is ON and Trace mode is OFF Refer to Figure B 14 The Misc Reg Messages and the Registers windows reflect values from the on line Configure gt Control gt FST Register screens B 10 1 Trace On Monitor FST The FST Editor uses a trace mechanism that provides the ability to debug an FST Monitor gt Trace On Trace executes the FST command indicated by the Instruction Pointer 1P moves the Instruction Pointer to t
290. r data type for the FloBoss The Float to Unsigned Long conversion changes a transmitted floating point value to an unsigned long data type for the FloBoss 65 72 IEEE Floating Point Number 3 4 16 Convert Codes 65 to 72 allow a four byte IEEE formatted floating point number to be sent or received in two Modbus registers with the byte orders configurable and listed next Because these conversions require two registers Modbus Function Code 6 is not supported A check is made to ensure that an even number of registers is requested that the Starting Register number does not begin in the middle of a register pair and that the number of registers does not exceed the number of registers configured Byte O seee eeee Byte 1 emmm mmmm Byte 2 mmmmmmmm Byte 3 mmmmmmmm Where s Sign Bit e Exponent Bit m Matissa Bit Code 65 places byte 0 and byte 1 in register xxxxx byte 2 and byte 3 are placed in register xxxxx 1 This places a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be transmitted Code 66 does the same as Code 65 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen Register xxxxx byte O byte 1 Register xxxxx 1 byte 2 byte 3 Code 67 reverses byte 0 and byte 1 order in register xxxxx reverses byte 2 and byte 3 order in register xxxxx 1 This places a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be transmitted Code 68 does the same as Code
291. r equal to zero ZE LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 VAL WFS5T1 F5T SEQ 1 71 ABS SAV FST LFST SEGQ 1 A2 END 1 STEP O VAL loads Register R1 into the Results Register B 26 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 2 STEP 1 The Results Register is updated with the absolute value ABS 3 STEP 2 SAV stores the Results Register to Register R2 for viewing 4 STEP 3 Execution of the FST has completed END After a 100 millisecond delay execution restarts with STEP 0 B 12 4 Polynomial FST This example demonstrates the use of the polynomial P3 command This command performs a 3rd order polynomial calculation of the following form Y AX BX CX D Where X Results Register before the polynomial calculation Y Results Register after the polynomial calculation A B C and D Coefficients for the polynomial calculation In this example the 3rd order polynomial calculates the decimal equivalent of a 4 bit binary number The coefficients from the above equation A B C and D represent the individual bit values 0 or 1 of the 4 bit binary number The coefficients are entered manually as either O or 1 into FST Registers RI through R4 The decimal equivalent of the 4 bit binary number is displayed in FST Register RS STEP LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 Pass VAL 2 UC P3 SAY FST 1 FST SEQ 1 A5 END 1 STEP 0 VAL loads 2 into the Results Register 2 STEP 1 Calculate the 3rd
292. r more depending on the speed of your computer NOTE You can only run one version of ROCLINK software at a time 1 5 1 Logging On To log on to ROCLINK for Windows software 1 Connect the ROC or FloBoss to the Local Operator Interface LOD port and launch ROCLINK for Windows software 2 Type in your assigned 3 character identifier in the Login field and press lt Enter gt or lt Tab gt Y our initials are typically your identifier If identifiers have not yet been assigned try using the default Level 1 identifier of AAA or the default Level 6 identifier of LOI Identifiers are assigned by using the security features of ROCLINK software 3 Type in your assigned 4 digit Password and press lt Enter gt or click OK For added security the software displays an asterisk for each number that you type If Passwords have not yet been assigned try using the default password of 1000 ROCLINK software compares the entered identifier Login and Password to a list of valid ones If the entries are valid further access to the software is allowed If the log on is not valid a dialog box appears to tell you that the log on is not valid Rev 05 03 Getting Started 1 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Press lt Enter gt and repeat steps 1 and 2 You can repeat the procedure as many times as needed until you successfully enter a valid Login and Password If you want to exit from the log on screen press lt Esc gt or click Cancel This aborts RO
293. r of available PID AGA Tank ROC300 Series with a ROCPAC and History Points You may change the number of certain points that you want to be active 1 Select ROC gt Information and click the Points tab ROC Information ROC Information General Points Other Information Revision Into General Points Other Information Avail Active History Points Avail i History Points Pils E 3 Base RAM PlDs E E Base RAM E I RAM 1 AGAS E RAM 1 Di Tanks 3 RAM 2 E AG s E X Cancel as Le update X Cancel aoc Figure 3 9 Points FloBoss 500 Series Figure 3 10 Points ROC300 Series 2 Enter the number of Active points which must not exceed the amount available To conserve resources activate only the number of points you actually need Refer to Table Table 3 1 Maximum Number of Applications ROC306 ROC312 ROC364 FloBoss 103 FloBoss 407 FloBoss 500s So E A GE Maximum Tanks ROCPAC only Older versions of ROCPACs support four PID points 3 Enter the number of History Points The amount available displays for each of the three RAM areas To reduce processor loading the number of database points configured should be set to the number of points actually needed Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 9 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 Enter the number of Base RAM database points contained in the Base RAM area This field accepts a value from 0 to 30 however only 15 points are available
294. re to configure 3 Enter the Tag as a 10 character name used to identify the PID control loop Select the Control Type Single Analog single loop control with an Analog Output Single Discrete single loop control with a Discrete Output pair Set Scanning to Enabled or Disabled to control the ON and OFF status for scanning the PID loop Set Mode to Auto or Manual PID control is effectively disabled by placing the point in Manual Mode In Manual Mode the value applied to the output 1s taken from the Output parameter Enter the Calc Time to indicate the actual period of time in seconds between executions of the PID algorithm This 1s the amount of time measured between executions from the beginning of one execution to the beginning of the next Enter the Setpoint around which the Primary Process Variable 1s controlled 9 When in Manual Mode enter a Process Variable value to be in line with the Setpoint so there is not a harsh bump at startup When in Auto Mode the current value of the Process Variable is determined by the input definition The value is used for comparison to the Setpoint When in Auto Mode this is the current value Output of the Primary output from the PID control expressed in engineering units When in Manual Mode enter the value desired for the Primary output from the PID control in engineering units Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 11 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 10 11 12
295. reate custom displays using all upper or lower case letters From this point on this example uses all upper case characters Rev 05 03 Custom Displays C 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual CH RocLink For Windows Al dsp A File Edt View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Deh see Swe VR Vik mV se VE a BE Analog Inputs Figure C 3 New Display Example 2 12 Select Character Set 4 13 With your cursor on the line below Analog Inputs type a repeatedly to create a double horizontal line Refer to Figure C 4 RocLink For Windows Al dsp A File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Ogee sels map Ve yw wom se ve BH Analog Inputs Update Figure C 4 New Display Example 3 14 Change to Character Set 2 and add the rest of the text to the screen shown in Figure C 5 CH RocLink For Windows Al dsp 4 File Edt View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Dee tee Soe Va avm se vz WI ss Analog Inputs Update dd TAG Pa Auto geal LOW EU me ml Stop N Figure C 5 New Display Example 4 15 Click Save 16 Click To File The Save As dialog box appears 17 Type the File name and click Save C 1 4 1 Adding Live Data to a Display The following is an example of adding live data to a display for a ROC or FloBoss 1 Place your cursor to the right of the g in Point Tag 2 Click TLP Box The value description window displays 3 Select Analog Input
296. reater than and greater than or equal to The equal to command compares the contents of the Results Register to ARGUMENTI and branches conditionally if they are equal The equal to command only works if the comparison is between integers ranging from 0 to 255 It does not work if ARGUMENT is greater than 255 or if it is a number other than an integer This example demonstrates the use of the equal command but also applies to the not equal less than lt less than or equal to lt greater than gt and greater than or equal to gt commands The example compares a user entered value R1 to the value 10 and the logical result true 1 or false 0 is reflected in RS STEP LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENTZ FE EFSTIFST SEGH DI 10 UC LABEL 0 UC SAWE LABEL GEGTIEST SEQ 1 R5 1 STEP 0 VAL reads the contents of Register R1 and loads the value into the Results Register 2 STEP 1 Compare the value in the Results Register to the value 10 If the Results Register is equal to 10 then branch to the LABEL indicated in ARGUMENT2 In this case the LABEL is TRUE and the branch would go to STEP 4 and continue execution If the Results Register is not equal to 10 then continue execution with STEP 2 3 STEP 2 If the comparison in STEP 1 is FALSE VAL loads the Results Register with the value 0 FALSE to be saved STEP 5 4 STEP 3 GO to the STEP with the LABEL SAVE STEP 5 This STEP branches
297. recommendation to use any product or process in conflict with any patent Fisher Controls reserves the right without notice to alter or improve the designs or specifications of the products described herein ii Rev 04 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS E AAA e AI ss ssi saune eneu Esou rd ossis 1 1 1 1 USER MANUAL OVERVIEW E 1 1 1 2 COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS AAA 1 3 ROCLINK FOR WINDOWS CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE cccccccssssssseccccceeecasseseeeccceeeesuaaeseeeeeeess 1 3 1 4 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION psoriasis koine erena dene rende een AA ERr RDE ordenes 1 4 1 5 STARTING ROCLINK SOFTWARE aprendan 1 7 1 6 CONNECTING THE COMPUTER TO THE ROC OR Fooss 1 8 1 7 UR ge repeats ee S A seas saneets 1 9 1 8 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW EE 1 17 ECON ROC e e d BE EEN Een eee A S Section 3 Configuring System Parameters sscscccccssssssccccccssssssscccccsessssssccosses SN E NERT EN OGC CLOC EEE eased E EE A EE 3 2 CONFIGURING EE S SE CONFIGURING ROC INFORMATION OY EE 3 5 BED USER ER RER EI E 14 SZ E REN E SM UPDATE HARDWARE aia 3 8 UPGRADE TO FLASH PACE aterra oral 3 18 Section 4 Configuring Basic I O cccccssssssssccccccccssssssscsscccccccccccessssssscccccccceseseees 4 1 4 1 BASIC CONFIGURA TON OVERVIEW dictadas 4 1 4 2 AL ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION is 4 5 4 3 AO ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIGURATION ccooocccnnnncnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanannnnnnnnns 4 7 4 4 DI DISCRETE INP
298. revious day s total at Contract Hour Current Rate is the value of the calculated rate as of the most recent scan expressed in EUs per unit of time Time units are the same as selected by the Rate Period parameter The Current Rate stores the calculated rate of the pulses which is determined by using the Conversion the Rate Period the Scan Period and the accumulated pulses The Conversion parameter is interpreted as a pulse weight multiplier in terms of pulses EU or in terms of EUs pulse The Rate Period can be one of three possibilities EU minute EU hour or EU day The following shows the calculation of the Current Rate in two different ways 1 If Conversion Mode EUs pulse and Rate Period EU minutes then Current Rate accumulated pulses x Conversion Scan Period x conversion from seconds to minutes 2 If Conversion Mode pulses EU and Rate Period EU hour then Current Rate accumulated pulses Conversion Scan Period x conversion from seconds to hours 6 Enter the Conversion This value is multiplied by the number of pulses to determine the Units as configured This parameter is sometimes referred to as the meter factor for turbine meters When the Pulse Input is being used for a FloBoss 500 Series device performing an AGA7 calculation this conversion should be set up to produce units of 1000 cubic feet per day 7 Enter the Pulses Today FloBoss 500 Series to accumulate raw pulses until Force End
299. rial Port or Radio Connection Modem Port or Dial up Connection TCP IP Connection Right mouse click on the label Select Open Enter the Station Name in the Tag field Refer to Figure 8 1 Enter the appropriate ROC Address ROC Group ROCLINK Address and ROCLINK Group parameters 1 e rP 8 2 Configuring Communications Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual ROC Communication Parameter Setup E Ax General Advanced RELI ES ROC Address ROCLINE Address 2 Boo ROL Group ROCLINE Group Connection Type Baud Rate seno d W Use Modem Comm Port Comm 1 Use TERAP Modem Parameters Phone No DEE Select Modem Conexant SoftK56 Data Fax PCI Modem y IP Addressing Part Number a IP adores K Cancel t Appl Figure 8 1 ROC Communication Parameter Setup General 6 Enter the Baud Rate set in the PC and used by ROCLINK software to communicate with the ROC or FloBoss through a serial port COM port For successful communications the Baud Rate set up in the ROC and the Baud Rate set here for the PC must match If you are having difficulties communicating to your ROC or FloBoss set the Baud Rate in both the ROC Comm Ports screen and the computer to 9600 7 Select the Comm Port on the computer to be used by ROCLINK software for this setup The ROC can communicate through Comm 1 through 9 of the PC Typically Comm 1 or Comm 2 1s used with the LOI port Before selecting this p
300. rite to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM in the ROC Flags display to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a Cold Start 6 7 Radio Power Control Radio Power Control allows you to conserve battery power by cycling power to the radio or cellular telephone only when power is required When using a FloBoss 407 or a ROC with a FlashPAC the radio power is controlled either by the Data Terminal Ready DTR signal through COM2 for the FloBoss 407 or by a Discrete Output Radio power cycling can be configured differently for COM1 and COM2 ROC306 and ROC312 units do not have COM2 When using a FloBoss 500 Series unit radio power is controlled by the DTR signal through the COMI port on an EIA 232 RS 232 communications card DO power control is not available When using a FloBoss 103 unit the Radio Power Control is used for making the COM1 EJA 485 RS 485 port active The Time Zone portion of the screen is not used Two modes of Power Control are possible Seconds and Minutes In Seconds mode the time base for the timers is in 0 1 second increments primarily used with radios In Minutes mode the time base for the timers is in one minute increments primarily used with cellular telephones Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 17 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Radio Power Control Ed ES Radio Power Control RPC Point 1 sl Tag Pon CHT ag Radio Power Status OFF Active one 1 Radio Power Contr
301. rmation screen Refer to Section B Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 Configuring Communications 8 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual The ROCLINK Address at the PC has a default value of 3 If more than one computer running ROCLINK software will be communicating with a group of ROC devices either by radio or by other multi drop communications the ROCLINK Address of each ROC directory setup must be unique to avold multiple responses The ROCLINK Address must also be different from any other host system that may access the network Addresses 0 255 are available with the following exceptions Address 0 Reserved for broadcast within group DO NOT USE Address 240 Reserved for direct connection DO NOT USE The ROCLINK Group address at the PC has a default value of 1 In the assignment of the ROCLINK Group addresses addresses 0 255 are available with the following exceptions Group 0 Reserved DO NOT USE Group 240 Reserved for direct connection DO NOT USE 8 1 1 Configuring the Computer Communications Parameters The Open option displays the ROC Communication Parameter Setup screen which allows you to change your communications port time out settings and other variables used by ROCLINK software when establishing a connection to a flow computer To set the computer communication parameters 1 Select highlight the label by the ROC icon under the ROC Root directory Refer to Section ROC Directory Local Communications Port Se
302. rms NN 5 20 Figure 5 18 Flow and Sensor Alarms 5 22 Figure 5 19 Initial Meter Calibration Dialog Box Typical Device AGA3 Sbhown 5 23 Figure 5 2 1992 Orifice AGA FloBoss 103 and 500 EE 5 3 Figure 5 20 Calibration Dialog after Freeze 5 24 Figure 5 21 Verify Calibration Logging 5 24 PLUS 5 22 Set ZETO aoa a aaa 5 25 Frisure 23 Sel E rt 5 25 Figure 5 24 Set Midpoint 1 Shown 5 26 Figure 5 25 Zero Shift Dialog Box 5 27 Figure 5 26 Meter Plate Change under Flowing CONO riel 5 29 Figure 5 3 ISO 9951 Meter Setup FloBoss 500 Series OPETE E et PE ASE E E nuns O AET 5 3 Figure 5 4 Orifice Inputs FloBoss 503 5 5 Fieure 585 Gas AE EE 5 8 Figure 5 6 Orifice 1992 AGA Advanced ROC300 Series FlashPAC or FloBoss AO 5 9 Figure 5 7 1992 Turbine ISO Advanced FloBoss SUE 5 10 Figure 5 8 Meter Setup Advanced Downstream 5 13 Figure 5 9 Meter Setup Advanced Downstream 5 14 Figure 6 1 Tank Monitoring occcccccnnccnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 6 2 Figure 6 10 PID Loop Tuning Example 6 15 Figure 6 11 Radio Power Control Example 6 18 Figure 6 12 Radio Power Control Timing 6 18 Figure 6 13 Output Definition ccccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnmo 6 21 Figure 6 14 Modbus Configuration 6 23 Figure 6 15 Scale Values 6 25 Figure 6 16 History Access Regester 6 27
303. rola ia A 1 A O 6 14 6 15 6 16 A 6 TEE 5 12 IR 5 4 Ee eer 5 12 FAA tet sash ek fatal er alta 1 14 5 29 ele 5 29 Den EE 5 27 6 35 Available and Actve ene eee enes 3 9 DEMHON EE 1 17 3 15 SE EE 7 5 NMDC EE 1 17 4 1 5 1 EE DOEN EE 3 9 Kan 1 17 9 6 B 14 C 2 Porn tr eene 8 3 Ports Communicat OY EE 8 5 FLOS A 1 9 Operator Interface LOD ui iaa 1 8 Positive Displacement lui 5 2 Power BAU O nee crue ini Ca ameen en ner seta 6 20 Radio Control 6 17 6 19 O In eebe 6 20 Pressure EA o O A A E VIAS 5 27 A A A A A 7 2 MVS ATAS st a 6 7 A ESPERSEN SE SEERE FEE SODE SESEERESELEDER SELER VEL ERE 5 12 Fap Locales lili is 6 6 Primary Loop Integral Deadband ccceeeeeeseeeeeeees 6 16 A 7 Loop Eet 6 13 A 5 A 7 BE CT GE 6 12 6 13 SR EE A 5 Proportional Cam 6 15 A 7 Eine E 6 12 6 13 A 1 A 6 LAA A A ake A 7 GA A Te TP ne ee 6 16 A 7 SC ale Ee e E 6 16 A 7 SP Ramp Eeer es 6 16 A 7 SWEEP V ee Ee 6 13 A A 6 15 A 6 Tonne PID Para meter ainda 6 14 A 6 EK rar dd 1 14 Fan ute A EE 9 3 Con surau oN al aia 9 6 A tae anna Arata aa eveds tacsitsy epenas houam tenons B 12 EE B 12 Problems COMMUNIC AION d 8 18 Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Process Vantable vaina as 6 11 6 13 Programs Download Usei ua iaa 6 37 Proportional Galas 6 15 6 16 A 7 Proportional Integral and Derivative See PID EE 6 10 Pulse Inputs SES E 4 16 Pulse Synchronization Error 5 21 Pulse Train Com Cle EE 5 6 Q QUICK
304. s AIN A 1 and Point Tag Id and click OK C 4 Custom Displays Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 Click No when the Change Data Verification dialog appears Selecting Yes in the Change Data Verification dialog allows users to manually change values while using the custom display 5 Place your cursor next to the High EU Low EU and Units fields and enter live values for each of these fields using the TLP Box function Refer to Figure C 6 RocLink For Windows Al dsp A File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help A ME AE a mw S VER REE Analog Inputs Update POINT TAG 3 0 0 A HI EU 3 0 7 Los Aa dea Gp Stop Scan LOW EU 3 0 6 UNITS 3 0 1 Figure C 6 Displaying Live Data 6 Click Save C 1 4 2 Copying Display Data It is usually quicker to copy data within a custom display than to re create the work 1 Place your cursor at the top left corner of the words Analog Inputs 2 Click and drag your cursor to the bottom of the last live output value in the Unit live value field Refer to Figure C 7 RocLink For Windows Al dsp A File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Dee sO Gwe VE Sw Oo Sev Re AA Analog Inputs Update PCINT TAG 3 0 0 HI EU 43 0 7 3 k S ad LCW EU 3 0 6 SE UNITS EI Le a 3 ED Sop scan Ea Figure C 7 Copying Custom Display Data 3 Click the Copy button 4 Place your cursor to
305. s proceeding left to right and may be point number A3 A4 A5 or A6 MVS flow points are not configured from I O Menu 4 2 Configuring Basic I O Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Discrete Analog Input Analog Output Discrete Input Output Pulse Input FloBoss 503 Diff Pres AO Deflt 1 B7 DI Deflt 1 A4 DO Deflt1 B11 PI Deflt 1 Orifice and We Sensor B8 DI Det 2 B5 DO Deflt2 B12 PI Deflt 2 FloBoss 553 A2 Static B9 DI Deflt 3 B6 DO Deflt 3 no I O Card Flow Sensor when A3 RTD configured B2 Al Default B10 DI Deflt 4 B3 Al Default when B4 Al Default configured E1 Battery voltage E2 Charge In voltage E3 Spare Alt E4 Spare Al2 E5 Bat Temp All Point Numbers designated with a B are located on the 10 point I O Card if installed Point Numbers designated with an E are diagnostic inputs FloBoss 504 A1 Aux Press B1 AO Deflt 1 B7 DI Deflt 1 A4 DO Deflt1 A5 PI Deflt 1 Turbine A2 Line Press B8 DI Deflt 2 B5 DO Deflt 2 Pulse counts Interface A3 RTD B9 DI Deflt 3 B6 DO Deflt3 A6 PI Deflt 2 Module B2 Al Default when Auxiliary B3 Al Default configured B11 PI Deflt 3 B4 Al Default B10 DI Det 4 B12 PI Deflt 4 E1 Battery when voltage configured E2 Charge In voltage E3 Spare Alt E4 Spare Al2 E5 Bat Temp All Point Numbers designa
306. s Disabled Primary or Override The status of an enabled Single control loop will always be Primary For an enabled Override loop the status indicates which loop is currently active Primary or Override Refer to Section Single PID Loop on page 6 11 4 Section Primary PID Loop in Override Control on page 6 12 4 Section Override PID Loop in Override Control on page 6 14 4 Section Tuning PID Parameters on page 6 14 6 10 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Single PID Loop To use a Single PID Loop Select Configure gt Control gt PID PID Loop Bika PID Loop Ga Fa PID Ny r SE Type PID no r SR Type Single Single A Tag PID 1 Loop Status Disabled Analog y Tag PID 1 Loop Status Disabled voam Scanning Mode Scanning Mode Calc Time 1 50 Secs e aio Calc Time 1 50 Secs Ce Disabled C Auto RA fo Primary PY AIN A LEU a Process Variable o DO Open Pt Undefined E Output jo DO Close Pt AIN A 1 EU E C Enabled Ce Manual Disabled Auto Setpoint o Primary PV AIN ATEU ES Process Variable jo Primary Output Undefined H Output o Tuning gt gt Tuning gt gt Ea Copy A Paste 2 Update Y ok Xx Cancel t Apply Copy A Paste 2 Update w ok x Cancel t Apply Figure 6 6 PID Loop Single AI Figure 6 7 PID Loop Single DO Select the PID control loop point you desi
307. s Register RR Signal Value Analog SVA prior to execution of the function Command RR out Output value from Results Register SVD in The value or contents of the Signal Value Discrete SVD or Compare Flag prior to execution of a function command SVD out The contents of the RR SVA following execution of the function command Each command name is given along with a brief description Action the Arguments ARGUMENTI or ARGUMENT2 required and the effect each operation has on the RR and SVD In the explanation of the operation if RR or SVD is not mentioned then the current content is not affected and remains unchanged In general the SVD is affected only by logical commands Table B 5 provides a summary of the available FST commands There are 8000 bytes available for FSTs in the ROC300 Series or FloBoss 407 units There are 4000 bytes available in the FloBoss 500 Series units Table B 5 lists the byte count for each command used in functions NOTE ARG indicates ARGUMENTI and ARG2 indicates ARGUMENT 2 B 18 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Table B 5 FST Command Summary Command Number of Bytes Used RR RR ARGUMENT1 divide If RR lt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL If RR ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL RR RR ARGUMENT1 subtract If RR lt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL If RR gt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL RR Absolute value of RR XP RR e 2 718
308. s Scale Value 42225447 rense 6 25 NENS loo eau 6 7 RA S ER SEE SS EROBRE SES SES EEBES PER SES eres 4 6 LT1 Level Transmtter sr sseeee B 41 M Making an ES E B 10 Manual E BEE 5 27 Manual Mode 4 3 6 5 6 11 6 13 Manual HESTE se an TROR rneer 6 15 A 7 MAXEU Hish Read Eege det B 41 E EE 1 12 Maximum Number of Applications cccccccccnnnnnnnmm 3 9 Me mO A cubetets Ea B 10 IVD CTAB EE 1 11 l 10 at EEN 1 11 Mercury Manometer Instrument 5 19 Message 1 and Message dci B 4 Meter RE MIN CC EE 5 9 ENEE 5 2 5 20 EE Een 5 1 Ser EE 4 17 ME Ee EE 5 1 7 3 EE e 5 29 SLU aaa ee e 1 14 5 1 EE 7 3 Meter Menu ADEA O a es di 5 22 A MS ener hd ba ere se Nas 7 1 Plate EE 5 29 SEC Hee Ee 5 1 5 3 Meter Set up SE SEN ENEE 5 1 Methane AUS E 5 8 NE e e 3 8 5 11 Midpoint EE 5 26 hee de 5 26 SE 5 26 MINEU Low Reading E EE B 41 Vikar 1 12 Minimum Control TIE coin ld ido 6 15 Misc A A A B 3 MND Minutes Since Midnight B 19 B 22 Modbus O a A o e rdr erate 6 24 Configuration oooccccncnnnnnncnnnnns 6 21 6 23 6 25 6 27 CONVEEE e 6 33 Detailed Point and Parameter Information 6 30 EFM e E Ee ii ee 6 24 EE 6 24 Events and Alarms Functionality 6 28 Fonction e 6 22 History Access Registers oococooooooonocoooccccnnnnnoss 6 27 History Collection egene ergeet Eege e re 6 30 THOS ent rasca 8 11 Log Modbus Events ccccccnnnnnnonnccccnaninnnc
309. s and for individual points and parameters within the ROC or FloBoss Section 8 Configuring Communications describes how to Connect Disconnect and use Direct Connect to communicate to a ROC or FloBoss using ROCLINK for Windows software Section 9 Saving Retrieving Configurations describes how to save and retrieve configurations to and from a ROC or FloBoss Rev 05 03 Getting Started 1 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Appendix A PID with TDO Control describes the Proportional Integral and Derivative PID control algorithm configurable as a Discrete Output control device for motorized applications Appendix B FST Editor describes the Function Sequence Table FST capability provided by table driven firmware that allows you to define actions to occur when a set of conditions exists Appendix C Custom Displays describes the custom Display that allows you to create customized displays and load a display from a disk file to monitor flow and I O points Index alphabetically lists the items contained in this manual along with their page numbers NOTE In most cases the FloBoss units and ROC300 Series units are identical in operation The descriptions and procedures in this manual apply to all FloBoss and ROC types unless otherwise noted NOTE Refer to ROCLINK for Windows software on line help for additional information 1 2 Computer Requirements ROCLINK software runs on most IBM compatible personal comput
310. s converted into a quantitative value similar to an AI When TDI mode is Enabled the TDI Parameters tab becomes available This provides additional parameters to specify scaling and engineering unit conversion In addition when the TDI mode is Enabled the information that appears when you use the Alarms tab becomes expanded with additional parameters to specify alarm limits Status is both an indicator and a control As an indicator it shows the state of the Discrete Input Off normally indicates that the input is Off or that a switch is open On normally indicates that the input is On or that a switch is closed When Scanning is set to Disable Status can be changed by using the Status On Off radio buttons and then clicking Apply The state of the Input is reversed by selecting Inverted in the DI Advanced tab Rev 05 03 Configuring Basic I O 4 9 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 4 1 1 DI Advanced Advanced Discrete Inputs lets you configure features such as filtering input inversion and counter values for the Discrete Input 1 4 10 Select Configure gt I O gt DI Points gt Advanced tab Discrete Inputs General Advanced Alarms Filter Intervals Input Ge Normal Inverted Filter E Accumulated Value o o On Counter Off Counter i 1351578 Copy Le Paste Update Iw ml A Cancel t Apply Figure 4 6 Discrete Inputs Advanced Enter the Filter Interval and Filter to determine the
311. s output to the ON state or equivalent state STEP 3 DO activates output to the OFF state or equivalent state STEP 7 DO activates output to ON state m en ES STEP 8 Wait WT 2 seconds This delay allows the output to be on for a minimum of 2 seconds B 32 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 STEP 9 DO activates output to OFF state Steps 7 8 and 9 are equivalent to a Timed Duration Output pulse for a duration of 2 seconds B 16 3 Timed Duration Output Control Command FST This 1s an example of a Discrete Output control command in an FST STEP LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 E VAL 2 UC SAV IOAG DO DEFAULT EU D0 TDO l046 00 DEFAULT STATUS DO END 1 STEP 0 VAL loads the Results Register with the value 2 percent or seconds output 2 STEP 1 SAV stores the value in the Results Register to the EU parameter for the desired Discrete Output Point Number STEP 2 TDO pulses the Discrete Output Point Number 2 percent or 2 seconds STEP 3 Execution of the FST has completed END After a 100 millisecond delay execution resumes with STEP 0 B 17 Database Commands FST Database commands provide access to the ROC or FloBoss configuration and historical databases Operations include reading and writing configuration parameters and reading writing and time stamping values to a History Point VAL The VAL command loads the Results R
312. scribes how to save and retrieve a configuration to and from a ROC or FloBoss 9 1 Save to EEPROM and Internal Configuration Memory This procedure describes how to save configuration settings to the internal memory Using Write to EEPROM and Write to Internal Config Memory in ROC Flags you can back up the working configuration from SRAM to flash memory In the event of operating problems the working configuration can be restored by performing a Cold Start When using a FloBoss 500 Series or FloBoss 103 most configuration settings are stored including calibration values and are loaded into programmable ROM as the new restart configuration All user Flags are maintained at their current status during this process Writing to Configuration Memory causes all incoming communications to be temporarily suspended If an FST is running the FST is temporarily suspended but restarts where 1t was suspended When using a FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series most configuration settings are stored including the calibration values and are loaded into programmable ROM as the new restart configuration All user Flags are maintained at their current status during this process and all incoming communications are temporarily suspended In addition all FSTs in the FloBoss 407 or ROC300 Series unit restart To save the current configuration to memory 1 Select ROC gt Flags Refer to Figure ROC Flags El ES Start Options Advanced Features Start Optio
313. should be Enabled only when necessary If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this point regardless of the alarm configuration The status of the alarm is indicated in the read only Status field Select the RBX Alarming option Disabled Select Disabled to turn RBX Alarming Off On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report By Exception message On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report By Exception message On Alarm Set and Clear In either condition a Spontaneous RBX message generates Note that RBX Alarming also requires the communications port to be properly configured After configuring a point and clicking Apply use Write to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM in the ROC Flags display to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a Cold Start 6 6 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 6 4 1 DP Alarms Pressure Alarms and Temp Alarms If you have enabled alarms for Differential Pressure Pressure or Temperature click Modify Limits in the Multi Variable Sensor screen to alter alarm values DP Alarms Ea Low Alarm E In H AU High larm o In H20 Alarm Deadband jo In H20 Fault value jo In H20 Cancel Figure 6 4 MVS Differential Pressure Alarms Low Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the calculated Differ
314. smit mode before data is applied to transmit Set the Time Out parameter to the actual amount of time that ROCLINK software waits between retries when attempting to communicate through a Comm Port with a ROC or FloBoss The default Time Out is 0 25 seconds but this can be increased if you are having difficulties communicating with a ROC or FloBoss Do not enter O zero in the Time Out field Set the Key Off Delay default is O seconds to define the amount of time to delay when done transmitting a message before turning the RTS signal off Click OK NOTE Do not forget to set up the Comm Ports parameters Refer to Section 8 2 Communication Ports on page 8 5 Click Comnect to establish a connection to the ROC or FloBoss using the setup currently selected or click Apply to save the changes If this 1s the first time that you have connected to the ROC or FloBoss continue to Section 3 Setting the Clock Configuring Communications Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 8 2 Communication Ports on the ROC or FloBoss Select ROC gt Comm Ports to set up communications ports available for incoming and outgoing communications with the ROC or FloBoss and not the personal computer PC PC communication ports are set up using the ROC Directory function in Section 8 1 Communication Parameters on page 8 1 Each communications port has a unique screen with a set of parameters The communication ports located on the ROC or FloBoss provide
315. ss overriding the field output and effectively placing the output into manual mode If Alarming is Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled Set the Time On value In Timed Duration mode this value is an indicator of the on time of the output EU Value pulse width The default is 1 second PID with TDO Control Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual A 3 1 TDO Parameters The TDO Parameters tab becomes accessible when the DOUT Type Timed Duration TDO field is selected in the Discrete Outputs screen Refer to Figure 1 Select Configuration gt I O gt DO Points 2 Select Timed Duration in the DOUT Type field Discrete Output General Advanced TOO Parameters Cycle Time Dm Seconds HS Court foo Seconds 100 Count i 2 00 Seconds Low Reading El id High Reading EU Do EU Value jo Units Percent Copy Le Paste Le Update v o A Cancel t Apply Figure A 3 Timed Duration Output Parameters 3 Set the Cycle Time to define the total time of one cycle the sum of the ON time and OFF time in seconds After a cycle has been completed a new cycle is initiated The default is 15 seconds The Cycle Time should be set to a value higher than the value contained in the 100 Count field The Cycle Time is the period elapsed before the TDO is repeated 4 Set the 0 Count in seconds that represents a zero percent output pulse width The default is 3 seconds This is the minimum amount of tim
316. ss is allowed by the ROC or FloBoss Access Level is ignored Access Level Enabled Security level for each user is stored in the ROC or FloBoss This mode verifies the User ID and Password are valid and rejects a login request when the Access Level requested from ROCLINK is greater than the Access Level stored in the Utilities gt Security screen This ensures the user is limited to the Access Level configured in ROCLINK Enter the Access Level number from 0 to 5 where Level 0 is the lowest level Access Level security determines which functions the user has access to after they are connected to a ROC or FloBoss Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 13 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual For ROC300 Series ROC Security determines how long the Liquid Crystal Display LCD panel will remain connected without input from the specified user Enter the Logon Timeout for the amount of time in minutes allowed with no activity on the LCD before the current user is automatically logged off the LCD Once the LCD panel times out the user will have to log back in on the LCD You can specify the Operator ID Password and the Logon Timeout for up to 10 different users You must enter an Operator and Password for each user who may connect to a LCD For FloBoss 407 ROC Security controls who has access to the Liquid Crystal Display LCD for a connected device Select Operator ID sets each individual s security for up to 32 users Select Enabled to
317. stamp for the values logged You may also use these time values to create minute or second logs instead of the standard hourly log The time stamps represent what time each portion of the accumulated data was logged To define an FST History Point 1 Select History from the Configure menu 2 Select the desired History Point 3 Select the Archive Type e FST Time Min FST Time Sec FST Data 4 Click the Value to Archive TLP button 5 Select the Point Type FST Registers 6 Select the Logical Number such as FST 1 7 Select the Parameter such as Register 2 to contain the data or time stamp 8 Click OK 9 Click Apply 10 Click OK The FST for a History Point uses one of the historical database commands and two Arguments ARGUMENTI contains the history database Point Number ARGUMENT can be a constant between 0 and 89 or a parameter with a value between 0 and 89 ARGUMENT2 for the historical database commands is the index or pointer to the history storage array The history storage array consists of 24 history floating point values per history day for the History Point The maximum number of history days is 35 which provides a total of 840 periods History Values 35 history days Xx 24 values per history day 840 periods B 34 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual This is the number of archived periods per history database point for a given RAM area In a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC Base
318. sting backup select No When you select Yes backup files containing the current FloBoss configuration calibration and communication settings and FSTs are created in the C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data directory These backup files named backup fef backup c_c and backup fsb respectively are automatically reloaded after the firmware is installed Select the Firmware File to download This dialog displays the names of all files with the BIN extension located in the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data Navigate to the location of the firmware file such as the A drive Highlight the desired File name in the Files list and click Open The file begins loading with the Status Line showing the progress in four categories Segment Address Block Size and Total Sent While the flash memory is being modified the I O is not read but is held at the last values Click Yes in the History Warning dialog Click OK The loading process typically takes several minutes do not disturb 1t during this time When loading of the firmware is complete the backup files are automatically loaded into the FloBoss and the actions are recorded in its Event Log When reloading of backups is complete a message appears saying Update of ROC Firmware Completed Successfully The action is recorded in the Event Log Click OK to return to the menus You can verify the upgrade by going to the Information screen available from the S
319. story Par H7 Flow Dep Linear Average Exponent Formulaic Only pp History Point 8 O Flow Dep Formulaic Average History Point 9 Accum Time Basis Flow Accum Only History Point 10 Flow Wat Linear Average z Seconds Flow Wat Formulaic Average i Minutes Flow Accumulation O Hours Ge Flow Minute Accum eu Copy La Paste 2 Update Iw ml Cancel El Figure 7 1 History Points 2 Select the Meter ID from the drop down list box Meter IDs will reflect the number of active meters The Meter Tag identification name of the meter run will be displayed 3 Select the History Point to configure The History Point identifies which of the general historical database points will be used to store the meter history This number must NOT be repeated from meter run to meter run Undefined points display as Undefined in the Value to Archive field If a number appears in the History Point field it has been assigned The first eight history points of the first flow run are pre configured with default values used in EFM Reporting for an AGA3 orifice meter run Do not change these values except for the averaging type or accumulation basis or your EFM Reporting may be incorrect If the first flow run is an AGA7 turbine meter run delete the meter history points for differential pressure and pressure extension Rev 05 03 Configuring and Viewing History 7 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 7 4 If a O zero appears specify
320. t begin calibration Point Line Press Dead Weight Tester 20000000 Live Reading 483 8250 Difference fi 61 275 a Live Act Span H Log Veriy y Done Figure 5 21 Verify Calibration Logging 8 Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units This is the input desired for the test value and is the actual value expected by the test equipment being calibrated against For example when calibrating temperature for an RTD input enter the degree value associated with the resistance set up in the decade box Compare this value with the Live Reading If the value 1s too far out of tolerance be sure to perform calibration for the input For each point in the range that you want a record of the verification to be placed in the Event Log click the Log Verify button 5 24 Configuring the Meter Setup Rev 05 03 10 11 12 13 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Click the Calibrate button for the desired input Calibrate the zero value 0 of range for Differential Pressure orifice only Static Pressure or Temperature This should correspond with the 0 Count and is the low value for the meter run Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units This should be a 0 zero value The dialog box shown in Figure 5 22 appears Set Zero Paint Line Press Dead Weight Tester 20000000 Live Reading Les a 00 Z Difference fi 61 970 a Live Act Span H Set Zero Cancel Figure 5 22
321. t Configuration Analog Outputs are analog signals generated by the ROC or FloBoss to regulate equipment LA such as control valves or any device requiring proportional control 1 Select Configure gt I O gt AO Points Refer to Figure Analog Outputs General dvanced Analog Outputs fi D Point Number E 1 Tag ao Det Value a Units Scanning imni Low Reading EU eooo Enabled High Reading EU 20 Se C Disabled C Disabled Active Alarms None Copy Paste Le Update Iw o A Cancel P Apply Figure 4 3 Analog Outputs Select the Analog Output and Point Number 3 Enter the Units value and a Tag identification name 4 If Scanning is set to Disable enter a Value to override the output When Scanning is set to Enable Value displays the last Analog Output scan in engineering unit Rev 05 03 Configuring Basic I O 4 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 Enter the Low Reading EU engineering units value corresponding to a zero percent output the low end of the EU range Based on the EU range determined in part by this parameter the EU Value is converted to a corresponding analog signal 6 Enter the High Reading EU value corresponding to a 100 percent output the high end of the EU range Based on the EU range determined in part by this parameter the EU Value is converted to a corresponding analog signal 4 3 1 1 AO Advanced Advanced Analog Outputs enables you to configure features su
322. t Scale 1 The Integer to Float conversion changes a Integer to Float Float Scale 2 transmitted integer value to a floating point value for Integer to Float Float Scale 3 6 16 the FloBoss The number of the Convert Code Integer to Float Float Scale 4 specifies which floating point scaling value is to be used for the conversion If no fractional part is Integer to Float Float Scale 5 coming through on conversion from integer to float Integer to Float Float Scale 6 use a float conversion that more closely fits the Integer to Float Float Scale 7 range of integer to be converted such as float Integer to Float Float Scale 8 range 0 to 10 instead of 0 to 1000 25 Integer to Float No Scaling 3 4 6 16 When using Function Code 3 or 4 this conversion changes any data type unsigned or signed Character Integer or Long in the FloBoss to a floating point value for transmission to the Host When using function code 6 or 16 this conversion changes a transmitted floating point value to the correct data type for the FloBoss TLP 26 t0 32 Character to Integer The Character to Integer conversion changes a FloBoss character data type to an integer for transmission to the host The Integer to Character conversion changes a transmitted integer value to a character data type for the FloBoss 35 Long to Integer 3 4 The Long to Integer conversion changes a FloBoss long data type to an integer for transmission to the host Integer to Ch
323. t Type 29 Extra Run parameter the point type parameters are mapped to Point Type 41 Run parameter and Point Type 42 Extra Run parameter You must re map any references to the old point types over to the new point types Areas of concern include but are not limited to History Opcodes e ROC Displays e PID inputs mb Save History the Event Log and the Alarms Log using the File gt Save Configuration If you have an LCD Display also save LCD and User List configuration 2 Select Utilities gt Upgrade to FlashPAC 3 Click Start 4 Click Yes You can back up your History log Events Log and Alarms Log before upgrading 5 Wait while the ROC saves your configuration e NOTE Before removing and restoring power in the following steps ensure that all input devices output devices and processes remain in a safe state Be sure to observe all cautions and procedures given in the hardware documentation 6 When prompted remove power from the ROC by removing the power Bat Bat terminal block Leave the computer running 7 Remove the memory module retainer by loosening the two thumbscrews and lifting it off 8 Remove the ROCPAC by lifting up on the module and removing from the socket 9 Remove the RAMPAC modules 1f present by lifting up on the module and removing 1t from the socket 10 Install the FlashPAC making sure it is firmly seated by pressing firmly but gently 11 Re install the memory
324. t and clicking Apply use Write to Internal Config Memory or Write to EEPROM in the ROC Flags display to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a Cold Start 4 2 1 1 Al Advanced The Analog Input Advanced tab enables you to configure features such as filtering A D conversions and clipping for the selected Analog Input 4 6 Select Configure gt I O gt AI Points gt Advanced tab Analog Input General Advanced al Calibration Alarms Filter Boo Adjusted A D 0 fo Adjusted A D 100 29695 Raw A D Input fo Actual Scan ph Secs Average Raw Value Temp Compensation gt Ge Enabled Ge Enabled C Disabled Disabled Disabled Copy e Paste 2 Update v o x Cancel Apply Figure 4 2 Analog Inputs Advanced Enter a Filter value which is a weighted sample using a percentage of the last value plus a percentage of the new value The entered data is the percentage of the last value used The filter is calculated every Scan Period by the formula Last Value x Entered New Value x 100 Entered Filtered Value Enter the Adjusted A D 0 calibrated analog to digital A D reading corresponding to zero percent input This value is used to convert the input to engineering units In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the zero percent input exactly at the Low Reading EU value to eliminate transmitter and system errors Enter the Adjusted A D
325. t may access the network The ROC Group is the Group of similar ROC or FloBoss units and the ROC Address is the Address of the specific ROC or FloBoss with which you desire to communicate If you are connected to a multi drop series of ROC or FloBoss units enter the exact and unique ROC Address and ROC Group of that specific ROC or FloBoss to talk to that device The Group and Address name are logged with the historical database for easy site identification Y NOTE Once you are connected the Configuration Tree menu becomes the active screen 2 1 1 Adding a Group To add a new Group under the ROC Root directory Select highlight the ROC Root directory icon RAUL Root 1 2 Right mouse click 3 Select Add a Group 4 Type the name of the ROC or FloBoss Group in the New Groupxx field Follow the instructions in Section 2 1 3 to add a ROC to this group Rev 05 03 ROC Directory 2 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual a ROC Root I Te ROC CO Te ROC COMM Modem ROC amp New Group De New ROCI New ROC We New Groupe Mew ROCA n New Group Figure 2 3 New ROC in Group Notice that a Group can have a sub Group under it Refer to Figure New Group2 has the sub Group New Group NOTE Once a ROC or FloBoss within the Group is configured simply double click the ROC or FloBoss icon under the Group to connect to that device Once you are connected the Configuration Tree menu becomes the active screen
326. t the FST Editor Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 11 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 5 Select From File from the Read option in the FST File menu 6 Select the File name and click Open B 7 2 Starting the FST Once an FST is compiled without errors and is downloaded to the ROC or FloBoss the FST must be started in order to run 1 Select Configure gt Control gt FST Register 2 Select the desired FST from the drop down list box 3 Select the FST Status checkbox 4 Click Apply 5 Click OK B 7 3 Printing an FST You can print an FST in two ways e Use FST gt Print Step to print the Workspace contents and includes STEP numbers Use FST gt Print IP to print the Workspace contents and includes Instruction Pointers used in Trace mode The Instruction Pointer IP indicates the location in ROC or FloBoss memory of the next function to be executed An IP listing is often used with the Trace mode to assist in debugging an FST A printed FST can help you in troubleshooting B 7 4 Altering an FST The FST Edit menu is used to manipulate data within the Workspace cells Select Edit gt Insert places a blank line in the Workspace before the current line Allows a function to be added to the FST between two existing functions Select Edit gt Delete to delete the current line from the Workspace Select Edit gt Erase to erase the contents of the current Workspace Select Edit gt Goto to go to the STEP specified This is a q
327. ted with a B are located on the I O Card when installed Point Numbers designated with an E are diagnostic inputs 4 1 1 Scanning Disabled versus Scanning Enabled The Scanning options enable or disable scanning for each Point Number For the input or output to automatically process the field input or output the I O Scanning parameter must be set to Enabled Automatic Mode When Scanning is set to Disabled it effectively places the input into Manual Mode An alarm is generated when Scanning is set to Disabled When Scanning is set to Disabled you must be connected to the device manually enter necessary values in the I O screen and click Apply to process the field input or output NOTE I O Scanning must also be Enabled under ROC gt Flags Rev 05 03 Configuring Basic I O 4 3 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 1 2 Alarms You can either Enable or Disable limit Alarming for each Point Number on the General tab of the Meter gt Setup screen If you Enable Alarming the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured on the Alarms tab Alarms are also logged to the Alarm Log If you Disable Alarming no limit alarms generate for this point regardless of the Alarm configuration SY so NOTE Discrete Output alarms cannot be configured The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enable the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that ar
328. ter a name if you want the Start Menu program folder to be named other than the default ROCLINK for Windows The default is recommended Click Next and click Finish 11 The Setup Complete screen will appear If you have not yet read the readme file leave 1t selected Click the Finish button Select View Manual or Exit on the Main Menu screen 12 Once you have exited the Main Menu remove the ROCLINK software installation CD ROM 1 4 2 Installing ROCLINK for Windows Software without AutoRun This section details first time installation of ROCLINK software If you already have a previous version of ROCLINK software installed refer to Section on page 1 6 To install ROCLINK software on a personal computer perform the following steps 1 Place the ROCLINK for Windows Installation CD ROM into your drive 1 4 Getting Started Rev 05 03 nw EE ANE E E ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Click the Windows Start button Select Run Click the Browse button Navigate to and select the Setup exe located on the ROCLINK for Windows CD ROM Click OK in the Navigation window Click OK in the Run window Refer to the installation steps in Section 1 4 1 Installing ROCLINK for Windows Software using AutoRun Rev 05 03 Getting Started 1 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 4 3 Manually Creating a Desktop Shortcut ROCLINK for Windows software installation should automatically create a Desktop Shortcut on your computer If for some re
329. the Point Tag ID is a parameter of an Analog Input point Parameters are normally edited by using configuration software running on a PC Pf Flowing pressure PC Personal Computer P DP Pressure Differential Pressure PI Pulse Input Also referred to as PIN PID Proportional Integral and Derivative control feedback action PIT Periodic Timer Interrupt Point Software oriented term for an I O channel or some other function such as a flow calculation Points are defined by a collection of parameters Point Number The location of an I O point as installed in the ROC system Point Type Defines the database point to be a specifice type of point available to the system The point type determines the basic functions of a point Preset Number value previously determined for an register PRI Primary PID control loop PSTN Public switched telephone network PT Process Temperature PTT Push to talk signal Pulse Transient variation of a signal whose value is normally constant PV Process variable or process value G 4 Glossary of Terms Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual R RAM Random Access Memory In a ROC809 it is used to store history data most user programs and additional configuration data RBX Report by exception In a ROC809 it always refers to Spontaneous RBX in which the ROC contacts the host to report an alarm condition RFI Radio Freq
330. the Pressure Tap Location as Upstream or Downstream Select the Action on Failure to set the sensor to retain the last values Hold Last Value at which the sensor was at before the failure or you can set the sensor to return to the default values Set To Fault Value when the sensor fails Select to Enable or Disable Diff Pressure Alarms If Enabled the alarms can be configured using the DP Alarms dialog box accessed by clicking Modify Limits Alarms are also logged to the Alarm Log To optimize processor time alarms should be Enabled only when necessary If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this point regardless of the alarm configuration The status of the alarm is indicated in the read only Status field Refer to Section DP Alarms Pressure Alarms and Temp Alarms on page 6 7 Select to Enable or Disable Pressure Alarms If Enabled the alarms can be configured using the Press Alarms dialog box accessed by clicking Modify Limits Alarms are also logged to the Alarm Log To optimize processor time alarms should be Enabled only when necessary If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this point regardless of the alarm configuration The status of the alarm is indicated in the read only Status field Select to Enable or Disable Temperature Alarms If Enabled the alarms can be configured using the Temp Alarms dialog box accessed by clicking Modify Limits Alarms are also logged to the Alarm Log To optimize processor time alarms
331. the amount of time that the TDO is energized 9 Define the Units as a 10 character name for the engineering units assigned to the TDO output for example MCF or CFM A 4 Close Reverse Discrete Output Configuration The configuration for the close reverse Discrete Output 1s the same as the open forward Discrete Output Refer to Figure for the close reverse Discrete Output configuration If the correction 1s positive it is routed to the open forward DO If the correction is negative it is sent to the close reverse DO A 5 PID Parameter Configuration The Proportional Integral and Derivative PID parameters are configured using the DO control mode of operation Refer to Figure for the configuration examples NOTE To enable PIDs select Information from the System menu and click the Advanced Features tab Enter the number of PIDs you desire cannot exceed the number available in the PIDs Active field Closed loop PID control is used to provide smooth and stable operation of the feedback control loops employing a regulating device such as a control valve The typical use for PID parameters 1s to control a process variable to a setpoint Refer to Figure 1 Select Configure gt Control gt PID A 4 PID with TDO Control Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual PID Loop ls PID NE poe Type Single D Tag PID 1 Loop Status Disabled Discrete y gree Calc Time fi Secs C Disabled Auto Loop Period H Secs Se
332. the first eight history points are configured as follows 1 Accumulate Flowing Minutes Counts from Pulse Input Primary Device Average Static Pressure or Line Pressure Average Temperature C C Prime Accumulated Uncorrected Flow Accumulated Flow A Er E E ES Accumulated Energy Table 7 1 Required History Configuration per Meter Run lacas AGA7 History Point Description Point Type Parameter Archive Type 1 ERN stands for the Extra Run Parameters point type FLW stands for the Flow Calculation point type PIN stands for Pulse Input Point 2 For a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC the point type is FLW the parameter is FLWMIN and the archive type is Accumulate 3 This point is set in General History on the Configure gt History screen All others are set in the Meter History on the Meter gt History screen 7 1 1 Meter History for FloBoss 103 FloBoss 500 Series and ROC300 Series with ROCPAC The Meter History feature is not configurable for a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC a FloBoss 103 or A FloBoss 500 Series unit For a FloBoss 103 or 500 Series unit meter history points are factory configured and cannot be changed Do not attempt to change the configuration of the first eight points ROC300 Series units with a ROCPAC are void of default values An AGA user program is required to configure the history points for AGA calculations 7 2 Configuring and Viewing History Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Wind
333. the history database point 1 to 50 for a FloBoss 407 or 1 to 87 for a ROC with FlashPAC that you want to assign to this history point Make sure not to assign the same number already assigned in another meter run To page between the 10 FloBoss 407 or 16 ROC300 Series with FlashPAC points for each meter run select another history point from the list Click the Value to Archive TLP button to specify a Point Type Logical Number and Parameter to be archived Select an Archive Type radio button to specify the exact Archive Type of the history point The Archive Type affects how the logged value is calculated Flow Dep Linear Average Flow Dependent Linear Average is the default method for calculating the average for the flow input It is the simplest and most commonly used method This method discards samples for periods when there is no measurable flow and performs a straightforward linear average of the remaining samples to compute the minute hourly and daily values The value specified in the Low Flow Cutoff of the Meter setup determines whether there is flow or no flow When no flow occurs during an entire logging interval all values are sampled Flow Dep Formulaic Average Like the Flow Dependent Average method this method discards samples for periods when there is no flow However in calculating the average this method typically takes the square root of each sample before averaging the samples together an
334. the sequence STEP 5 SAV stores the value of the Timer to Register R6 o Fo bh STEP 6 to 8 The sequence of FST commande for which the rate of execution is being determined 6 STEP 9 The sequence of commands has completed executing VAL reads the Timer to determine the time of execution 7 STEP 10 SAV stores the value of the timer to Register R7 Take the difference between the two Register values R7 and R6 and multiply by 0 1 to arrive at an execution rate in seconds rounded to the nearest 100 milliseconds Another way of determining the execution rate 1s to utilize the alarm functionality of the ROC or FloBoss For example determining the execution rate of an instantaneous flow calculation of a meter run can be accomplished by enabling alarms for the meter run and changing the inputs forcing the flow rate into and out of alarm conditions The Alarm Log can then be examined to determine execution rate of the instantaneous flow calculation to the nearest second B 19 5 Example 5 Daily Accumulation by FST This example presents the setup configuration and operation of an FST that calculates daily accumulation Daily accumulation requires storage parameters for current and intermediate calculated values For this example FST Registers are used as the storage parameters RI Current rate EUs Day R2 Current day accumulation current value or totalization R3 Yesterday accumulation R4 Unused
335. the values for history points other than FST controlled logged in the ROC or FloBoss on a daily basis for the past 35 entries The daily log entry 1s created at the end of the Contract Hour except when Force End of Day refer to System Information screen is used The values are always displayed with the most recent value first The Min Max database option displays the minimum and maximum values for history points logged in the ROC or FloBoss over a 24 hour period The minimum and maximum values are determined and stored at the end of each day based on the contract hour Click Upload to open the history log screen From this screen you can save print select a new log or close the log report Select History points to be shown xl Search Criteria wi Meter 1 _MINTDY weier 1 CURDP Select wieter 1 CURFP JMeter 1 CURTMP Deselec t All v Meter 1 CPRIME Select All Meter 1 HWPF Ss Meter 1 FLOW Frequency Meter 1 ENERGY C Minute C Hour Day Min Max 4 Upload X Cancel Figure 7 7 Select History Points to be Shown 7 3 2 From File A report is generated based on your Search Criteria from a disk file 1 2 3 Select View menu gt History Alarm Event or Audit Log gt From File Select the file and click Open Perform one of the following Select New Return to the Select History points to be shown screen and perform a new search Rev 05 03 Co
336. ther PSI or kPa depending upon the sensor configuration 8 Enter the scaled Process Temperature reading from the sensor The units are in either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius depending upon the sensor configuration 9 Enable Scanning for the input to receive and process the field input When Scanning is Disabled it effectively places the input into Manual Mode An alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled When Scanning fails Failed displays in the field 10 Select either US English Units or Metric units for calculations If Metric units are selected then the AGA calculation expects all inputs to be in the indicated units such as kPa for the static pressure input 11 Enable or Disable Sensor Alarms Rev 05 03 Extended Functions 6 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 12 Status displays the alarm conditions of the sensor or any alarms that are active for this point 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 When Sensor Alarms Diff Pressure Alarms Pressure Alarms or Temperature Alarms are Enabled the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even 1f all alarms are Disabled the Point Fail alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear If Sensor Alarms is Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled Click Write under Sensor Config to update the sensor with the current values on the screen or click Read to read the sensor s current values Select
337. tinuous Polling to continuously poll for Modbus messages 5 Enter the Starting Host Request line number entry in the host table where you desire the poll to begin The poll request continues through each line starting at the value entered in this field until it reads a O in the Modbus host table 6 Enter the Host Poll Delay to specify the amount of time in seconds to wait between poll transmissions The Transmission Status displays the current status of the Modbus program Rev 05 03 Configuring Communications 8 11 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 8 2 4 Configuring RBX Alarming on the ROC or FloBoss The SRBX Spontaneous Report By Exception alarming feature is available for the host communication ports not the Local Port This feature allows the ROC or FloBoss to call in to a host computer when an alarm occurs All parameters must be configured correctly to prevent nuisance alarms from being reported to the host If you desire dial up RBX then a modem must be present and appropriately configured ey Se E a 6 8 12 NOTE To perform RBX through a dial up modem in a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC you must have the Communications Enhancement User Program installed To perform dial up SRBX in a FloBoss 407 upgrade its firmware to Version 1 05 or greater Select ROC gt Comm Ports Select the host Port Comm1 or Comm2 and select RBX Mode Enabled Ensure that all parameters on the Comm Ports General tab are corre
338. tion Equipment Rev 05 03 Glossary of Terms G 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Deadband A value that is an inactive zone above the low limits and below the high limits The purpose of the deadband is to prevent a value such as an alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the specified limit This also prevents the logs or data storage location from being over filled with data DI Discrete Input Also referred to as DIN Discrete Input or output that is non continuous typically representing two levels such as on off DO Discrete Output Also referred to as DOU DP Differential Pressure DSR Data Set Ready modem communications signal DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTR Data Terminal Ready modem communications signal Duty Cycle Proportion of time during a cycle that a device is activated A short duty cycle conserves power for I O channels radios and such DVS Dual Variable Sensor that provides static and differential pressure inputs to a FloBoss 503 E EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory a form of permanent memory EFM Electronic Flow Metering or Measurement EIA 232 RS 232 Serial Communications Protocol using three or more signal lines intended for short distances Concerning RS232D and RS232C the letters C or D refer to the physical connector type D specifies the RJ 11 connector where a C specifies a DB25 stype
339. tion while viewing a history log Select the desired log file Specify the file name of the spreadsheet file and its intended directory location in the Convert As field Use the DOS naming conventions when naming your files You may specify a file name with up to eight characters before the period and an extension with three characters after the period for example Convert2 txt or History2 txt Select a conversion file format Tab delimited spreadsheet ASCII text Comma delimited spreadsheet ASCII text Space delimited spreadsheet ASCII text 5 Click Start Converting 6 Select Yes to create a new file or click No to use the existing file name 7 Click OK in the Source and Target file dialog Rev 05 03 Saving Retrieving 9 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 9 8 Print Configuration The Print Configuration option allows you to specify the Point Types that you desire to Print 1 Select File gt Print Configuration 2 Select the Point Types you desire to print Use Select All or DeSelect All to change multiple Point Types Select or DeSelect individual Point Types by selecting the configuration Point Type in the left hand column and selecting specific Point Types in the right hand column 3 Click OK 4 Click Print The Point Types you selected print to your Default Windows Printer or to the Printer you have selected under Print Setup in the File menu The ROC Group ROC Address Station Name Field and Va
340. to configure the history points for AGA calculations NOTE The default values in a FloBoss 500 Series change according to whether Orifice AGA3 or Turbine AGA7 is selected in the Meter Setup screen AGA7 looks at the pulse input for History Point 2 which varies depending on whether a sensor module or an I O card is being used Even though the AGA7 defaults do not match Table 7 1 exactly the EFM reports work correctly Table 7 2 Optional History Configuration per Meter Run H2S Hyd Si O2 Oxygen CO Car Monoxide CH4 Methane METEAN Ill 7 2 1 1 EFM Reports EFM Reports generate printed and on screen reports of the historical flow data for a meter point Selecting View gt EFM Reports opens the initial screen as shown in Figure 7 3 This section describes how to use the EFM Electronic Flow Measurement Reports utility This utility program is used in conjunction with the AGA flow calculation capabilities of the ROC or FloBoss to display or print previously collected flow data This flow data is contained in an EFM Report file which includes the operational characteristics of all the meter runs configured in the ROC or FloBoss The operational characteristics consist of Configuration Parameters Hourly and Daily History Events and Alarms associated with each measured meter run For a Canadian custody transfer ROC or FloBoss the Audit Log events are also included To create the EFM Report disk file use ROC gt Collect Data while t
341. to load a value into the Compare Flag directly the two commands VAL and SAV are used STEP 0 and STEP 1 likewise it takes both commands to save a value from the Compare Flag STEP 3 and STEP 4 B 28 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 3 STEP 2 OR takes the logical OR between the Compare Flag and the value of the integer 1 binary 0001 The result is written into the Compare Flag overwriting the contents previous CONTRL value Thus the OR operation effectively sets the right most bit Bit 0 to a logical 1 leaving the other bits unaffected Because the Auto Manual Mode is controlled by Bit 0 of the CONTRL Parameter only this bit is set to 1 which is interpreted as the Auto Mode 4 STEP 3 VAL loads the contents of the Compare Flag back into the Results Register STEP 4 SAV copies the Results Register into the CONTRL parameter of the FLOWCNTL point with the Auto Manual Mode now set to Auto 6 STEP 5 Execution of the FST is complete END After a 100 millisecond delay execution resumes B 14 Comparison Commands FST Comparison commands conditionally compare two values and branch to a different sequence of commands if the comparison is determined to be true If the comparison is determined to be false no branching occurs and the next command in sequence is executed Comparison commands test values for equivalence non equivalence less than less than or equal to g
342. to the Sensor Calibration section in the FloBoss 503 Flow Manager Instruction Manual Form A6050 for the recommended way to remove restore the DVS from to working pressure during calibration Failure to follow recommendations may cause sensor damage NOTE If you have a FloBoss 407 you can also perform MVS calibration from its keypad Refer to the FloBoss 407 Instruction Manual Form A6013 or the ROC FloBoss Accessories Instruction Manual Form A4637 Perform the following steps to calibrate a meter run 1 Select Meter gt Calibration or the AI Calibration tab in the Analog Inputs screen 2 Select a specific meter run Meter ID to verify and calibrate The FloBoss 103 and 500 Series have one meter run so the Meter ID selection is unavailable The Meter Tag identifies the meter run Meter Calibration Freeze Values Diff Pressure Low DP Stat Pressure Temperature 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 ralibrate ralibrate ralibrate ralibrate K Cancel Figure 5 19 Initial Meter Calibration Dialog Box Typical Device AGA3 Shown 3 Click Freeze to stop the values of the Differential Pressure Low Differential Pressure labeled Low DP Static Pressure and Temperature from being updated during verification or calibration This effectively freezes the values used in ongoing processing such as history logging while calibration is being performed This effectively freezes the values Freeze Values used in ongoing
343. tor B 9 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 6 FSTs and Writing to Configuration Memory When using Write to EEPROM or Write to Internal Config Memory FSTs may or may not be saved to memory When using a ROC300 Series with a ROCPAC or a FloBoss 407 version 1 03 or less FST s are NOT saved to memory and must be saved to a disk file If an FST is saved to memory and is active running when a Cold Start Warm Start or other type of restart occurs you must manually restart all FSTs When using a FloBoss 500 Series a ROC300 Series with a FlashPAC or a FloBoss 407 version 1 04 or greater FSTs are permanently saved to memory If an FST is saved to memory and is active running when a Cold Start Warm Start or other type of restart occurs all FSTs automatically restart at the beginning STEP 0 When using a FloBoss 103 FSTs are not saved to memory B 7 Working with FSTs B 7 1 Creating an FST An FST can be created directly from a ROC a FloBoss or from a disk file Depending on whether you select to create an FST from the ROC or from a disk file the process of creating an FST is somewhat different You can also Read an FST from a computer disk file or from the ROC FloBoss Memory If invalid points exist in the FST you receive an error indicating which Point Number is missing Use the following steps to create an FST using an active on line ROC or FloBoss 1 Connect the ROC or FloBoss to the computer running ROCLINK software
344. tpoint o Primary PV AIN ALEU E Process Variable o DO Open Pt po A 4EU Pa Output fo DO Close Pt DO B5EU Ed Scanning Mode Tuning gt gt Copy Paste FJUpdate Wok xX Cancel Y Apply Figure A 4 Primary PID Parameters FloBoss 500 Series Set Scanning to Enabled Loop Status displays the current state of the PID algorithm Set the Mode to Auto Select Control Type to Single and Discrete in the Control Type lists er Re E Set the Loop Period as the amount of time between PID calculations in second intervals for the Primary loop To provide the best timing this parameter is typically set to one fourth of the time required for the actuator to move the valve from fully open to fully closed In this example it takes 60 seconds to move the valve over its range so the Loop Period is set to 15 seconds 6 Set the Primary PID parameters to control a Process Variable to a Setpoint Set the Setpoint around which the Primary Process Variable is controlled Initially set to 0 After the loop is totally configured set to the desired control Setpoint value Set the Process Variable current value as measured by the input definition used for comparison to the Setpoint When in Manual Mode you may enter a value to be in line with the Setpoint so there 1s not a harsh jump at startup Rev 05 03 PID with TDO Control A 5 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 7 Set the Discrete I O Definitions when Singl
345. tput represents the two states of the output on or off closed or open or 0 and such The DO command tells the FST to set the value of the function to ARGUMENT2 The PUMPON function latches Discrete Output number IOAS to the closed or 1 position and the PMPOFF function latches the Discrete Output number IOAS to the open or 0 position When the LOAL low alarm condition is met the FST branches to the PMPOFF function to set the DO to the open or off position and stops the pump LABEL ARGUMENTI ARGUMENT2 PUMPON IOAS PUMP1 STATUS 1 UC CKLOAL VAL 1089 Tank Level EU AAA PMPOFF DO IOA5 PUMP 1 STATUS 0 UC Figure B 6 DO Function Example VAL lt IOB9 Tank Level LOAL PMPOFF LABEL END B 8 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 5 Basic Rules for Creating FSTs Several rules should be followed when creating FSTs An END command is required at the end of every FST The END command tells the FST to return to the top of the first FST STEP and begin to run the FST from the first line at STEP 0 At the end of an FST never have the FST return to the first line STEP 0 or the beginning STEP of the FST The FST automatically restarts at the beginning STEP when it reaches the END command CMD The first blank line found in an FST is automatically converted to the END command Any commands following a blank line are lost Only one END command can be present in an FST It is i
346. ts LCD Tank Measurements Opcode Table MVS Sensor Radio Power Control MODBUS LCD User List Setup Hart Point Hart Device User Data User Program Screen Help Menu Help Topics About ROCLINK Figure 1 2 Configuration Menu Tree for the On line ROCLINK for Windows Software Getting Started Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 7 1 Menu Bar and Menus The menu bar appears on the screen after successfully logging on Your security level may limit the menus available from the menu bar z RocLink For Windows On Line Menu Bar Mm File Edt View AOC Configure Meier Utilities A Tia Help ToolBar D H i IZ ul Buttons Station Name va Analog Inputs rs Analog Outputs Configuration We Discrete Inputs H um Discrete Output Tree Menu M Pulse Input E Meier El 1 Meter 1 kl System Comm Forts Status Line Figure 1 3 Sample ROCLINK for Windows Software Display From the menu bar you can use either the keyboard or the mouse to activate a menu and then to select a function in that menu You can also select functions using ToolBar Buttons or the Configuration Tree Menu Rev 05 03 Getting Started ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 7 2 Standard Buttons Several buttons appear on the majority of ROCLINK for Windows software screens Minimize and hide windows Maximize the size of the windows to fit in the screen area Return to Original size of the window Close a window
347. ttery Shutoff parameter allows power cycling to be automatically disabled whenever the input voltage to the ROC falls below the specified threshold To use Radio Power Control 6 18 Extended Functions Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 Select Configure gt Radio Power Control Select the Radio Power Control point you desire to configure 3 Enter the Tag as a 10 character name to identify this point with 1ts respective communications port A The Radio Power Status indicates the current status of the Power Control function of ON OFF or RBX 5 The Active Zone indicates which zone is currently activated for determining the Start Time On Time and Off Time Select Radio Power Control Enabled to activate the Radio Power Control function 7 Select the Time Units as Seconds or Minutes In Seconds mode the time base for the timers 1s 1n 0 1 second increments primarily used with radios In Minutes mode the time base for the timers is in 1 minute increments primarily used with cellular telephones 8 Enter the Zone parameters to indicate when Radio Power Control is active and inactive for various Zones Start Time in hours and minutes HHMM that the respective Zone begins Time is expressed in local time 24 hour clock For example 1500 under Zone 2 means that the associated On Time and Off Time are used beginning at 3 00 p m On Time during a power cycle when the output is in the ON state in seconds unl
348. ty Extended Functions 6 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Enter the Reset Integral Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in input the Primary Process Variable based on control action in which the output is proportional to the time integral of the input An initial Reset setting of 3 is recommended to avoid loop instability This value is in terms of repeats per minute Enter the Rate Derivative Gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in input the Primary Process Variable based on control action in which the output is proportional to the rate of change of the input An initial Rate setting of 0 1s recommended to avoid loop instability Enter the Scale Factor number representing the ratio of the output span to input Primary Process Variable span The sign of the number specifies the action of the loop negative for reverse action the default or positive for direct action Reverse action causes the PID loop point to produce a decrease in output to close a valve for example when the Process Variable exceeds the Setpoint Enter the Integral Deadband as a window around the Primary Setpoint When the Primary Process Variable is within this window the integral action Reset is disabled If Discrete Output Control Type is enabled no output pulses are produced For example if you enter 5 there 1s a region of 5 units above and 5 units below the Setpoint in which the Process Variable ca
349. uency Interference RI Ring Indicator modem communications signal ROC Remote Operations Controller microprocessor based unit that provides remote monitoring and control ROCLINK Configuration software used to configure ROC and FloBoss units to gather data as well as most other functions ROM Read only memory Typically used to store firmware Flash memory RTC Real time clock RTD Resistance Temperature Detector RTS Ready to Send modem communications signal RTU Remote Terminal Unit RX or RXD Received data communications signal S Script A uncompiled text file such as keystrokes for a macro that is interpreted by a program to perform certain functions Typically scripts can be easily created or edited by the end user to customize the software Soft Points A type of ROC point with generic parameters that can be configured to hold data as desired by the user SP Setpoint or Static Pressure SPI Slow Pulse Input SRAM Static Random Access Memory Stores data as long as power is applied typically backed up by a lithium battery or supercapacitor SRBX Spontaneous Report By Exception See RBX SVA Signal Value Analog SVD Signal Value Discrete T U T C Thermocouple Input TDI Time Duration Input TDO Time Duration Output Tf Flowing temperature TLP Type of point Logical or point number and Parameter number TX or TXD Transmitted d
350. uick way of moving from one place to another and is especially useful in long FSTs Select Edit gt Listing to list the FST number Name Size Date Time Version Number and Operator ID of the FSTs contained in the ROC or FloBoss The Listing option displays information detailing each FST loaded in ROC memory Refer to Figure B 7 B 12 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual FST Name FST Description FST SEQH1 fst1 FST SEQH2 fst1 FST SEQHS fst1 FST SEQH4 fst1 Size Date Start Addr E 0 7997 7998 7999 4 File s 7887 bytes free HAM 8000 bytes Figure B 7 FST Listing B 7 5 Stopping the FST To stop the execution of an FST go to the Configure gt FST Registers screen and set its Status to Disable Use FST gt Kill and select the desired FST to permanently delete an FST B 7 6 Execution Error An execution error occurs when the FST references a Point Number that has been removed or changed Execution errors are indicated when the Status is set to Off and execution of the FST is halted In Trace mode you can view at which Instruction Pointer IP the FST failed Use the Print function to print the FST for troubleshooting B 8 View Menu FST The FST View menu lists options for selecting the view Tags Parameters and Commands used to develop FSTs B 8 1 Workspace FST Activates the Workspace window The Workspace view is populated with the actual FST data when a F ST f
351. umed for the input are PSIG or PSIA and kPa if Metric conversion is enabled If Manual appears the Values field can be used to enter an engineering units value for the meter input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value Click the Temperature TLP button to assign the input that senses the temperature of the flowing gas The units assumed for the input are degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius 1f Metric conversion is enabled If Manual appears the Values field can be used to enter an engineering units value for the meter input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value Click the Linear Meter Input Turbine and ISO TLP button to assigns the input that senses the input from a turbine meter typically pulses The units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or 1000 cubic meters per day kM day if the Metric conversion 1s enabled When an input is selected the Values field indicates the uncorrected flow rate in unit volume day NOTE For Level A pulse integrity a phantom input PIN A 7 corrected pulse train automatically appears here do not change this input or Level A integrity will not function NOTE For Levels B and C pulse integrity input PIN A 5 Channel A pulse train from Sensor Module automatically appears This may be changed if desired to PIN A 6 Click the UnCorrected Volume TLP button to assign the input that senses the input from a turbine meter typical
352. unctions If a user 1s not set up in the ROC Security screen the user cannot connect to the communication ports Liquid Crystal Display LCD or Local Display Panel LDP OCH Ris KE Operator Logon Timeout Access Select Operator ID EP Pm LO Operator ID KFO Password H 000 LCD Display Always ON e Disabled Enabled User List 1 User List 3 E Allow Viewing e Allow Editing e Allow Viewing Je Allow Editing User List 2 Standard Lists E Allow Viewing e Allow Editing e Allow Viewing M Allow Editing 2 Update Iw o A Cancel Apply 2 Update Iw o Pai Cancel P Apply Figure 3 12 ROC300 LCD Security Figure 3 13 FloBoss 407 Operator Security sch a a D CH O O O 1 O O O O For all ROC FloBoss units enter the Operator ID three characters and Password four numbers between 0000 and 9999 that must match one of the entries in ROCLINK Security screen so NOTE Select Utilities gt Security to edit ROCLINK log on security and to set security for who may access specific menus once the user 1s logged to ROCLINK The Access Level provides security for the ROC communication ports depending on the value of the Comm Port Security parameter as defined ROC Comm Ports screen Disabled All login requested accepted Access Level is ignored Enabled Login requested accepted if the User ID and Password are setup in Utilities gt Security Upon successful login full read and write acce
353. ure 1992 Orifice Setup HE General Inputs Gas Quality Advanced Sampler Instrument Calib Alarms Low Alarm 1000 MCF Day High Alarm 10000 MCF Day REX Alarming Ce Disabled COn Alarm Set C OnAlarm Clear C On Alarm Set and Clear Active Alarms 2 Update Iw o x Cancel Apply Figure 5 17 AGA Alarms 3 Enter the Low Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the calculated flow value must fall to generate a Low Alarm The units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or cubic meters per day m day if Metric conversion 1s enabled 4 Enter the High Alarm limit value in engineering units to which the calculated flow value must rise to generate a High Alarm The units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or cubic meters per day m day if Metric conversion 1s enabled 5 Select the RBX Alarming option to configure Spontaneous Report By Exception SRBX alarming for this point Disabled The RBX Alarming is turned OFF On Alarm Set The point enters an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report By Exception message to the host On Alarm Clear The point leaves an alarm condition the ROC generates a Spontaneous Report By Exception message to the host On Alarm Set and Clear In either condition an RBX message generates to the host Y NOTE RBX Alarming requires the communications port to be pro
354. ure B 13 Commands Menu Listing The cursor keys provide movement within the list and lt Esc gt removes the list from the Workspace In the pop up Figure B 12 double click on an item to choose it and place it in the active cell in the Workspace In the menu listing Figure B 13 double click on an item to choose it and place it in the active cell in the Workspace or drag and drop the item onto the active cell Click the X to close the listing Y NOTE Select Options gt Auto Parameter Info to allow the ARGUMENTI and ARGUMENT cells additional functionality When in an ARGUMENT cell press lt Shift amp gt to display the Tags pop up B 9 Monitor Menu FST Two other modes of operation are available for the FST Editor Monitor and Trace Monitor mode allows for continual viewing of the present contents of the FST structure in the ROC or FloBoss as it is modified Refer to Section B 10 Monitoring an FST on page B 17 for more information Trace mode allows you to examine execution of an FST one STEP at a time for debugging purposes Table B 3 displays the keystrokes used in Monitor and Trace mode Table B 3 Monitor and Trace Mode Keystrokes B 16 FST Editor Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 10 Monitoring an FST Use the Monitor menu in FST Monitor mode to select which FST to Monitor turn Trace mode on and off Close the FST monitor Registers monitor Timers monitor l 2 Miscellaneous Registers monito
355. urns you to the last used place in the menu structure screen or other place from which the dialog box originated If a menu is active lt Esc gt closes the last opened menu taking you up one level in the menu structure If the menu bar 1s active lt Esc gt de selects all menu options Press the lt Alt gt key or click with the mouse to reactivate the menu bar lt Ctrl N gt Creates a new configuration file lt Ctrl O gt Opens a configuration file lt Ctrl S gt Saves the current configuration file 1 7 5 Help System The Help menu provides detailed on screen information about getting started with ROCLINK software performing keyboard operations It lists the Help topics and provides ROCLINK software version The Status Line help serves two purposes first on the left side of the line brief information about the currently highlighted menu item configuration parameter or button 1s provided second on the right side of the line the communications port or file being used for configuration 1s indicated Rev 05 03 Getting Started 1 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 1 7 6 Basic Navigation When you initially connect to ROCLINK for Windows software the ROC Root directory displays the Communication Directory Tree Refer to Section d ROC Directory After connecting to a ROC or FloBoss the Configuration Tree Menu displays Refer to Figure L ROCLINK For Windows On Line Ki File Edit View ROC Configure Meter
356. urs and the hardware update procedure does not complete successfully Typically you select Yes If the firmware download was not completed successfully the first time or you desire to use an existing backup select No 3 Click Start or press lt Enter gt SY so NOTE Before removing and restoring power in the following steps ensure that all input devices output devices and processes remain in a safe state Be sure to observe all cautions and procedures given in the hardware documentation 4 When prompted remove power from the FloBoss and replace the hardware 5 Reapply power to the FloBoss and click Continue or press lt Enter gt 6 When reloading of backups is complete Upgrade Complete displays indicating that the FloBoss has been successfully upgraded The actions are recorded in the Event Log Click OK or press lt Enter gt to return to ROCLINK software menus Rev 05 03 Configuring System Parameters 3 17 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 3 8 Upgrade to FlashPAC When using a ROC300 Series unit with a ROCPAC use Upgrade to FlashPAC upgrade to a FlashPAC NOTE If you are using an Industry or Measurement Canada ROC with a ROCPAC your configuration will not transfer to the FlashPAC Print a hard copy of your current ROCPAC configuration using Print Configuration or the EFM Reports utility and then use that information to re configure your ROC If your current configuration includes Point Type 28 Run parameter or Poin
357. ve Figure 3 11 ROCLINK Security 2 Enter the three alphanumeric characters for the Operator ID which is typically the initials of the person who operates the device Each Operator ID must be unique Default LOI 3 Enter the four numeric characters between 0000 and 9999 to define the Operator Password Users can have the same Password Default 1000 4 Enter the Access Level number from 0 to 5 where Level O is the lowest level Access Level security determines which functions the user has access to AFTER they are connected to a ROC or FloBoss Access Level 0 only allows access to several options in the File and Display menus plus all options in the Help menu Level 1 allows access to the menu options of Level 0 and several options in the View menu Level 2 allows access the menu options of all lower level options Collect Data EFM reports Quick Setup and the Meter menu Level 3 allows access the menu options of all lower level options several options in the ROC and File menu and the Configuration menu 3 12 Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual Level 4 allows access the menu options of all lower level options and several options in the Utilities menu Level 5 the system administrator level allows access to all menus and options 3 4 2 ROC Security Depending upon the type of ROC or FloBoss that you are configuring the ROC gt ROC Security screen performs various f
358. ve without affecting the output Set the Integral Deadband to a value that is practical for the control loop to eliminate constant cycling If the Process Variable is within the Integral Deadband value of the Setpoint no output corrections are sent to the TDOs 10 Set the SP Ramp Rate as the Setpoint ramp is the maximum rate per minute at which the Setpoint and the Primary Process Variable are allowed to ramp to a new value 11 When Manual Tracking is set to Enabled the loop Setpoint tracks the Process Variable when the loop is in Manual mode This is typically used to eliminate a bump when transferring back to the Automatic mode Rev 05 03 PID with TDO Control A 7 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual A 8 PID with TDO Control Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual APPENDIX B FST EDITOR B 1 Function Sequence Table Introduction The Function Sequence Table FST capability allows you to define actions to be taken when a set of conditions exists For example an FST could be used for emergency shutdown control or in any similar application that requires logic sequencing capability FSTs are configured by using the FST Editor An FST defines the input to output relationships in the ROC or FloBoss through a set of user selected instructions called functions These functions which define the specific actions to be performed are executed in their specified sequence The functions are normally executed in top to bottom or
359. w Reading EU and High Reading EU 8 Enter the Units as al0 character name for the engineering units assigned to the TDO output For example MCF or CFM Rev 05 03 Configuring Basic I O 4 15 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 4 6 Pl Pulse Input Configuration Pulse Inputs PI are pulse trains square wave signals generated by measurement devices such as turbine meters The Pulse Input accepts digital level On Off signals from an external KA device and accumulates the changes over a configured period of time The PI can also determine a rate from the accumulated pulses over a configured period of time NOTE Pulse Inputs are not available with the FloBoss 103 1 Select Configure gt I O gt PI Points Pulse Input dE Pulse Input El x General Advanced General Advanced Alarms Pulse Inputs i Bes Point Number Pulse Inputs Point Number fa 7 EU Value Tag EU Value o Tag FCI Deflt Scan Period this Scan Period 5 000000 Secs OS Counts Accum d Pulses SE Accurn d Pulses fo oo Conversion po Today s Total Pulses Today Today s Total fo festerdays s Total o 000000 T A ee 1 UnCorrected Accum o 000000 Scanning EE jao CG Enabled f Disabled Current Rate ona Enabled C Disabled Active Alarms Active Alarms Alarming PE None Enabled C Disabled Copy 2 Update ox x Cancel Apply Copy La Paste 2 Update Iw o
360. y char Set Characters Character Set2 y A a EE o o EE E EE EE EE AIB IENEI TEITE MG E SE BE SES 5 215 EN 6 SES 67 SES 050 let att 9 lee 5 ee es A IBIS D E EIC ME SE lech PES 457 Weist EA 100 SR Letz ES VSIT TO 6 ken lee feel Lee nl spies Fl ema WE Figure C 1 ROC Display so NOTE Use the mouse or lt Alt F6 gt keys to move between the buttons Update Use this button to update all TLP live data information with the current reading from the On Line ROC or FloBoss The message Reading Data appears in the Status Line Autoscan Provides an automatic update on intervals lasting one to three seconds Stop Scan Stops Autoscan Edit Display Change currently selected display Character Set Show the Character Set currently selected for building the display This button toggles between viewing and not viewing Character Sets Eight different character sets are supported two for upper and lower case alphabetical characters and six for various types of graphical characters Rev 05 03 Custom Displays C 1 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual TLP Box Enter live data from the ROC or FloBoss To use the TLP Box first determine the Point Type to use as a flow input by highlighting it Next select the exact Logical Number For example an Analog Input Point Type that you might select is AIN A 2 Finally select the specific Parameter t
361. y Analog Input Point Number 2 STEP 4 Compare gt the measured flow rate to 23 percent STEP 5 The flow is expected to be at least 25 percent after 1 minute If the Timer CT has not expired and flow is less than 25 percent remain in the loop until the flow reaches 25 percent or the Timer expires If the 1 minute Timer has expired and the flow is not at least 25 percent then the control valve is closed STEP 6 AO closes the control valve to O percent flow STEP 7 After the control valve is closed set another Timer WT for 1 hour 3600 sec before attempting to open the valve again 9 STEP 8 GO restarts the FST at STEP 0 The FST Timer is an unsigned long data type 32 bit integer ROCLINK software can handle timer numbers up to 4 294 967 295 However when writing an FST that sets the Timer as shown in the following example attempt to restrict the number to no larger than 8 388 608 Any number larger than this value can lose significance when it is converted to a single precision number B 16 Control related Commands FST This section shows examples of Analog Output Discrete Output and Timed Duration Output control commands Rev 05 03 FST Editor B 31 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual B 16 1 Analog Output Control Command This is an example of an Analog Output control command in an FST 100 UC OUTPUT LABEL 0 UC OUTPUT LABEL 1041 FED A9 EI Al 571 FST SEQ 1 AR STEP 0 V
362. ystem menu and using the Revision Info tab Perform a basic Cold Start None to reload the configuration from EEPROM or internal configuration memory Check the configuration and FSTs if not correct reload them from the disk files created in Step 1 Configuring System Parameters Rev 05 03 ROCLINK for Windows User Manual 3 7 Update Hardware When using a FloBoss 500 Series use Update Hardware to make a major modification to the hardware such as replacing the MPU board or replacing the flash chip or any other modification in which you are concerned that the configuration will be lost This option does not update ROCLINK software NOTE If the MPU board is being replaced you lose the History Event and Alarm Logs To preserve the contents of the logs save them to a file using Collect ROC Data before starting Note that the History Event and Alarm Logs cannot be loaded back in To update your hardware 1 Select Utilities gt Update Hardware 2 Click Yes to create a backup of your configuration files The backup files containing the current FloBoss configuration calibration and communication settings and FST are created in the C Program Files ROCLINK for Windows Data directory These backup files named backup fcf backup c_c and backup fsb respectively are automatically reloaded after the hardware is installed Y so NOTE Do not select No unless you have already attempted the procedure once otherwise an error occ

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Les Talents Cachés De Votre Esprit: Plus Intelligent Que Vous Ne    TeachSpin Muon Physics Manual  Drupal - CEH.vn  MC320 Thermal Imager Manual  Achat 208 HL passive mid-range speaker user manual  Sony VAIO VGN-NS110E User Guide Manual  Manual PDF    SA_GERMAN CNC-Calc v6 Mill + lathe Tutorial  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file